7 Series
Owner's Manual for Vehicle
Thank you for choosing a BMW.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control
you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW.
Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It con‐
tains important information on vehicle operation that will help
you make full use of the technical features available in your
BMW. The manual also contains information designed to en‐
hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to
maintaining the value of your BMW.
Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in
the appendix of the printed Owner's Handbook for Vehicle.
Supplementary information can be found in the additional bro‐
chures in the onboard literature.
We wish you a safe and enjoyable ride
BMW AG
The Owner's Manual is available in many countries as an app.
Additional information on the Internet:
www.bmw.com/bmw_drivers_guide
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
© 2015 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written
consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English VI/15, 07 15 490
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached
without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Contents
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐
ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to
page 302.
6 Information
At a glance
14 Cockpit
19 Idle state, operating and drive readiness
21 iDrive
30 BMW gesture control
33 Voice activation system
36 BMW Touch Command
38 General settings
49 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Controls
54 Opening and closing
76 Adjusting
93 Transporting children safely
97 Driving
113 Displays
129 Lights
136 Safety
163 Driving stability control systems
168 Driver assistance systems
200 Driving comfort
203 Climate control
215 Interior equipment
225 Storage compartments
Driving tips
234 Things to remember when driving
237 Loading
240 Saving fuel
Mobility
250 Refueling
252 Fuel
254 Wheels and tires
271 Engine compartment
273 Engine oil
277 Coolant
279 Maintenance
281 Replacing components
286 Breakdown assistance
291 Care
Reference
298 Technical data
301 Appendix
302 Everything from A to Z
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Information
Using this Owner's Manual
Orientation
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐
ular topic is by using the index.
An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in
the first chapter.
Updates made after the editorial
deadline
Any updates made after the editorial deadline
can be found in the appendix of the printed
Owner's Handbook for Vehicle.
User's manual for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication
The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment, and Communication is available as
printed book at your service center.
The topics of Navigation, Entertainment, and
Communication can be retrieved on the Con‐
trol Display via the Integrated Owner's Manual
and in the BMW Driver’s Guide app.
Additional sources of
information
A dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop will be glad to an‐
swer additional questions at any time.
Information on BMW, e.g., on technology, is
available on the Internet: www.bmwusa.com.
BMW Driver’s Guide App
The Owner's Manual is available in many coun‐
tries as an app. Additional information on the
Internet:
www.bmw.com/bmw_drivers_guide
Symbols and displays
Symbols in the Owner's Manual
Indicates precautions that must be followed
precisely in order to avoid the possibility of
personal injury and serious damage to the
vehicle.
◄ Marks the end of a specific item of
information.
Refers to measures that can be taken to
help protect the environment.
"..." Identifies display texts in vehicle used to
select individual functions.
›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice
activation system.
››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by the
voice activation system.
Action steps
Action steps to be carried out are presented as
numbered list. The steps must be carried out
in the defined order.
1.
First action step.
2. Second action step.
Enumerations
Enumerations without mandatory order or al‐
ternative possibilities are presented as list with
bullet points.
▷ First possibility.
▷ Second possibility.
Symbols on vehicle components
Indicates that you should consult the
relevant section of this Owner's Manual for
information on a particular part or assembly.
Seite 6
Information
6
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Vehicle features and options
This Owner's Manual describes all models and
all standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series.
Therefore, in this Owner's Manual, we also de‐
scribe and illustrate features that are not avail‐
able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐
lected optional features or the country-specific
version.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems.
The respectively applicable country provisions
must be observed when using the respective
features and systems.
For any options and equipment not described
in this Owner's Handbook, refer to the Supple‐
mentary Owner's Handbooks.
On right-hand drive vehicles, some controls
are arranged differently from what is shown in
the illustrations.
Status of the Owner's
Manual
Basic information
The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a
policy of constant development that is con‐
ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to
embody the highest quality and safety stan‐
dards. In rare cases, therefore, the features de‐
scribed in this Owner's Manual may differ from
those in your vehicle.
Updates made after the editorial
deadline
Any updates made after the editorial deadline
can be found in the appendix of the printed
Owner's Handbook for Vehicle.
Own safety
Warranty
Your vehicle is technically configured for the
operating conditions and registration require‐
ments applying in the country of first delivery
also known as homologation. If your vehicle is
to be operated in a different country it might be
necessary to adapt your vehicle to potentially
differing operating conditions and permit re‐
quirements. If your vehicle does not comply
with the homologation requirements in a cer‐
tain country you may not be able to lodge war‐
ranty claims for your vehicle there. Further in‐
formation on warranty is available from a
dealer’s service center.
Maintenance and repairs
Advanced technology, e.g., the use of modern
materials and high-performance electronics,
requires suitable maintenance and repair work.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
that you entrust corresponding procedures to
a BMW dealer’s service center. If you choose
to use another service facility, BMW recom‐
mends use of a facility that performs work, e.g.
maintenance and repair, according to BMW
specifications with properly trained personnel,
referred to in this Owner's Manual as "another
qualified service center or repair shop".
If work is performed improperly, e.g. mainte‐
nance and repair, there is a risk of subsequent
damage and related safety risks.
Parts and accessories
BMW recommends the use of parts and ac‐
cessory products approved by BMW.
Approved parts and accessories, and advice
on their use and installation are available from
a BMW dealer's service center.
BMW parts and accessories were tested by
BMW for their safety and suitability in BMW
vehicles.
Seite 7
Information
7
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
BMW warrants genuine BMW parts and acces‐
sories.
BMW does not evaluate whether each individ‐
ual product from another manufacturer can be
used with BMW vehicles without presenting a
safety hazard, even if a country-specific official
approval was issued. BMW does not evaluate
whether these products are suitable for BMW
vehicles under all usage conditions.
California Proposition 65 Warning
California laws require us to state the following
warning:
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo‐
bile components and parts, including compo‐
nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐
cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects and reproductive harm. In addition,
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐
ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐
lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐
pounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used
engine oil contains chemicals that have caused
cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect
your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and
water.
Service and warranty
We recommend that you read this publication
thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐
lowing warranties:
▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.
▷ Federal Emissions System Defect War‐
ranty.
▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.
▷ California Emission Control System Lim‐
ited Warranty.
Detailed information about these warranties is
listed in the Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
designed to meet the particular operating con‐
ditions and homologation requirements in your
country and continental region in order to de‐
liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle
is operated under those conditions. If you wish
to operate your vehicle in another country or
region, you may be required to adapt your ve‐
hicle to meet different prevailing operating
conditions and homologation requirements.
You should also be aware of any applicable
warranty limitations or exclusions for such
country or region. In such case, please contact
Customer Relations for further information.
Maintenance
Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the
road safety, operational reliability and the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Specifications for required maintenance meas‐
ures:
▷ BMW Maintenance system
▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models
▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
If the vehicle is not maintained according to
these specifications, this could result in seri‐
ous damage to the vehicle. Such damage is
not covered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Data memory
Many electronic components on your vehicle
are equipped with data memories that tempo‐
rarily or permanently store technical informa‐
tion about the condition of the vehicle, events
and faults. This technical information generally
records the state of a component, a module, a
system or the environment:
Seite 8
Information
8
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
▷ Operating mode of system components, fill
levels for instance.
▷ Status messages for the vehicle and from
its individual components, e.g., wheel rota‐
tion speed/vehicle speed, deceleration,
transverse acceleration.
▷ Malfunctions and faults in important sys‐
tem components, e.g., lights and brakes.
▷ Responses by the vehicle to special situa‐
tions such as airbag deployment or engag‐
ing the stability control system.
▷ Ambient conditions, such as temperature.
This data is purely technical in nature and is
used to detect and correct faults and to opti‐
mize vehicle functions. Motion profiles over
routes traveled cannot be created from this
data. When service offerings are used, e.g., re‐
pair services, service processes, warranty
claims, quality assurance, this technical infor‐
mation can be read out from the event and
fault memories by employees of the dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop, including the manufacturer,
using special diagnostic tools. You can obtain
further information there if you need it. After an
error is corrected, the information in the fault
memory is deleted or overwritten on a continu‐
ous basis.
With the vehicle in use there are situations
where you can associate these technical data
with individuals if combined with other infor‐
mation, e.g., an accident report, damage to the
vehicle, eye witness accounts — possibly with
the assistance of an expert.
Additional functions that are contractually
agreed with the customer - such as vehicle
emergency locating - you can transmit certain
vehicle data from the vehicle.
Event Data Recorder EDR
This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐
corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐
tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting
a road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐
standing how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a
short period of time, typically 30 seconds or
less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
▷ How various systems in your vehicle were
operating.
▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were fastened.
▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal.
▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better under‐
standing of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data, e.g., name,
gender, age, and crash location, are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce‐
ment, could combine the EDR data with the
type of personally identifying data routinely ac‐
quired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the vehi‐
cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the ve‐
hicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law
enforcement, that have the special equipment,
can read the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
Seite 9
Information
9
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Vehicle identification
number
The vehicle identification number can be found
in the engine compartment.
The vehicle identification number can also be
found behind the windshield.
Reporting safety defects
For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause in‐
jury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis‐
tration NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of
North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, West‐
wood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer,
or BMW of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,
NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washing‐
ton, DC 20590. You can also obtain other in‐
formation about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada, De‐
fect Investigations and Recalls, may call the
toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.
Seite 10
Information
10
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Seite 11
Information
11
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
At a glance
These overviews of buttons, switches and
displays are intended to familiarize you with your
vehicle. You will also become quickly acquainted
with the available control concepts and options.
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Cockpit
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
All around the steering wheel
1 Seating comfort features
Gentleman function 78
Seat, mirror, and steering wheel
memory 87
Massage function 88
2 Roller sunblind in the rear win‐
dow 72
3 Safety switch for the windows
and roller sunblinds 71
4 Power windows 70
5 Exterior mirror operation 85
6 Lights
Front fog lights 132
Night Vision 147
Seite 14
At a glance Cockpit
14
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Lights off
Automatic headlight con‐
trol 130
Daytime running lights 131
Parking lights 129
Automatic headlight con‐
trol 130
Adaptive Light Control 131
High-beam Assistant 132
Low beams 129
Instrument lighting 133
Right roadside parking
lamp 130
Left roadside parking lamp 130
7 Central locking system
Unlocking 63
Lock 63
8 Steering column stalk, left
Turn signal 103
High beams, head‐
light flasher 103
High-beam Assistant 132
On-board computer 122
9 Steering wheel buttons, left
Cruise control on/off 175
Active Cruise Control on/off 168
Resume speed 175 , 168,
Pause or continue cruise con‐
trol 175 , 168
Increase distance 168
Reduce distance 168
With steering and lane guidance
assistant: adjust speed 168
Steering and lane control assis‐
tant on/off 177
Cruise control rocker switch 175, 168,
10 Instrument cluster 113
11 Steering wheel buttons, right
Entertainment source
Volume
Voice activation system 33
Telephone
Thumbwheel for selection lists 121
12 Steering column stalk, right
Seite 15
Cockpit At a glance
15
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Wiper 103
Rain sensor 104
Cleaning the windshield and
headlights 105
13 Start/stop engine 97
Auto Start/Stop function 98
14 Horn
15 Steering wheel heating 87
16 Adjust steering wheel 87
17 Unlock hood 272
18 Open/close trunk lid 64
19 Glove compartment 226
All around the center console
1 Control Display 21
2 Fan 206
3 Hazard warning system 286
Intelligent Safety 139
NFC antenna 43
Seite 16
At a glance Cockpit
16
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
4 Glove compartment 225
5 Radio
Multimedia
6 Automatic climate control 203
7 Controller with buttons 22
8 Parking brake 100
Automatic Hold 101
9 PDC Park Distance Control 180
Without Surround View: rearview
camera 184
Surround View 187
Cross traffic warning 197
Parking assistant 193
Surround View: Panorama
View 187
HDC Hill Descent Control 165
Air suspension 200
10 Driving Dynamics Control 110
DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol 163
11 Steptronic transmission selector
lever 106
Seite 17
Cockpit At a glance
17
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
All around the roofliner
1 Intelligent Emergency Re‐
quest 286
2 Glass sunroof 73
3 Indicator lamp, front-seat pas‐
senger airbag 138
4 Reading lights 133
5 Open rear sliding visor 74
Close rear sliding visor 74
6 Interior lights 133
Seite 18
At a glance Cockpit
18
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Idle state, operating and drive readiness
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
General information
Depending on the situation, the vehicle is in
one of the three states:
▷ Idle state.
▷ Operating readiness.
▷ Drive readiness.
Idle state
The concept
The vehicle is switched off in idle state. All
electronic systems/power consumers are de‐
activated.
General information
The vehicle is in idle state prior to opening
from the outside and after exiting and locking.
Information
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can put itself into
motion and roll away. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against
rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, turn the
front wheels in the direction of the curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, also secure
the vehicle, e.g. with a wheel chock.◀
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
move the vehicle and endanger themselves
and traffic, e.g. with the following actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing of doors or windows.
▷ Shifting the selector lever into neutral.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Carry remote control along when exiting
and lock the vehicle.◀
Idle state automatic
The idle state is automatically established:
▷ After several minutes, if no operation takes
place on the vehicle.
▷ If the charging state of the vehicle batteries
is low.
▷ If one of the front doors is opened, de‐
pending on the setting via iDrive,
The idle state is not automatically established
while a phone call is active.
Establishing idle state when opening
the front doors
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. "Turn off after door opening"
Seite 19
Idle state, operating and drive readiness At a glance
19
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Idle state manual
Establish idle state in the vehicle after trip end:
Hold button down until the OFF
indicator on the instrument clus‐
ter goes out.
Operating readiness
The concept
When operating readiness is switched on,
most functions can be used while the vehicle is
stationary. Desired settings can be adjusted.
General information
The vehicle is in operating readiness state af‐
ter opening via the front doors.
Display
OFF is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster. The drivetrain is
switched off and operating read‐
iness switched on.
Drive readiness
The concept
Activating drive readiness corresponds to
switching on the engine.
Information
Some functions, such as DSC, can only be
used in drive readiness state. Observe further
hints regarding drive readiness, refer to
page 97.
Activating drive readiness
Drive readiness is switched on
via the Start/Stop button:
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
Display
READY is displayed in the in‐
strument cluster.
Switch off drive readiness
Press the Start/Stop button to switch off the
drive readiness. The vehicle switches into op‐
erating readiness state.
Seite 20
At a glance Idle state, operating and drive readiness
20
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
iDrive
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
The concept
The iDrive combines the functions of many
switches. These functions can be operated via
controller or touchscreen.
Information
WARNING
Operating the integrated information
system and communication devices while driv‐
ing can distract from traffic. It is possible to
lose control of the vehicle. There is risk of an
accident. Only use the systems or devices
when the traffic situation allows. If necessary
stop and use the systems and devices while
the vehicle is stationary.◀
Control elements
Overview
1 Control Display with touchscreen
2 Controller with buttons and touchpad
Control Display
Information
▷ To clean the Control Display, follow the
care instructions, refer to page 294.
▷ Do not place objects close to the Control
Display; otherwise, the Control Display can
be damaged.
▷ In the case of very high temperatures on
the Control Display, e.g. due to intense so‐
lar radiation, the brightness may be re‐
duced down to complete deactivation.
Once the temperature is reduced, e.g.
through shadow or climate control system,
the normal functions are re-established.
Switching on
1.
Turn on operations.
2. Press the controller.
Switch off
1. Press button.
Seite 21
iDrive At a glance
21
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
2. "Turn off control display"
Controller
General information
The buttons can be used to open the menus
directly. The controller can be used to select
menu items and enter the settings.
Some iDrive functions can be operated using
the touchpad on the controller, refer to
page 26.
▷ Turn.
▷ Press.
▷ Move in four directions.
Buttons on controller
Press button Function
Press once: call up main menu.
Press twice: open recently
used menus.
Open the Communication
menu.
Open the Media/Radio menu.
Open destination input menu
for navigation.
Open navigation map.
Open previous panel.
Open Options menu.
Operating with the controller
Opening the main menu
Press button.
Seite 22
At a glance iDrive
22
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
The main menu is displayed.
All iDrive functions can be called up via the
main menu.
Selecting menu items
Highlighted menu items can be selected.
1.
Turn the controller until the desired menu
item is highlighted.
2. Press the controller.
Menu items in the Owner's Manual
In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be
selected are set in quotation marks, e.g.
"System settings".
Changing between panels
After a menu item is selected, e.g., "System
settings", a new panel is displayed.
▷ Move the controller to the left.
Closes current display and shows previous
display.
▷
Press button.
The previous display opens.
▷ Move the controller to the right.
New display is opened.
White arrows pointing to the left or right indi‐
cate that additional panels can be opened.
Opening recently used menus
The recently used menus can be displayed.
Press button twice.
Opening Options menu
Press button.
The Options menu is displayed.
The Options menu consists of different areas:
▷ Screen settings, e.g., "Split screen".
▷ Control options for the selected main
menu, e.g., for "Media/Radio".
▷ If applicable, further operating options for
the selected menu, e.g., "Save station".
Changing settings
1.
Select a field.
Seite 23
iDrive At a glance
23
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is displayed.
3. Press the controller.
Activating/deactivating the functions
Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
box. The checkbox indicates whether the func‐
tion is activated or deactivated. Selecting the
menu item activates or deactivates the func‐
tion.
Function is activated.
Function is deactivated.
Entering letters and numbers
General information
Letters and numbers can be entered using the
controller or the touchscreen.
The keyboard's display changes automatically.
Entry
1.
Turn the controller: select letters or num‐
bers.
2. : confirm entry.
Symbol Function
Press the controller: delete the let‐
ter or number.
Hold controller down: delete all let‐
ters and numbers.
Switching between cases, letters and
numbers
Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
tween entering upper and lower case, letters
and numbers.
Symbol Function
Enter the letters.
Enter the numbers.
or
Change between capital and
lower-case letters.
Entry comparison
When entering names and addresses, the
choice is narrowed down with every letter en‐
tered and letters may be added automatically.
Entries are continuously compared with data
stored in the vehicle.
▷ Only those letters are offered during input
for which data is available.
▷ Destination search: names of locations
may be entered in languages available
through iDrive.
Using alphabetical lists
For alphabetical lists with more than 30 en‐
tries, the letters for which there is an entry are
displayed at the left edge.
1.
Turn the controller to the left or right
quickly.
All letters for which there are entries are
displayed on the left side.
2. Select the first letter of the desired entry.
The cursor jumps to the first entry of the
selected letter.
Seite 24
At a glance iDrive
24
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Operating via touchscreen
General information
The Control Display is equipped with a touch‐
screen.
Touch touchscreen with your fingers. Do not
use any objects.
Opening the main menu
Tap symbol.
All iDrive functions can be called up via the
main menu.
Selecting menu items
Tap desired menu item.
Menu items in the Owner's Manual
In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be
selected are set in quotation marks, e.g.
"System settings".
Changing between panels
After a menu item is selected, a new panel is
displayed.
The white arrow indicates that additional pan‐
els can be called up.
▷ Swipe to the left.
▷ Tap symbol.
New display is opened.
Opening recently used menus
Tap symbol twice.
Changing settings
Settings such as volumes can be changed via
the touchscreen.
▷ Slide in the selected field to the right or
left, until the desired setting is displayed.
▷ , Tap symbol.
Activating/deactivating the functions
Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
box. The checkbox indicates whether the func‐
tion is activated or deactivated. Selecting the
menu item activates or deactivates the func‐
tion.
Function is activated.
Function is deactivated.
Seite 25
iDrive At a glance
25
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Entering letters and numbers
General information
Letters and numbers can be entered using the
controller or the touchscreen.
The keyboard's display changes automatically.
Symbol Function
Tapping the symbol: delete the let‐
ter or number.
Tapping the symbol for an extended
period: delete all letters or numbers.
Switching between cases, letters and
numbers
Symbol Function
Enter the letters.
Enter the numbers.
or
Change between capital and
lower-case letters.
Operating navigation map
The navigation map can be moved with the
touchscreen.
Function Controls
Enlarge/shrink
map.
Drag in or out with the fin‐
gers.
Rotate map. Move fingers in a circle.
Touchpad
General information
Some iDrive functions can be operated using
the touchpad on the controller.
Selecting functions
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "System settings"
3. "Touchpad"
4. Select desired setting.
▷ "Speller": enter letters and numbers.
▷ "Interactive map": viewing the interac‐
tive map.
▷ "Browser": enter Internet addresses.
▷ "Search fields": write letters without
selecting the list field.
▷ "Audio feedback": pronounces entered
letters and numbers.
▷ "Two-finger scrolling": operate lists.
Entering letters and numbers
Entering letters requires some practice at the
beginning. When entering, pay attention to the
following:
▷ The system recognizes capital and lower
case letters. For the input of upper/lower
case letters and numbers, it may be neces‐
sary to switch to the corresponding input
mode, e.g. when upper and lower case let‐
ters are written the same way. Switching
between cases, numbers and letters, refer
to page 24.
▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on
the Control Display.
▷ Always enter associated characters, such
as accents or periods so that the letter can
be clearly recognized. Possible input de‐
pends on the set language. Where neces‐
sary, enter special characters via the con‐
troller.
▷ To delete a character, swipe to the left on
the touchpad.
▷ To enter a blank space, slide to the right in
the center of the touchpad.
▷ To enter a hyphen, slide to the right in the
upper area of the touchpad.
Seite 26
At a glance iDrive
26
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
▷ To enter an underscore, swipe to the right
in the lower area of the touchpad.
Using interactive map and Internet
Via touch-pad move the interactive map in the
navigation system and Internet sites.
Function Controls
Move interactive map or
Internet sites.
Swipe in the ap‐
propriate direc‐
tion.
Enlarge/shrink interactive
map or Internet sites.
Drag in or out on
the touchpad with
fingers.
Display the menu or
open a link in the Inter‐
net.
Tap once.
Changing settings
You may change control display settings via
touchpad. Slide left or right accordingly.
Split screen
General information
Additional information can be displayed on the
right side of the split screen, e.g., information
from the on-board comupter.
In the divided screen view, the so-called split
screen, this information remains visible even
when you change to another menu.
Switching the split screen on and off
1. Press button.
2. "Split screen"
Selecting the display
1. Press button.
2. Move the controller to the right until the
split screen is selected.
3. Press the controller.
4. Select desired setting.
Specifying the number of displays
It is possible to specify the number of displays.
1.
Move the controller to the right until the
split screen is selected.
2. Press the controller.
3. "Personalize menu"
4. Select desired setting.
5. Move the controller to the left.
Status information
Status field
The following information is displayed in the
status field:
▷ Messages.
▷ Wireless network reception strength.
▷ Current entertainment source.
▷ Time.
Status field symbols
The symbols are grouped as follows.
Radio symbols
Symbol Meaning
HD Radio station is being received.
Seite 27
iDrive At a glance
27
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Telephone symbols
Symbol Meaning
Incoming or outgoing call.
Missed call.
Wireless network reception
strength.
Symbol flashes: network search.
Wireless network is not available.
Roaming is active.
Text message was received.
Message received.
Reminder.
Sending not possible.
Contacts are imported.
Entertainment symbols
Symbol Meaning
CD/DVD player.
Music collection.
AUX-IN port.
AUX-IN port in the front or in the
rear.
Bluetooth audio.
USB audio interface.
Mobile phone audio interface.
Online Entertainment.
WLAN.
iPod.
Additional symbols
Symbol Meaning
Check Control message.
Spoken instructions are turned off.
Request of the current vehicle posi‐
tion.
Programmable memory
buttons
General information
The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
rectly, e.g., radio stations, navigation destina‐
tions, phone numbers and menu entries.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Saving a function
1.
Select function via iDrive.
2.
Press and hold the desired button
until a signal sounds.
Running a function
Press button.
The function will work immediately. This
means, e.g., that the number is dialed when a
phone number is selected.
Displaying the button assignment
Touch buttons with bare fingers. Do not wear
gloves or use objects.
The key assignment is displayed at top edge of
screen.
Seite 28
At a glance iDrive
28
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Deleting the button assignments
1. Press buttons 1 and 7 simultaneously for
approx. five seconds.
2. "OK"
Seite 29
iDrive At a glance
29
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
BMW gesture control
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
The concept
Several iDrive functions can be operated using
BMW gesture control.
Overview
The gestures are captured by a camera in the
roofliner.
Perform gestures underneath the interior mir‐
ror.
Activation/deactivation
About iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "System settings"
3. "Gestures"
4. "Gesture control"
Adjusting
▷ "Display tips": the possible gesture is
shown on the Control Display.
▷ "Audio feedback": an acoustic signal is
outputted once the gesture is recognized.
Seite 30
At a glance BMW gesture control
30
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Possible gestures
Gesture Controls Function
Move index finger forward and backward in the direction
of the screen.
Accept call.
Confirm Check Con‐
trol message.
Swipe with the hand across the width of the Control Dis‐
play in the direction of the front-passenger side.
Reject call.
Close popup.
Slowly move forearm in a circular pattern with the index
finger stretched out forward.
Gestures are detected after one circular motion.
Increasing the vol‐
ume.
Slowly move forearm in a circular pattern with the index
finger stretched out forward.
Gestures are detected after one circular motion.
Reducing the volume.
Pinch with thumb and index finger and move hand hori‐
zontally to the right or left.
Surround View: turn
camera view.
Move stretched out index and middle finger forward. Individually assigna‐
ble gesture.
Execute gestures clearly.
The gestures can also be executed on the
front-passenger side.
Assigning gesture individually
About iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "System settings"
3. "Gestures"
4. "Function assignment"
5. Select desired setting.
Seite 31
BMW gesture control At a glance
31
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
System limits
Gesture recognition by the camera can be dis‐
turbed by the following circumstances:
▷ The camera objective is covered.
▷ The camera objective is contaminated.
Clean the camera lenses, refer to
page 294.
▷ The gesture is executed outside of the de‐
tection range.
▷ The gesture can only be executed while
the vehicle is stationary.
Seite 32
At a glance BMW gesture control
32
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Voice activation system
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
The concept
▷ Most functions displayed on the Control
Display can be operated by voice com‐
mands via the voice activation system. The
system supports you with announcements
during input.
▷ Functions that can only be used when the
vehicle is stationary cannot be used via the
voice activation system.
▷ The system uses a special microphone on
the driver's side.
▷ ›...‹ Verbal instructions in the Owner's
Manual to use with the voice activation
system.
Requirements
Via the Control Display, set a language that is
also supported by the voice activation system
so that the spoken commands can be identi‐
fied.
Set the language, refer to page 38.
Using voice activation
Activating the voice activation system
1.
Press button on the steering
wheel.
2. Wait for the signal.
3. Say the command.
A command that is recognized by the voice
activation system is announced and dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
This symbol in the instrument cluster
indicates that the voice activation sys‐
tem is active.
If no other commands are available, use func‐
tion via iDrive.
Terminating the voice activation
system
Briefly press the button on the steer‐
ing wheel or ›Cancel‹.
Possible commands
Most menu items on the Control Display can
be voiced as commands.
Commends from other menus can also be
spoken.
You may select lists such as phone lists via
voice activation. Read these lists out loud ex‐
actly as they show in the respective list.
Displaying possible commands
Displayed in the top area of the Control Display
are:
▷ Possible commands for the current menu.
▷ Possible commands from other menus.
Seite 33
Voice activation system At a glance
33
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
▷ Status of the voice recognition.
▷ Status of the encrypted connection.
Help on the voice activation system
▷ To have the available spoken instructions
read out loud: ›Voice commands‹.
▷ Have information about the principle of op‐
eration for the voice activation system be
announced: ›General information on voice
control‹.
▷ Announce help for the current
menu: ›Help‹.
One example: open the tone
settings
The commands of the menu items are spoken
just as they are selected via the controller.
1.
Turn on the Entertainment sound output if
needed.
2.
Press button on the steering
wheel.
3. ›Media and radio‹
4. ›Tone‹
Adjusting
Setting the voice dialog
Set system to standard dialog or use a short
version.
The short version of the voice dialog plays
back short messages in abbreviated form.
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "System settings"
3. "Language"
4. "Speech mode:"
5. Select desired setting.
Selecting the input language
For some languages, the input language can
be selected.
About iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "System settings"
3. "Language"
4. "Voice control:"
5. Select desired setting.
Activating encrypted connection
By activating an encrypted connection, the
quality of voice recognition will be improved.
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "System settings"
3. "Language"
4. "Speech recognition via server"
Encrypted connection active.
Adjusting the volume
Turn the volume button during the spoken in‐
structions until the desired volume is set.
▷ The volume remains constant even if the
volume of other audio sources is changed.
▷ The volume is stored for the drive profile
currently used.
Information on Emergency
Requests
Do not use the voice activation system to ini‐
tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa‐
tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change.
This can unnecessarily delay the establish‐
ment of a phone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button, refer to
page 286, close to the interior mirror.
Seite 34
At a glance Voice activation system
34
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Environmental conditions
▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters
smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐
sis, and speed.
▷ Always say commands in the language of
the voice activation system.
▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun‐
roof closed to prevent noise interference.
▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.
Seite 35
Voice activation system At a glance
35
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
BMW Touch Command
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
BMW Touch Command
The concept
Important functions of the vehicle can be used
via BMW Touch Command.
▷ Seat adjustments for front passenger seat
and seats in the rear.
▷ Climate control in the rear.
▷ Sun protection.
▷ Ambient light.
▷ Ambient light accent.
▷ Bowers & Wilkins loudspeaker lighting.
▷ Audio sources front.
▷ Rear entertainment.
▷ Some functions of the telephone in the
rear.
General information
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, BMW
Touch Command is located in the rear console
or in the center armrest in the rear.
Control elements at a glance
Control elements
1 BMW Touch Command
2 Switching on/off
3 Removing
Tray
The tray in the center armrest in the rear has
the following functions:
▷ Storage and locking.
▷ Recharge the battery.
Insert BMW Touch Command into the tray
with the screen facing upward to ensure
proper locking. To charge the battery, insert
BMW Touch Command with the multifunction
socket to the left.
Buttons on the BMW Touch Command
Press but‐
ton
Function
Display list of last used applica‐
tions.
Display BMW application, press
button twice as needed.
Back.
Seite 36
At a glance BMW Touch Command
36
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Operating concept
1. Press button.
The main menu of the BMW application is
displayed.
2. Swipe to the left or right to display further
menus.
3. Tap on the desired menu.
4. Adjust the settings.
Exit the BMW application
Tap on menu item: "Apps"
Further information is displayed.
Language setting
The menu language depends on the iDrive set‐
tings.
Setting back to factory settings
BMW Touch Command can be set back to fac‐
tory settings.
All data and personal settings in the device
memory is deleted and the connection to the
vehicle is interrupted.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Reset to factory settings"
Seite 37
BMW Touch Command At a glance
37
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
General settings
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Language
Setting the language
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "System settings"
3. "Language"
4. "Language:"
5. Select desired setting.
The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the voice dialog
Voice dialog for the voice activation system,
refer to page 34.
Time
Setting the time zone
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "System settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Time zone:"
5. Select desired setting.
The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the time
About iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "System settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Time:"
5. Turn the controller until the desired hours
are displayed.
6. Press the controller.
7. Turn the controller until the desired mi‐
nutes are displayed.
8. Press the controller.
The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the time format
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "System settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Time format:"
5. Select desired setting.
The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐
rently used.
Instrument cluster with enhanced
features: setting the clock time
display
The clock time can be displayed in analog or
digital form.
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "System settings"
Seite 38
At a glance General settings
38
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. "Time"
6. Select desired setting.
The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐
rently used.
Automatic time setting
Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
the time, date and, if needed, the time zone are
updated automatically.
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "System settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Automatic time setting"
The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐
rently used.
Date
Setting the date
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "System settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Date:"
5. Turn the controller until the desired day is
displayed.
6. Press the controller.
7. Make the necessary settings for the month
and year.
The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the date format
About iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "System settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Date format:"
5. Select desired setting.
The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐
rently used.
Units of measurement
Setting the units of measurement
Set the units for e.g. fuel consumption, routes/
distances and temperature:
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "System settings"
3. "Units"
4. Select the desired menu item.
5. Select desired setting.
The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐
rently used.
Control Display
Brightness
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Control display"
5. "Brightness at night"
6. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐
ness is set.
7. Press the controller.
Seite 39
General settings At a glance
39
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐
rently used.
Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐
ness settings may not be clearly visible.
Screen saver
If no settings are made via iDriver, after a time
that can be set, a screen saver is displayed.
About iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "System settings"
3. "Pop-ups"
4. "Screensaver"
5. Select desired setting.
The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐
rently used.
Messages
The concept
The menu centrally displays all messages ar‐
riving in the vehicle in list form.
The following messages can be displayed:
▷ Traffic messages.
▷ Check Control messages.
▷ Communication messages, e.g. e-mail,
SMS or Twitter.
▷ Service requirements messages.
Messages are additionally displayed in the sta‐
tus field.
Retrieving messages
About iDrive:
1.
"Notifications"
2. Select the desired message.
The respective menu is opened, where the
message is displayed.
Deleting messages
All messages, except Check Control mes‐
sages, can be deleted from the list. Check
Control messages are displayed as long as
they are relevant.
About iDrive:
1. "Notifications"
2. Select the desired message.
3.
Press button.
4. "Delete this notification" or "Delete all
notifications"
Adjusting
The following settings can be adjusted:
▷ Select the applications, from which mes‐
sages will be permitted.
▷ Define the number of new messages per
application, e.g. maximum ten new e-mails.
▷ Sort the messages according to date or
priority.
▷ Combine several messages of the same
type.
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "System settings"
3. "Notifications"
4. Select desired setting.
Deleting personal in the
vehicle
The concept
Depending on the usage, the vehicle saves
personal data, such as stored radio stations.
These personal data can be permanently de‐
leted through iDrive.
Seite 40
At a glance General settings
40
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
General information
Depending on the equipment package, the fol‐
lowing data can be deleted:
▷ Profile settings.
▷ Stored radio stations.
▷ Stored Favorites buttons.
▷ Travel and on-board comupter information.
▷ Music collection.
▷ Navigation, e.g. stored destinations.
▷ Phone book.
▷ Online data, e.g. Favorites, cookies.
▷ Office data, e.g. voice notes.
▷ Login accounts.
Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up
to 15 minutes.
Functional requirement
Data can only be deleted while stationary.
Deleting data
Heed and follow the instructions on the Con‐
trol Display.
About iDrive:
1.
Turn on operations.
2. "My Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Delete personal data"
5. "Delete personal data"
6. "OK"
7. Exit and lock the vehicle.
After 15 minutes, the deletion process is com‐
pleted.
If not all of the data was deleted, repeat the de‐
letion.
Canceling deletion
Switch on the drive-ready function to cancel
deletion of the data.
Connections
The concept
Devices, such as mobile phones or laptops,
can be connected to the vehicle in different
ways and used.
▷ Connect mobile phone with the vehicle via
Bluetooth and use it.
▷ Listen to music of an audio player via Blue‐
tooth.
▷ Play back smartphone videos on the Con‐
trol Display.
▷ Use smartphone apps in the vehicle.
▷ Connect a device using the vehicle-
integrated WLAN hotspot to use the Inter‐
net.
▷ Use vehicle functions via Touch Com‐
mand, refer to page 36.
General information
All devices paired and/or connected with the
vehicle are displayed in the device list.
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
A symbol indicates, for which function a device
is used.
Symbol Function
"Telephone"
"Additional telephone"
"Bluetooth® audio"
"Apps"
"Miracast"
"Internet hotspot"
"Touch Command"
Seite 41
General settings At a glance
41
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Information
WARNING
Operating the integrated information
system and communication devices while driv‐
ing can distract from traffic. It is possible to
lose control of the vehicle. There is risk of an
accident. Only use the systems or devices
when the traffic situation allows. If necessary
stop and use the systems and devices while
the vehicle is stationary.◀
Compatible devices
General information
Details on which mobile phones and external
devices with a Bluetooth interface are sup‐
ported can be obtained at www.bmwusa.com/
bluetooth.
When pairing a mobile phone as telephone or
additional telephone, it is displayed which fea‐
tures are supported, e.g. brief messages.
▷ "Close and do not show again"
With the next pairing of the mobile phone,
there is no display of which features the
mobile phone supports.
▷ "OK"
With the next pairing of the mobile phone,
there is another display of which features
the mobile phone supports.
It is possible to choose whether there is a dis‐
play when pairing the mobile phone of which
features are supported.
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select device.
5. "Hint for Office functions"
Malfunctions may occur with other devices or
software versions.
Displaying the vehicle identification
number and software part number
The vehicle identification number and software
part number are needed to determine which
devices are supported. The software version of
the mobile phone may also be required.
About iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Bluetooth® info"
6. "System information"
A software update, refer to page 46, can be
performed, if needed.
Bluetooth connection
Functional requirements
▷ compatible device, refer to page 42.
▷ The device is ready for operation.
▷ Bluetooth is activated on the device and in
the vehicle, refer to page 42.
▷ Vehicle is stationary.
▷ Bluetooth pre-settings may be required on
the device, e.g. visibility, refer to the own‐
er's manual of the device.
▷ A number with at least four and a maximum
of 16 digits should be defined as the Blue‐
tooth passkey. It is only required once for
pairing.
Activating Bluetooth
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Bluetooth®"
Seite 42
At a glance General settings
42
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Activating/deactivating telephone
functions
To use all supported functions of the mobile
phone, the following functions must be acti‐
vated prior to pairing.
About iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. Select desired setting:
▷ "Office"
Activate functions to transmit short
messages, e-mails, calendars, tasks,
notes, and reminders to the vehicle.
Costs can be incurred by transmitting
all data to the vehicle.
▷ "Contact images"
Activate function to show the contact
pictures.
6. Move the controller to the left.
Connecting the device via passkey
entry
Pair the vehicle entirely on the front or rear
Control Display.
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Connect new device"
5. Select the functions for which the device is
to be used:
▷ "Telephone"
▷ "Bluetooth® audio"
▷ "Apps"
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis‐
played on the Control Display.
6. Search for Bluetooth devices in the sur‐
roundings of the device.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
on the device display. Select the Bluetooth
name of the vehicle.
7. Enter and confirm the same passkey on
the device and via iDrive.
or
Compare the control number on the Con‐
trol Display with the control number on the
display of the device. Confirm the control
number on the device and on the Control
Display.
8. The device is connected and displayed in
the device list.
There is a display of which features the
mobile phone supports, refer to page 42.
If pairing was unsuccessful: What to do if..., re‐
fer to page 47.
Connecting the device via near-field
communication, NFC
With near-field communication, NDC, data can
be transmitted over short distances using radio
technology.
Overview
The NFC antenna is in the instrument panel
below the hazard warning flashers.
The device must be unlocked while pairing.
compatible devices, refer to page 42.
Seite 43
General settings At a glance
43
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Pairing is also possible while driving.
1. Activate the NFC function on the device,
see the owner's manual of the device
2. Hold the device close to the NFC antenna.
3. Compare the control number on the Con‐
trol Display with the control number on the
display of the device. Confirm the control
number on the device and on the Control
Display.
or
Confirm the connection on the device.
4. The device is connected and displayed in
the device list.
There is a display of which features the
mobile phone supports, refer to page 42.
Depending on which functions are already oc‐
cupied, the device is connected with the
phone, additional phone, or music function.
If pairing was unsuccessful: What to do if..., re‐
fer to page 47.
Pairing the snap-in adapter in the rear
with the vehicle
▷ The Bluetooth passkey on the back of the
snap-in adapter is known.
▷ The snap-in adapter is installed in the cen‐
ter armrest.
▷ Operating readiness is switched on.
▷ The SIM card is inserted in the snap-in
adapter or the SIM Access Profile is active.
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Connect new device"
5.
Press the button on the snap-in
adapter for approx. 3 seconds, until the
signal tone sounds once.
The LED above the button flashes green.
6. Enter the Bluetooth passkey for the snap-
in adapter at the Control Display.
7. "Telephone"
8. The device is connected and displayed in
the device list.
WLAN connection
Functional requirements
▷ ConnectedDrive contract.
▷ Data contract with a service provider.
▷ WLAN-capable device.
▷ WLAN activated on the device.
▷ WLAN hotspot activated in the vehicle.
▷ Vehicle is stationary.
▷ Operating readiness switched on.
Activating WLAN hotspot
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Internet hotspot"
Connecting device with WLAN
hotspot
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Connect new device"
5. "Internet hotspot"
Hotspot name and hotspot code are dis‐
played on the Control Display.
6. Search for WLAN networks on the device.
Select network name on the device.
7. Enter hotspot code on the device and con‐
nect.
Seite 44
At a glance General settings
44
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
The device connects to the hotspot via
WLAN.
With the first Internet usage via the WLAN hot‐
spot, data volume must be purchased from a
service provider.
All devices connected via the WLAN hotspot
use this data volume.
If necessary, data volume can be purchased
from the ConnectedDrive Store.
WiFi connection
Pair the vehicle entirely on the front or rear
Control Display.
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Connect new device"
5. "Miracast"
The WiFi name of the vehicle is displayed
on the Control Display.
6. Search for WiFi devices in the surround‐
ings of the device.
The WiFi name of the vehicle appears on
the device display. Select the WiFi name of
the vehicle.
7. Compare the control number on the Con‐
trol Display with the control number on the
display of the device. Confirm the control
number on the device and on the Control
Display.
8. The device is connected and displayed in
the device list.
If pairing was unsuccessful: What to do if..., re‐
fer to page 47.
Additional functions
After initial pairing
▷ The device is connected with the vehicle
within a short period of time if the engine is
running or the operating readiness is
switched on.
▷ The data stored on the SIM card or in the
mobile phone are transferred to the vehicle
after recognition.
▷ For some devices, certain settings may be
necessary, e.g. authorization, see owner's
manual of the device.
▷ After one-time pairing, the devices are au‐
tomatically recognized and reconnected
when operating readiness is switched on.
Configuring the device
Functions can be activated or deactivated for
paired and connected devices.
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select the desired device.
5. Select desired setting.
If a function is assigned to a device, the func‐
tion will be deactivated where appropriate for a
device that is already connected and the de‐
vice will be disconnected.
Connecting a specific device
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select device.
5. "Connect device"
The functions that were assigned to the device
before unpairing are assigned to the device
when it is reconnected. If the device is already
connected, these functions are deactivated.
Disconnecting the device
The connection of the device to the vehicle is
disconnected.
Seite 45
General settings At a glance
45
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
The device remains pairs and can be con‐
nected again, refer to page 45.
About iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select device.
5. "Disconnect device"
Deleting the device
The device is disconnected and removed from
the device list.
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select device.
5. "Delete device"
Swapping the telephone and
additional telephone
If two mobile phones are connected to the ve‐
hicle, the functions of phone and additional
phone can be switched.
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Swap telephone 1 and 2"
Software Update
General information
The vehicle supports various external devices
depending on the current software version.
With a software update, compatibility with the
vehicle can be improved, so that the vehicle
can support new mobile phones or new exter‐
nal devices, e.g.
Updates and related current information are
available at www.bmw.com/update.
Displaying the current version
The currently installed software is displayed.
About iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "System settings"
3. "Software update"
4. "Show current version"
If an update has been carried out before, select
the desired version to display additional infor‐
mation.
Updating software via USB
The software may only be updated when the
vehicle is stationary.
About iDrive:
1.
Store the file for the software update in the
main directory of a USB flash drive.
2. Connect the USB data storage to an USB
interface, refer to page 221.
3. "My Vehicle"
4. "System settings"
5. "Software update"
6. "Update software"
7. "USB"
8. "Install software"
9. "OK"
10. Await the updating.
11. Confirm system restart.
Updating software via BMW
Teleservices
Software update via BMW Teleservices is
country-specific and may not be available.
The software is first transferred into the vehicle
and can then be installed. The software can be
installed at a time different from the time of
transfer.
Seite 46
At a glance General settings
46
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
The software can be transferred while driving,
and if the journey is interrupted it will resume
automatically the next time the vehicle is
driven. All other functions remain available dur‐
ing the transfer. Wireless reception must be
available for the transfer to take place.
Installation of the software must only be car‐
ried out while the vehicle is stationary.
About iDrive:
1. Turn on operations.
2. "My Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Software update"
5. "Update software"
6. "TeleService"
7. "Load update"
The update is loaded, however not instal‐
led.
8.
▷ "Install software"
The loaded update is installed.
This step can be carried out at a later
point in time.
▷ If the update should not be installed, it
can be removed again.
"Remove update"
The following steps are omitted.
9. "OK"
10. Await the updating.
11. Confirm system restart.
Restoring the software version
The software version before the last software
update or the version before the first software
update can be restored.
The software may only be restored when the
vehicle is stationary.
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "System settings"
3. "Software update"
4. "Restore software"
5.
▷ "Previous version"
The previous software version is re‐
stored.
▷ "Default software settings"
The first software version is restored.
6. "Remove software"
or
"Remove software"
7. "OK"
8. Wait for restore.
9. Confirm system restart.
What to do if...
Information on compatible mobile phones, re‐
fer to page 42.
The mobile phone could not be paired or con‐
nected.
▷ Is Bluetooth activated in the vehicle and on
the mobile phone? Activate Bluetooth in
the vehicle and on the mobile phone.
▷ Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile
phone and the vehicle match? Enter the
same passkey on the mobile phone and via
iDrive.
▷ Did it take longer than 30 seconds to enter
the passkey? Repeat pairing.
▷ Is NFC activated on the mobile phone? Ac‐
tivate NFC on the mobile phone.
▷ Is distance from mobile phone to near-field
communication antenna too far? Hold mo‐
bile phone directly to the antenna in the in‐
strument cluster.
▷ Do the control numbers on the mobile
phone and vehicle match? Repeat the pair‐
ing procedure.
▷ Are too many Bluetooth devices con‐
nected to the mobile phone or vehicle? De‐
lete connections with other devices if
needed.
Seite 47
General settings At a glance
47
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
▷ Is Bluetooth audio activated? Deactivate
Bluetooth audio.
▷ Delete all known Bluetooth connections
from the device list on the mobile phone
prior to pairing. Start new device search.
▷ Is the mobile phone in power-save mode or
does it have only a limited remaining bat‐
tery life? Charge the mobile phone in the
snap-in adapter, wireless charging storage
or via the charging cable.
▷ Depending on the mobile phone, it is pos‐
sible that only one mobile phone can be
connected to the vehicle. Unpair the con‐
nected mobile phone from the vehicle and
pair and connect only one mobile phone.
The mobile phone no longer reacts.
▷ Switch the mobile phone off and on again.
▷ Ambient temperatures too high or too low?
Do not subject the mobile phone to ex‐
treme ambient temperatures.
The telephone functions are not available.
▷ Configure the mobile phone and connect it
with the telephone or auxiliary phone func‐
tion.
No or not all phone book entries are displayed,
or they are incomplete.
▷ Transmission of the phone book entries is
not yet complete.
▷ It is possible that only the phone book en‐
tries of the mobile phone or the SIM card
are transmitted.
▷ It may not be possible to display phone
book entries with special characters.
▷ The number of phone book entries to be
stored is too high.
▷ Is the data volume of the contact too large,
e.g., due to stored information such as
notes? Reduce the data volume of the con‐
tact.
▷ Is the mobile phone connected as an audio
source? Configure the mobile phone and
connect it with the telephone or auxiliary
phone function.
The phone connection quality is poor.
▷ The strength of the Bluetooth signal on the
mobile phone can be adjusted, depending
on the mobile phone.
▷ Insert the mobile phone into the snap-in
adapter or place it in the area of the center
console.
▷ Insert mobile phone into the wireless
charging tray.
▷ Adjust the volume of the microphone and
loudspeakers separately.
If all points in this list have been checked and
the required function is still not available, con‐
tact the hotline, a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Seite 48
At a glance General settings
48
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Integrated Owner's Manual
in the vehicle
The concept
The Integrated Owner's Manual can be dis‐
played on the Control Display. It specifically
describes features and functions found in the
vehicle.
Components of the Integrated
Owner's Manual
The Integrated owner's manual consists of
four parts, which offer various levels of infor‐
mation or possible access.
Quick Reference Guide
The Quick Reference Guide provides informa‐
tion how to operate the car, how to use basic
vehicle functions or what to do in case of a
breakdown. This information can also be dis‐
played while driving.
Search by images
Image search provides information and de‐
scriptions. This is helpful when the terminol‐
ogy for a feature is not at hand.
Keyword search
Search for information and descriptions by en‐
tering terms selected from the index.
Videos
The basic functions of selected systems are
explained in the videos.
Select components
1.
Press button.
2. "My Vehicle"
3. "Owner's Manual"
4. Select desired setting.
Scrolling through the owner's manual
Turn controller, until the next or previous con‐
tents are displayed.
Context help - Owner's Manual to the
temporarily selected function
You may open the relevant information di‐
rectly.
Opening via the iDrive
To move directly from the application on the
Control Display to the Options menu:
1. Press button.
2. "Owner's Manual"
Opening when a Check Control
message is displayed
Directly from the Check Control message on
the Control Display:
"Owner's Manual"
Seite 49
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle At a glance
49
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Changing between a function and the
Owner's Manual
To switch from a function, e. g., radio, to the
Owner's Manual on the Control Display and to
alternate between the two displays:
1.
Press button.
2. "Owner's Manual"
3. Select the desired page in the Owner's
Manual.
4.
Press button again to return to last
displayed function.
5.
Press button to return to the page of
the Owner's Manual displayed last.
To alternate permanently between the last dis‐
played function and the Owner's Manual re‐
peat steps 4 & 5. Opens a new display every
time.
Programmable memory buttons
General information
The jumps into the Owner's Manual can be
stored on the Programmable memory buttons,
refer to page 28, and called up directly.
Storing
1.
Select the desired entry point via iDrive:
▷ "Quick reference"
▷ "Search by pictures"
▷ "Keyword search"
▷ "Animations"
2.
Press desired button and hold for
more than 2 seconds.
Executing
Press the corresponding button.
The owner's manual is directly dis‐
played via the selected entry point.
Seite 50
At a glance Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
50
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Seite 51
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle At a glance
51
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Controls
This chapter is intended to provide you with
information that will give you complete control of
your vehicle. All features and accessories that
are useful for driving and your safety, comfort
and convenience are described here.
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Opening and closing
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Remote control/key
General information
The vehicle is supplied with two remote con‐
trols with integrated key.
Every remote control holds a replaceable bat‐
tery.
You may set the key functions depending on
the optional features and country-specific ver‐
sion. For Settings, refer to page 67.
The vehicle stores personal settings for every
remote control. Profile, refer to page 58.
The remote controls hold information on re‐
quired maintenance. Service data in the re‐
mote control, refer to page 279.
Overview
1 Unlocking
2 Locking
3 Opening the trunk lid
4 Panic mode
Integrated key
Press button, arrow 1, and remove the key, ar‐
row 2.
The integrated key fits the following locks:
▷ Driver's door.
▷ Glove compartment.
The glove compartment contains a switch for
separately securing the trunk lid, refer to
page 65.
Seite 54
Controls Opening and closing
54
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Replacing the battery
1. Remove integrated key from remote con‐
trol.
2. Raise the cover of the battery compart‐
ment, arrow 1.
3. Remove the cover of the battery compart‐
ment, arrow 2.
4. Insert a battery of the same type with the
positive side facing up.
5. Press the cover closed.
Take old battery to a collection point, a
dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
New remote controls
New remote controls are available from a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Loss of the remote controls
The lost remote control can be blocked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Emergency detection of remote
control
Engine readiness can also be activated in the
following situations:
▷ Interference of radio transmission to re‐
mote control by external sources e.g., by
radio masts.
▷ Empty battery in remote control.
▷ Interference from radio transmissions
through mobile devices in close proximity
to remote control.
▷ Interference of radio transmission by
charger while charging items such as mo‐
bile devices in the vehicle.
A Check Control message is displayed when
an attempt is made to start the engine or acti‐
vate engine readiness.
Activation of drive-ready state via
emergency detection of the remote
control
If a respective Check Control message ap‐
pears, hold the remote control with its back
against the marked area on the steering col‐
umn. The tailgate button on the remote control
should be at the same height as the marked
area. Press the Start/Stop button within
10 seconds while pressing the brake pedal.
If the remote control is not recognized: slightly
change the height position of the remote con‐
trol and repeat the procedure.
BMW display key
General information
Instead of a standard remote control, the vehi‐
cle is equipped with the BMW display key with
an additional mechanical key. If the BMW dis‐
play key is used, the mechanical key should be
carried along, e.g. in the wallet.
Seite 55
Opening and closing Controls
55
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
The BMW display key supports all functions of
the standard remote control. Beyond that, the
following functions are available.
▷ Display status of doors and windows.
▷ Display status of the alarm system.
▷ With parked-car heating: operate parked-
car heating.
Without parked-car heating: operate
parked-car ventilation.
▷ Call up range with available fuel.
▷ Display service information.
Emergency detection of the BMW
display key
The description for the emergency detection
of the remote control, refer to page 55, also
applies for the BMW display key. However, the
locking button should be at the height of the
marking.
Overview
1 Opening the trunk lid
2 Unlocking
3 Panic mode
4 Locking
5 Display
6 Back
7 Switching the display on/off
8 Micro-USB charging port
Reception area
The number of available remote control func‐
tions depends on the distance from the vehi‐
cle.
▷ When you are in close proximity to the ve‐
hicle, all functions are available.
▷ The status information can be called up in
the extended reception area.
With parked-car heating: the parked-car
heating can be operated.
Without parked-car heating: the parked-car
ventilation can be operated.
▷ Outside of the reception range of the vehi‐
cle, you can only display the last transmit‐
ted status information from the vehicle.
The symbol is shown on the display if one
of the buttons is pressed outside of the recep‐
tion range.
Display
Setup
The display is divided into the upper status
line, the information area and the lower status
line.
The upper status line displays the following in‐
formation:
▷ Vehicle secured.
Vehicle not secured.
▷ Set time in the vehicle.
▷ Charge state of the battery in the re‐
mote control.
The information area can be used to access in‐
formation and perform additional functions.
The lower status line indicates whether or not
the remote control is within reception range,
refer to page 56.
▷ "Connected": Remote control is in the re‐
ception range.
▷ "Updated": Remote control is outside of
the reception range. It indicates when the
Seite 56
Controls Opening and closing
56
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
last data transfer from the vehicle took
place.
Controls
If the information area contains more than one
page, then page indicators are shown beneath
the information.
The indicator for the current page has
been filled in.
Swipe to the right or left with a finger to
change between the pages.
If additional information is available on a page,
tap the appropriate symbol.
Touch the arrow symbol beneath the dis‐
play to return to the original page.
Switching the display on/off
The display will go out automatically after a
brief period to conserve battery power.
To hide the display manually, press the button
on the left side of the remote control. Over‐
view, refer to page 56.
Show the display:
1.
Press button on the left side of the remote
control.
2. Then, swipe with your finger from bottom
to top to unlock the screen lock.
Completely switch off the display to increase
the usable battery life.
1.
Press and hold the button on the left side
of the remote control for longer than 4 sec‐
onds.
2. "OK" tap.
Press button on the left side of the remote
control to switch on the switched-off display.
Operating concept
Depending on the equipment, there are up to
five main menus that provide access to the
sub-menus.
The following overview shows, using which
main menus the information and functions can
be accessed.
Menu Information/Function
"Security
information"
/
Door status
Alarm system status
After alarm triggering: date,
time, and reason for trigger‐
ing the alarm
Window status
Glass sunroof status
"Vehicle
information"
Maintenance indicators of
Condition Based Service
CBS, refer to page 279
Status of the roadside park‐
ing lamp
"MOBILITY
INFO"
Range with available fuel
"Climate
control
setting"
With parked-car heating: op‐
erate parked-car heating, re‐
fer to page 209.
Without parked-car heating:
operate parked-car ventila‐
tion, refer to page 209.
Charging the remote control battery
If the charge state of the remote control bat‐
tery declines, the display is switched off auto‐
matically. The battery must be recharged be‐
fore the display can be switched back on. The
operability of the standard buttons is retained
until the battery is completely run down.
To charge the remote control battery:
Seite 57
Opening and closing Controls
57
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
▷ Place remote control with the lock button
upward in the bulge of the wireless charg‐
ing station underneath the center armrest.
▷ Connect the remote control via the micro
USB socket on the left side to a USB port.
Software information
To display information stored in the BMW dis‐
play key about the OpenSource software used,
proceed as follows:
1.
Menu "Security information"
2. , Tap symbol.
3. / Tap the symbol three times.
To end the display:
Tap symbol.
Profile
The concept
In the profiles, individual settings for several
drivers can be saved and called up again at a
later time.
General information
There are three profiles with which personal
vehicle settings can be stored. Every remote
control has one of these profiles assigned.
If the vehicle is unlocked using a remote con‐
trol, the assigned personal profile will be acti‐
vated. All settings stored in the profile are au‐
tomatically applied.
If several drivers use their own remote control,
the vehicle will adjust the personal settings
during unlocking. These settings are also re‐
stored, if the vehicle has been used in the
meantime by a person with a different remote
control.
Changes to the settings are automatically
saved in the profile currently activated.
If another profile is selected via iDrive, the set‐
tings saved in it will be applied automatically.
The new profile is assigned to the remote con‐
trol currently used.
There is an additional profile available that is
not assigned to any remote control: "Just drive
off (guest)". It can be used to apply settings in
the vehicle without changing the personal pro‐
files.
Active profile
After switching on the Control Display, the
name of the active profile is displayed.
It is possible to jump directly to the Profile
management, refer to page 59, in order to
select your own profile, for example. This allow
you to call up personal vehicle settings if you
did not unlock the vehicle with your own key.
1.
"Change driver profile"
2. Select profile, refer to page 59.
As soon as the engine is started or any key is
pressed, the last selected key is displayed on
the Control Display.
To exit the welcome screen via iDrive:
"Start system"
Adjusting
The settings for the following systems and
functions are saved in the active profile. The
scope of storable settings is country- and
equipment-dependable.
▷ Unlocking and locking.
▷ Lights.
▷ Climate control.
▷ Radio.
Seite 58
Controls Opening and closing
58
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
▷ Instrument cluster.
▷ Programmable memory buttons.
▷ Volumes, tone.
▷ Control Display.
▷ Navigation.
▷ TV.
▷ Park Distance Control PDC.
▷ Rearview camera
▷ Side View.
▷ Head-up Display.
▷ Driving Dynamics Control.
▷ Seat position, exterior mirror position,
steering wheel position.
▷ Cruise control.
▷ Intelligent Safety.
▷ Night vision.
Profile management
Selecting a profile
Regardless of the remote control in use a dif‐
ferent profile may be activated.
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select profile.
4. "OK"
▷ All settings stored in the called-up profile
are automatically applied.
▷ The called-up profile is assigned to the re‐
mote control being used at the time.
▷ If the profile is already assigned to a differ‐
ent remote control, this profile will apply to
both remote controls. It cannot be differen‐
tiated anymore between the settings for
the two remote controls.
Guest profile
The guest profile is for individual settings that
are stored in none of the three personal pro‐
files.
This can be useful for drivers who are using
the vehicle temporarily and do not have their
own profile.
About iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. "Just drive off (guest)"
4. "OK"
The guest profile cannot be renamed. It is not
assigned to the current remote control.
Rename profile
A personal name can be assigned to the active
profile to avoid confusion between the profiles.
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
The profile marked with this symbol can
be renamed.
3. Select profile.
4. "Change driver profile name"
5. Enter profile name.
6. Select the symbol.
Resetting the profile
The settings of the active profile are reset to
their default values.
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
The profile marked with this symbol can
be reset.
3. Select profile.
4. "Reset driver profile"
Seite 59
Opening and closing Controls
59
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Exporting profiles
Most settings of the active profile can be ex‐
ported.
This can be helpful for securing and retrieving
personal settings, before delivering the vehicle
to a workshop, e.g. The profiles backed up can
be taken into another vehicle.
The following export options are available:
▷ Via ConnectedDrive.
▷ Via USB interface, refer to page 221, to a
USB device.
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
The profile marked with this symbol can
be exported.
3. Select profile.
4. "Export driver profile"
5.
▷ USB device: "USB device"
Select USB device as needed.
▷ ConnectedDrive.
Importing profiles
The existing settings of the active profile are
overwritten with the settings of the imported
profile.
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
The profile marked with this symbol can
be overwritten.
3. Select profile.
4. "Import driver profile"
5. Select the medium using which the profile
was exported.
▷ USB device: "USB device"
Select USB device as needed.
▷ ConnectedDrive.
6. Select profile.
Using the remote control
Information
WARNING
People or animals in the vehicle can lock
the doors from the inside and lock themselves
in. The vehicle can then not be opened from
the outside. There is risk of injuries. Take the
remote control along so that the vehicle can be
opened from the outside.◀
Unlocking
Press button on the remote control.
Depending on the settings, refer to page 67,
the following access points are unlocked:
▷ Driver's door and fuel filler flap.
▷ All doors, tailgate, and fuel filler flap.
In addition, the following functions are exe‐
cuted:
▷ The settings saved in the profile, refer to
page 58, are applied.
▷ The interior lights are being switched on,
unless they were manually switched off.
Switching the interior lights on and off
manually, refer to page 133.
▷ The welcome lamps are switched on, if it is
dark outside, door handle lighting and the
Welcome Light Carpet are also switched
on. These functions must be activated in
the Settings, refer to page 130.
Press the remote control button again to
switch on Welcome Light Carpet for the al‐
ready unlocked vehicle.
▷ The rear sliding visor is traveled into the
position, where it was prior to locking.
▷ Anti-theft protection is switched off.
▷ The alarm system, refer to page 69, is
disarmed.
After opening the driver's door, the vehicle is
ready for operation, refer to page 20.
Seite 60
Controls Opening and closing
60
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Convenient opening
Press and hold this button on the re‐
mote control after unlocking.
The windows and the glass sunroof are
opened, as long as the button on the remote
control is pressed.
Locking
WARNING
For some country-specific variants, un‐
locking from the inside is only possible with
special knowledge.
If people must spend a longer time in the vehi‐
cle while it is very hot or cold outside, there is
risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not lock the
vehicle from the outside when there are people
in it.◀
The driver's door must be closed.
Press button on the remote control.
▷ All doors, the tailgate, and the fuel filler flap
are locked.
▷ The rear sliding visor is being closed.
▷ Anti-theft protection is switched on. It pre‐
vents the doors from being unlocked using
the lock buttons or the door opener.
▷ The alarm system, refer to page 69, is
armed.
Switching on exterior lighting
Press button on the remote control with
the vehicle locked.
▷ The interior lights are being switched on,
unless they were manually switched off.
Switching the interior lights on and off
manually, refer to page 133.
▷ In the dark, door handle lighting and Wel‐
come Light Carpet are switched on if these
functions were activated. For Settings, re‐
fer to page 67.
If the button is pressed again within 10 sec‐
onds after vehicle was locked, the interior mo‐
tion sensor and tilt alarm sensor of the anti-
theft warning system, refer to page 70, are
turned off. After locking, wait 10 seconds be‐
fore pressing the button again.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
Press button on the remote control
and hold for at least 3 seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Opening the tailgate
CAUTION
During opening, the trunk lid pivots back
and up. There is risk of property damage. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀
Press and hold button on the remote
control for approx. one second.
The trunk lid opens, regardless of whether the
vehicle was previously locked or unlocked.
To avoid locking it into the vehicle, do not
place the remote control in the cargo area.
Depending on the features and the country
version, it is also possible to have door un‐
locked. Create the settings, refer to page 67.
If the doors were not unlocked, the trunk lid is
locked again as soon as it closes.
Switching on the headlight courtesy
delay feature
Press button on the remote control.
The duration can be set in the Control Display.
Seite 61
Opening and closing Controls
61
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Malfunction
Remote control detection by the vehicle can
among others be malfunctioning under the fol‐
lowing circumstances:
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
charged. Replace the battery, refer to
page 55.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
transmission towers or other equipment
with high transmit power.
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to
metal objects.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
mobile phones or other electronic devices
in direct proximity.
Do not transport the remote control together
with metal objects or electronic devices.
In the case of interference, the vehicle can also
be unlocked and locked from the outside with‐
out remote control, refer to page 62.
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐
erned by the following:
FCC ID:
▷ LX8766S.
▷ LX8766E.
▷ LX8CAS.
▷ LX8CAS2.
▷ MYTCAS4.
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐
ference, and
▷ this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to
operate this equipment.
Without remote control
From the outside
WARNING
For some country-specific variants, un‐
locking from the inside is only possible with
special knowledge.
If people must spend a longer time in the vehi‐
cle while it is very hot or cold outside, there is
risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not lock the
vehicle from the outside when there are people
in it.◀
CAUTION
The door lock is permanently joined with
the door. The door handle can be moved.
When pulling the door handle with the
integrated key inserted, paint or key can be
damaged. There is risk of property damage.
Remove the integrated key before pulling the
outside door handle.◀
1.
Pull and hold the door handle outward with
one hand.
Seite 62
Controls Opening and closing
62
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
2. Guide one finger of the other hand from the
back under the lid, push the palpable re‐
lease outward and remove the lid.
3. Unlock or lock the door lock using the
integrated key, refer to page 54.
The other doors must be unlocked or locked
from the inside.
Alarm system
The alarm system is not armed if the vehicle is
locked with the integrated key.
The alarm system is triggered when the door is
opened, when the vehicle is unlocked via the
door lock.
In order to terminate this alarm, unlock vehicle
with the remote control, if needed, through
emergency detection of the remote control, re‐
fer to page 55.
From the inside
Unlocking and locking
Via the buttons for the central locking system.
▷ Pressing the button unlocks the
vehicle.
▷ Pressing the button locks the ve‐
hicle if the front doors are closed.
The vehicle is not secured against theft
when locking.
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is
automatically unlocked. The hazard warning
system and interior lights come on.
Unlocking and opening
▷ Press the central locking system
button to unlock the doors to‐
gether, and then pull the door handle
above the armrest.
Doors
Automatic Soft Closing
To close the doors, push lightly.
It is closed automatically.
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed on operating
the doors. There is risk of injuries. Make sure
that the area of movement of the doors is clear
during opening and closing.◀
Seite 63
Opening and closing Controls
63
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Trunk lid
Information
To avoid locking it into the vehicle, do not
place the remote control in the cargo area.
Opening
During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and
up. Ensure that adequate clearance is available
before opening.
▷ Press button on the exterior of the trunk
lid.
▷ Press and hold button on the re‐
mote control for approx. one sec‐
ond.
As the case may be, the doors are also un‐
locked. Opening with the remote control,
refer to page 61.
▷ Press button in the storage com‐
partment of the driver's door.
The opening procedure is interrupted:
▷ By pressing the button again.
▷ When starting the engine.
▷ When the vehicle starts moving.
▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the
tailgate.
Closing
Without Comfort Access:
▷ Press button on the inside of the trunk lid.
The trunk lid closes automatically.
With Comfort Access:
▷ Press button, arrow 1, on the inside of the
trunk lid.
▷ Press button, arrow 2.
The vehicle will be locked after closing the
tailgate. The driver's door must be closed
for this purpose and the remote control
must be outside of the vehicle in the area
of the trunk lid.
An acoustic signal sounds and the tailgate
closes.
The closing operation is interrupted:
▷ By pressing the button again.
▷ When starting the engine.
▷ The vehicle starts off with jerks.
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the tailgate. There is risk of injuries. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀
Seite 64
Controls Opening and closing
64
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Manual operation
In the event of an electrical malfunction, man‐
ually operate the unlocked trunk lid slowly and
smoothly.
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the tailgate. There is risk of injuries. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀
Locking separately
The trunk lid can be locked separately with the
switch in the glove compartment. If the glove
compartment is locked, the trunk lid cannot be
opened.
▷ Trunk lid secured, arrow 1.
▷ Trunk lid not secured, ar‐
row 2.
Slide the switch into the arrow 1 position. This
secures the trunk lid and disconnects it from
the central locking system.
This is beneficial when the vehicle is parked
using valet service. The remote control can be
handed out without the integrated key.
Emergency unlocking
Pull the handle inside the trunk.
The trunk lid unlocks.
Comfort Access
Information
To avoid locking it into the vehicle, do not
place the remote control in the cargo area.
The concept
The vehicle can be accessed without activat‐
ing the remote control.
All you need to do is to have the remote con‐
trol with you, such as in your pants pocket.
The vehicle automatically detects the remote
control when it is in close proximity or in the
car's interior.
Comfort Access supports the following func‐
tions:
▷ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle.
▷ Convenient closing.
▷ Opening/closing the tailgate individually.
▷ Open/close trunk lid with no-touch activa‐
tion.
▷ Start the engine.
Functional requirements
▷ There are no external sources of interfer‐
ence nearby.
▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control
must be located outside of the vehicle near
the doors.
▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
▷ The engine can only be started if the re‐
mote control is in the vehicle.
Seite 65
Opening and closing Controls
65
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Unlocking
Grasp the handle of a vehicle door completely,
arrow.
This corresponds to pressing the remote
control button.
Locking
The driver's door must be closed.
Touch the grooved surface on the handle of a
closed vehicle door, arrow, with your finger for
approx. one second without grasping the door
handle.
This corresponds to pressing the remote
control button.
Convenient closing
WARNING
With convenient closing, body parts can
be jammed. There is risk of injuries. Make sure
that the area of movement of the doors is clear
during convenient closing.◀
Touch the grooved surface on the handle of a
closed vehicle door, arrow, with your finger and
hold it there without grasping the door handle.
This corresponds to pressing and holding
the remote control button.
In addition to locking, the windows and the
glass sunroof close and the exterior mirrors
fold in.
Opening the tailgate individually
Press button on the exterior of the trunk lid.
This corresponds to pressing the re‐
mote control button.
The situation of the doors does not change.
Opening and closing the trunk lid with
no-touch activation
The concept
The trunk lid can be opened and closed with
no-touch activation using the remote control
you are carrying. Two sensors detect a for‐
ward-directed foot motion in the center of the
area at the rear of the car and the tailgate
opens and closes.
Information
WARNING
During no-contact activation, vehicle
parts may be touched, e.g. hot exhaust sys‐
tem. There is risk of injuries. With the foot mo‐
tion, make sure there is steady stance and do
not touch the vehicle.◀
Seite 66
Controls Opening and closing
66
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
If the remote control is in the sensor area, the
tailgate can be closed or opened inadvertently
by an unconscious or alleged recognized foot
movement.
The sensor range reaches approx. 5 ft/1.50 m
behind the area at the rear of the car.
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the tailgate. There is risk of injuries. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀
CAUTION
During opening, the trunk lid pivots back
and up. There is risk of property damage. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀
Foot movement to be carried out
1.
Place in the center behind the vehicle,
about an arm's length from the vehicle rear.
2. Move a foot in the direction of travel as far
under the vehicle as possible and immedi‐
ately pull it back. With this movement, the
leg must pass through the ranges of both
sensors.
The trunk lid opens, regardless of whether it
was previously locked or unlocked.
Before the opening, the hazard warning sys‐
tem flashes.
To close the tailgate, repeat the foot move‐
ment.
Before closing, the hazard warning system
flashes and an acoustic signal sounds.
The closing of the trunk lid has no effect on the
locking of the vehicle. To avoid locking it into
the vehicle, do not place the remote control in
the cargo area.
Another foot movement can interrupt the clos‐
ing operation.
Malfunction
Remote control detection by the vehicle can
among others be malfunctioning under the fol‐
lowing circumstances:
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
charged. Replace the battery, refer to
page 55.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
transmission towers or other equipment
with high transmit power.
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to
metal objects.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
mobile phones or other electronic devices
in direct proximity.
Do not transport the remote control together
with metal objects or electronic devices.
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock
the vehicle using the buttons of the remote
control or using the integrated key, refer to
page 62.
Adjusting
General information
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Unlocking
Doors
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
Seite 67
Opening and closing Controls
67
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
3. "Doors/Key"
4. "Driver's door"
or
"All doors"
5. Select desired setting:
▷ "Driver's door"
Only the driver's door and the fuel filler
flap are unlocked. Pressing again un‐
locks the entire vehicle.
▷ "All doors"
The entire vehicle is unlocked.
Trunk lid
Depending on optional features and country
version, this setting is not offered in some
cases.
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. "Tailgate"
or
"Tailgate and door(s)"
5. Select desired setting:
▷ "Tailgate"
The trunk lid is opened.
▷ "Tailgate and door(s)"
The trunk lid is opened and the doors
are unlocked.
Confirmation signals from the vehicle
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. Deactivate or activate the desired confir‐
mation signals.
▷ "Flash for lock/unlock"
▷ "Acoustic signal for lock/unlock"
Automatic locking
About iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. Select desired setting:
▷ "Lock automatically"
The vehicle locks automatically after a
short period of time if no door is
opened.
▷ "Lock after starting to drive"
The vehicle locks automatically after
you drive off.
Automatic unlocking
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. "Unlock at end of trip"
After drive readiness is ended by pressing
the Start/Stop button, the locked vehicle is
automatically unlocked.
Retrieving the seat, mirror, and
steering wheel settings
On unlocking of the vehicle, the positions for
the driver's seat, exterior mirror, and steering
wheel stored in the profile are automatically re‐
trieved.
WARNING
There is risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is risk of injuries or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
justment.◀
Seite 68
Controls Opening and closing
68
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
About iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select profile.
4. "Last seat position automatic"
The adjustment procedure is interrupted:
▷ When a seat position switch is pressed.
▷ When a button of the seat, mirror, and
steering wheel memory is pressed briefly.
Alarm system
The concept
When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm
system responds to:
▷ Opening a door, the hood or the trunk lid.
▷ Movements in the interior.
▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e. g., during at‐
tempts at stealing a wheel or when towing
the car.
▷ Disconnected battery voltage.
The alarm system briefly signals tampering:
▷ By sounding an acoustic alarm.
▷ By switching on the hazard warning sys‐
tem.
▷ By flashing the high beams.
Arming and disarming the alarm
system
When you unlock or lock the vehicle, either
with the remote control or via the Comfort Ac‐
cess, the alarm system is disarmed or armed at
the same time.
Door lock and armed alarm system
The alarm system is triggered when the door is
opened, when the vehicle is unlocked via the
door lock.
Trunk lid and armed alarm system
The trunk lid can be opened even when the
alarm system is armed.
After the trunk lid is closed, it is locked and
monitored again when the doors are locked.
The hazard warning system flashes once.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
Press button on the remote control
and hold for at least 3 seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Indicator lamp on the interior rearview
mirror
▷ The indicator lamp flashes briefly every
2 seconds:
The alarm system is armed.
▷ The indicator lamp flashes after locking:
Doors, hood or tailgate are not correctly
closed. Correctly closed access points are
secured.
After 10 seconds, the indicator lamp
flashes continuously. Interior motion sen‐
sor and tilt alarm sensor are not active.
When the still open access is closed, inte‐
rior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor will
be switched on.
▷ The indicator lamp goes out after unlock‐
ing:
The vehicle has not been tampered with.
Seite 69
Opening and closing Controls
69
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
▷ The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking
until drive readiness is switched on, but no
longer than approx. 5 minutes:
An alarm has been triggered.
Tilt alarm sensor
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
The alarm system responds in situations such
as attempts to steal a wheel or when the car is
towed.
Interior motion sensor
The windows and glass sunroof must be
closed for the system to function properly.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐
sor can be switched off together, such as in
the following situations:
▷ In automatic car washes.
▷ In duplex garages.
▷ During transport on trains carrying vehi‐
cles, at sea or on a trailer.
▷ With animals in the vehicle.
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor
Press the remote control button again
within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle
is locked.
The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec‐
onds and then continues to flash.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐
sor are turned off until the vehicle is locked
again.
Switching off the alarm
▷ Unlock the vehicle using the remote con‐
trol, if needed, through emergency detec‐
tion of the remote control, refer to page 55.
▷ With Comfort Access: if you are carrying
the remote control on your person, grasp
the driver side or front passenger side door
handle completely.
Power windows
Information
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
move the vehicle and endanger themselves
and traffic, e.g. with the following actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing of doors or windows.
▷ Shifting the selector lever into neutral.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Carry remote control along when exiting
and lock the vehicle.◀
Opening
▷ Press the button to the resistance
point.
The window opens while the switch is held.
▷ Press the switch beyond the resist‐
ance point.
The window opens automatically. Pressing
the switch again stops the motion.
See also: Convenient opening, refer to
page 61, via remote control.
Seite 70
Controls Opening and closing
70
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Closing
WARNING
When operating the windows, body parts
and objects can be jammed. There is risk of in‐
juries or risk of property damage. Make sure
that the area of movement of the windows is
clear during opening and closing.◀
▷ Pull the switch to the resistance
point.
The window closes while the switch is
held.
▷ Pull the switch beyond the resistance
point.
The window closes automatically. Pulling
again stops the motion.
See also: closing by means of Comfort Access,
refer to page 65.
Pinch protection system
WARNING
When operating the windows, body parts
and objects can be jammed. There is risk of in‐
juries or risk of property damage. Make sure
that the area of movement of the windows is
clear during opening and closing.◀
WARNING
Accessories on the windows such as an‐
tennas can impact jam protection. There is risk
of injuries. Do not install accessories in the
area of movement of the windows.◀
If closing force exceeds a specific margin as a
window closes, closing is interrupted.
The window reopens slightly.
Closing without the pinch protection
system
WARNING
When operating the windows, body parts
and objects can be jammed. There is risk of in‐
juries or risk of property damage. Make sure
that the area of movement of the windows is
clear during opening and closing.◀
In case of danger from the outside or if ice
might prevent normal closing, proceed as fol‐
lows:
1. Pull the switch past the resistance point
and hold it there.
The pinch protection is limited and the
window reopens slightly if the closing force
exceeds a certain margin.
2. Pull the switch past the resistance point
again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it
there.
The window closes without jam protection.
Safety switch
The concept
With the safety switch for the rear, it is possible
to block particular functions. This makes
sense, for example, if children or animals are
carried in the rear.
General information
The following functions can be locked using
the switch:
▷ Opening and closing of the rear windows
using the switches in the rear.
▷ Operation of the roller sunblind in the rear
window using the switches in the rear.
▷ Operation of the roller sunblinds in the side
windows using the switches in the rear.
▷ Adjustment of the power rear seats.
▷ Operation of the rear sliding visor using the
switches in the rear.
Information
WARNING
When operating the windows, body parts
and objects can be jammed. There is risk of in‐
juries or risk of property damage. Make sure
Seite 71
Opening and closing Controls
71
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
that the area of movement of the windows is
clear during opening and closing.◀
In order to prevent uncontrolled closing of the
windows, press the safety switch, e.g. if chil‐
dren or animals are carried in the rear.
Switching on and off
Press button.
The LED lights up if the safety func‐
tion is switched on.
Roller sunblinds
General information
The safety switch, refer to page 71, in the driv‐
er's door can be used to prevent children, e.g.,
from operating the roller sunblinds using the
switches in the rear.
BMW Touch Command
The roller sunblinds can also be operated us‐
ing BMW Touch Command.
Information
If you are no longer able to move the roller sun‐
blinds after having activated them consecu‐
tively a number of times, the system is blocked
for a limited time to prevent overheating. Let
the system cool.
The roller sunblinds cannot be moved at low
interior temperatures.
Roller sunblind in the rear window
Overview
Driver's door
Button for the roller sunblind in the
rear window.
Rear doors
Button for the roller sunblind in the
rear window.
Controls
Press the button to open the closed
roller sunblind or to close the open
roller sunblind.
If the button is pressed again during the move‐
ment, the roller sunblind is moved in the oppo‐
site direction.
Hold the button down to operate the roller sun‐
blinds on the rear window and on the side win‐
dows at the same time.
Seite 72
Controls Opening and closing
72
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Roller sunblinds in the side windows
Overview
Buttons for the roller sunblinds in the
side windows.
Controls
Press the button to open the closed
roller sunblind or to close the open
roller sunblind.
If the button is pressed again during the move‐
ment, the roller sunblind is moved in the oppo‐
site direction.
Glass sunroof
General information
The glass sunroof and the front sliding visor
can be operated together or separately using
the same switch. The rear sliding visor is oper‐
ated using separate buttons.
The glass sunroof is operational when the
standby state is switched on.
Information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed on operating
the glass sunroof. There is risk of injuries.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
glass sunroof is clear during opening and clos‐
ing.◀
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
move the vehicle and endanger themselves
and traffic, e.g. with the following actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing of doors or windows.
▷ Shifting the selector lever into neutral.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Carry remote control along when exiting
and lock the vehicle.◀
Overview
1 Open/close the glass sunroof/sliding visor.
With panoramic glass sunroof: open/close
glass sunroof/front sliding visor.
2 With panoramic glass sunroof: close rear
sliding visor.
3 With panoramic glass sunroof: open rear
sliding visor.
Lifting/closing glass sunroof
Push switch briefly upward.
▷ The closed glass sunroof is
tilted and the sliding visor
opens slightly.
▷ The opened glass sunroof
closes until it is in its tilted
position. The sliding visor
does not move.
Seite 73
Opening and closing Controls
73
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
▷ The tilted glass sunroof is being closed.
Opening/closing the glass sunroof and
front sliding visor separately
▷ Press the switch in the de‐
sired direction to the resist‐
ance point and hold it there.
The sliding visor opens, as
long as the switch is held
down. If the sliding visor is
already fully open, the glass
sunroof opens.
The glass sunroof closes as
long as the switch is held
down. If the glass sunroof is
already closed or in the tilted
position, the sliding visor
closes.
▷ Press the switch in the desired direction
past the resistance point.
The sliding visor opens automatically. If the
sliding visor is already fully open, the glass
sunroof opens automatically.
The glass sunroof closes automatically. If
the glass sunroof is already closed or in the
tilted position, the sliding visor closes au‐
tomatically.
Pressing the switch upward stops the mo‐
tion.
Opening/closing the glass sunroof and
front sliding visor together
Briefly press the switch twice in
succession in the desired direc‐
tion past the resistance point.
The glass sunroof and sliding vi‐
sor move together. Pressing the
switch upward stops the motion.
▷ See also: Convenient opening, refer to
page 61, via remote control.
▷ See also: closing by means of Comfort Ac‐
cess, refer to page 65.
Comfort position
If the glass sunroof is not automatically com‐
pletely opened, the comfort position has been
attained. In this position the wind noises in the
interior are the least.
If desired, continue the movement by Pressing
the switch.
Opening/closing the rear sliding visor
On the roofliner control panel
Press button to open the rear sliding
visor.
Press button again to stop the movement.
Press button to close the sliding visor.
Press button again to stop the move‐
ment.
On the control panel in the rear doors
The rear sliding visor cannot be used via the
buttons in the rear if the safety function, refer
to page 71, is switched on.
Press the button to open the closed
sliding visor or to close the open slid‐
ing visor.
Press button again to stop the movement.
When the button is pressed again, the sliding
visor will move in the opposite direction.
BMW Touch Command
The rear sliding visor can also be operated us‐
ing BMW Touch Command.
Actions during unlocking/locking
If the vehicle is locked from the outside, the
rear sliding visor is automatically closed.
During unlocking, the sliding visor is automati‐
cally traveled into the position, where it was
prior to locking.
Seite 74
Controls Opening and closing
74
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Pinch protection system
If the closing force when closing the glass sun‐
roof exceeds a certain value, the closing move‐
ment is stopped, beginning at approximately
the middle of the opening in the roof, or from
the tilted position during closing.
The glass sunroof reopens slightly.
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed on operating
the glass sunroof. There is risk of injuries.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
glass sunroof is clear during opening and clos‐
ing.◀
Closing from the open position
without pinch protection
If there is an external danger, proceed as fol‐
lows:
1.
Press the switch forward beyond the re‐
sistance point and hold.
The pinch protection is limited and the
glass sunroof reopens slightly if the closing
force exceeds a certain margin.
2. Press the switch forward again beyond the
resistance point and hold until the glass
sunroof closes without jam protection.
Make sure that the closing area is clear.
Closing from the raised position
without pinch protection
If there is an external danger, push the switch
forward past the resistance point and hold it.
The glass sunroof closes without jam protec‐
tion.
Initializing after a power failure
After a power failure during the opening or
closing process, the glass sunroof can only be
operated to a limited extent.
Initializing the system
The system can be initialized when the vehicle
is stationary and the engine is running.
During the initialization, the glass sunroof
closes without jam protection.
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed on operating
the glass sunroof. There is risk of injuries.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
glass sunroof is clear during opening and clos‐
ing.◀
Press the switch up and hold it
until the initialization is com‐
plete:
▷ Initialization begins within
15 seconds and is com‐
pleted when the glass sun‐
roof and sliding visor are
completely closed.
▷ The glass sunroof closes without jam pro‐
tection.
Seite 75
Opening and closing Controls
75
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Adjusting
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Sitting safely
The ideal seating position can make a vital
contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.
The seating position plays an important role in
an accident in combination with:
▷ Safety belts, refer to page 80.
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 82.
▷ Airbags, refer to page 136.
Front seats
Information
WARNING
Seat adjustments while driving can lead
to unexpected movements of the seat. Vehicle
control could be lost. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Only adjust the side on the driver's side
when the vehicle is stationary.◀
WARNING
With a backrest inclined too far to the
rear, the protective effect of the safety belt
cannot be ensured anymore. There is a danger
of sliding under the safety belt in an accident.
There is risk of injuries or danger to life. Adjust
the seat prior to starting the trip. Adjust the
backrest in an as upright position as possible
and do not adjust again while driving.◀
WARNING
There is risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is risk of injuries or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
justment.◀
Electrically adjustable seats
Overview
1 Thigh support
2 Forward/back, height, tilt
3 Shoulder support
4 Backrest width
5 Lumbar support
6 Backrest, head restraint
General information
The seat adjustment for the driver's seat is
stored for the profile currently used. When the
vehicle is unlocked via the remote control, the
position is automatically retrieved if the Func‐
tion, refer to page 68, is activated for this pur‐
pose.
Adjustments in detail
▷ Forward/back.
Seite 76
Controls Adjusting
76
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
▷ Height.
▷ Seat tilt.
▷ Backrest tilt.
▷ Thigh support.
Lumbar support
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar re‐
gion of the spine. The lower back and the
spine are supported for upright posture.
▷ Press the front/rear section
of the switch:
The curvature is increased/
decreased.
▷ Press the upper/lower sec‐
tion of the switch:
The curvature is shifted up/
down.
Backrest width
Change the width of the back‐
rest using the side wings to ad‐
just the lateral support.
Shoulder support
Also supports the back in the shoulder area:
▷ Results in a relaxed seating position.
Seite 77
Adjusting Controls
77
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
▷ Reduces strain on the shoulder muscles.
Gentleman function
The concept
The front passenger seat can be adjusted with
the switches of the driver's seat, e.g. to in‐
crease the legroom in the rear.
Overview
Gentleman function
Switching on
1. Press button. The LED lights up.
2. Adjust the front passenger seat on your
own seat.
If needed, store the memory position, refer
to page 87, for the front passenger seat.
Switch off
Press button and hold until LED goes
out.
The function deactivates itself automatically
after some time.
BMW Touch Command
The front passenger seat can also be operated
using BMW Touch Command.
Rear seats
General information
The seats in the rear can be used using the
seat adjustment switch in the center armrest
or via BMW Touch Command.
Information
WARNING
There is a risk of jamming when folding
down the center armrest in the rear. There is
risk of injuries. Make sure that the area of
movement of the center armrest is clear during
folding down.◀
Electrically adjustable seats
Overview
1 Resetting to standard position
2 Head restraint, shoulder support
3 Lumbar support
4 Folding the footrest out/in
5 Forward/backward, tilt
6 Backrest
7 Adjust front passenger seat
If the safety switch, refer to page 71, is
pressed, the seats cannot be adjusted.
Adjustments in detail
▷ Forward/back.
Seite 78
Controls Adjusting
78
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
▷ Seat tilt.
▷ Backrest tilt.
Lumbar support
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar re‐
gion of the spine. The lower back and the
spine are supported for upright posture.
▷ Press the front/rear section
of the switch:
The curvature is increased/
decreased.
▷ Press the upper/lower sec‐
tion of the switch:
The curvature is shifted up/
down.
Shoulder support
Also supports the back in the shoulder area:
▷ Results in a relaxed seating position.
▷ Reduces strain on the shoulder muscles.
Folding the footrest out/in
Press the upper/lower section of
the switch:
The footrest on the backrest of
the front passenger seat is
folded out/in.
The distance between the front passenger
seat and the rear seat must be sufficiently
large to unfold the footrest.
Adjusting the front passenger seat
from the rear
The concept
The front passenger seat can be operated
from the rear, e.g. to increase the legroom in
the rear.
General information
With the button for adjusting the Shoulder
support, refer to page 79, it is possible to set
the angle of the screen in the rear on the pas‐
senger side.
Seite 79
Adjusting Controls
79
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Adjusting
1.
Press button.
2. Adjust the passenger seat, e.g., forward/
back.
3.
Press the button to deactivate the
function.
The function deactivates itself automatically
after some time.
Resetting to standard position
Press button to reset to standard po‐
sition.
The process is canceled if the button is
pressed again.
Safety belts
Seats with safety belt
The vehicle has four or five seating positions,
each of which is equipped with a safety belt.
General information
Always make sure that safety belts are being
worn by all occupants before driving off.
For the occupants' safety the belt locking
mechanism triggers early. Slowly guide the
belt out of the holder when applying it.
Although airbags enhance safety by providing
added protection, they are not a substitute for
safety belts.
The upper shoulder strap's anchorage point
will be correct for adult seat occupants of ev‐
ery build if the seat is correctly adjusted.
▷ The two outer safety belt buckles,
integrated into the rear seat, are for pas‐
sengers sitting on the left and right.
▷ The center rear safety belt buckle is solely
intended for the center passenger.
Information
WARNING
If the safety belt is used by more than
one person, the protective effect of the safety
belt cannot be ensured anymore. There is risk
of injuries or danger to life. Do not allow more
than one person to wear a single safety belt.
Infants and children are not allowed in an occu‐
pant's lap, but must be transported and re‐
spectively secured in designated child restraint
systems.◀
WARNING
The protective effect of the safety belts
can be limited or lost when safety belts are fas‐
tened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened
safety belt can cause additional injuries, e.g. in
the event of an accident or during braking and
evasive maneuvers. There is risk of injuries or
danger to life. Make sure that all occupants are
wearing safety belts correctly.◀
Seite 80
Controls Adjusting
80
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Correct use of safety belts
▷ Wear the belt twist-free and as tight to
your body as possible over your lap and
shoulders.
▷ Wear the belt deep on your hips over your
lap. The belt may not press on your stom‐
ach.
▷ Do not wear the belt on your throat, rub it
on sharp edges, guide it or jam it in across
hard or fragile objects.
▷ Avoid thick clothing.
▷ Re-tighten the belt frequently upward
around your upper body.
Buckling the belt
General information
Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in
the belt buckle.
Tensioning the safety belt
automatically
When the belt is closed, the driver's and pas‐
senger's belt straps are automatically tight‐
ened once after driving away.
Unbuckling the belt
1.
Hold the belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
3. Guide the belt back into its roll-up mecha‐
nism.
Safety belt reminder for driver's seat
and front passenger seat
The indicator lamp lights up and a sig‐
nal sounds. Make sure that the safety
belts are positioned correctly. The
safety belt reminder is active at speeds above
approx. 6 mph/10 km/h. It can also be activated
if objects are placed on the front passenger
seat.
Safety mode
In critical situations, e.g., during full brake ap‐
plication, the front safety belts tighten auto‐
matically.
If the situation passes without an accident oc‐
curring, the belt tension relaxes.
If the belt tension does not loosen automati‐
cally, stop the vehicle and unbuckle the belt
using the red button in the buckle. Fasten the
belt before continuing on your trip.
Damage to safety belts
WARNING
The protective effect of the safety belts
may not be fully functional or fail in the follow‐
ing situations:
▷ Safety belts are damaged, soiled or
changed in any other way.
▷ Safety belt buckle is damaged or heavily
soiled.
▷ Belt tensioners or belt retractors were
modified.
Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged in
the event of an accident. There is risk of inju‐
ries or danger to life. Do not modify safety
belts, safety belt buckles, belt tensioners, belt
retractors or belt anchors and keep them
clean. Have the safety belts checked after an
accident at the dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.◀
Seite 81
Adjusting Controls
81
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Front head restraints
Information
WARNING
A missing protective effect due to re‐
moved or not correctly adjusted head re‐
straints can cause injuries in the head and
neck area. There is risk of injuries. Install head
restraints on occupied seats prior to driving
and make sure that the center of the head re‐
straint supports the back of the head at eye
level.◀
WARNING
Objects on the head restraint reduce the
protective effect in the head and neck area.
There is risk of injuries.
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
▷ Do not hang objects, e.g., clothes hangers,
directly on the head restraint.
▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐
termined to be safe for attachment to a
head restraint.
▷ Do not use any accessories, e.g. pillows,
while driving.◀
Correctly adjusted head restraint
General information
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event
of an accident.
Height
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is
approximately at ear level.
Distance
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint
is as close as possible to the back of the head.
Active head restraint
In the event of a rear-end collision with a cer‐
tain severity, the active head restraint automat‐
ically reduces the distance from the head.
Wear and tear after accidents or when dam‐
aged otherwise:
Have the active head restraint checked and if
needed replaced.
Adjusting the height
Adjusting electrically.
Distance to back of head: manual head
restraints
▷ Forward: by pulling.
▷ Back: press the button and push the head
restraint toward the rear.
Distance to back of head: electrical
head restraints
The head restraint is automatically reposi‐
tioned when the shoulder support is adjusted.
Seite 82
Controls Adjusting
82
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Adjusting the side extensions
Fold forward for increased lateral support in
the resting position.
Removing
The head restraints cannot be removed.
Rear head restraints
Information
WARNING
A missing protective effect due to re‐
moved or not correctly adjusted head re‐
straints can cause injuries in the head and
neck area. There is risk of injuries. Install head
restraints on occupied seats prior to driving
and make sure that the center of the head re‐
straint supports the back of the head at eye
level.◀
WARNING
Objects on the head restraint reduce the
protective effect in the head and neck area.
There is risk of injuries.
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
▷ Do not hang objects, e.g., clothes hangers,
directly on the head restraint.
▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐
termined to be safe for attachment to a
head restraint.
▷ Do not use any accessories, e.g. pillows,
while driving.◀
Correctly adjusted head restraint
General information
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event
of an accident.
Height
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is
approximately at ear level.
Distance
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint
is as close as possible to the back of the head.
Adjusting the center head restraint
To improve the view to the rear, the center
head restraint can be folded to the rear. Only
push the head restraint down if no one will be
sitting in the center seat.
▷ To the rear: press button, arrow 1, and fold
the head restraint backward.
▷ To the front: fold head restraint forward un‐
til the head restraint engages.
Seite 83
Adjusting Controls
83
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Adjusting the height
Manual head restraints
The height of the outer head restraints can be
adjusted.
▷ To raise: push.
▷ To lower: press button, arrow 1, and push
headrest down.
Power head restraints
Information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when moving
the head restraint. There is risk of injuries.
Make sure that the area of movement is clear
when moving the head restraint.◀
Button in the vehicle
The height of the head restraint can be ad‐
justed electrically.
The height adjustment of the head restraint is
deactivated when the safety switch for the rear
windows, refer to page 71, has been pressed.
Adjusting the side extensions
Fold the side extensions on the head restraint
forward for increased lateral support in the
resting position.
Pillows for head restraints in the rear
Only use the pillow when the vehicle is
switched off.
1.
There are two pushbuttons on the upper
tab of the pillow. Pull the upper tab through
the loop on the top of the head restraint.
2. Close both pushbuttons.
3. The head restraint folds into the topmost
position. Close the pushbutton on the
Seite 84
Controls Adjusting
84
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
lower tab and the pushbutton on the bot‐
tom of the head restraint.
Removing
The head restraints cannot be removed.
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
General information
The mirror on the passenger side is more
curved than the driver's side mirror.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the mir‐
ror setting is stored for the profile currently
used. When the vehicle is unlocked via the re‐
mote control, the position is automatically re‐
trieved if this function is active.
Information
WARNING
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer
than they appear. The distance to the traffic
behind could be incorrectly estimated, e.g.
while changing lanes. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Estimate the distance to the traffic be‐
hind by looking over your shoulder.◀
Overview
1 Adjusting 85
2 Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor
3 Fold in and out 86
Selecting a mirror
To change over to the other mirror:
Slide the switch.
Adjusting electrically
The setting corresponds to the direction
in which the button is pressed.
Saving positions
Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory, refer
to page 87.
Adjusting manually
In case of electrical malfunction press edges of
mirror.
Automatic Curb Monitor
The concept
If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on
the front passenger side is tilted downward.
This improves your view of the curb and other
low-lying obstacles when parking, e.g.
Seite 85
Adjusting Controls
85
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Activating
1.
Slide the switch to the driver's side
mirror position.
2. Engage selector lever position R.
Deactivating
Slide the switch to the passenger side mirror
position.
Fold in and out
CAUTION
Depending on the vehicle width, the ve‐
hicle can be damaged in car washes. There is
risk of property damage. Before washing, fold
in the mirrors by hand or with the button.◀
Press button.
Possible at speeds up to approx.
15 mph/20 km/h.
Beneficial in the following situations:
▷ In car washes.
▷ On narrow roads.
▷ For folding mirrors back out that were
folded away manually.
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐
matically at a speed of approx.
25 mph/40 km/h.
Automatic heating
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated
whenever the engine is running.
Automatic dimming feature
Both exterior mirrors are automatically dim‐
med. Photocells are used to control the Interior
rearview mirror, refer to page 86.
Interior rearview mirror, automatic
dimming feature
Overview
Photocells are used for control:
▷ In the mirror glass.
▷ On the back of the mirror.
Functional requirement
For proper operation:
▷ Keep the photocells clean.
▷ Do not cover the area between the inside
rearview mirror and the windshield.
Rear vanity mirror
Folding down
Press vanity mirror.
The vanity mirror folds down.
The angle can be adjusted by hand.
Folding up
Press the mirror up.
Seite 86
Controls Adjusting
86
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Steering wheel
Information
WARNING
Steering wheel adjustments while driving
can lead to unexpected steering wheel move‐
ments. Vehicle control could be lost. There is
risk of an accident. Adjust the steering wheel
while the vehicle is stationary only.◀
Power steering wheel adjustment
Adjusting
Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seating position.
Storing the position
Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory, refer
to page 87.
Heated steering wheel
Overview
Heated steering wheel
Switching on/off
Press button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
If the trip is resumed within approx. 15 min,
steering wheel heating is automatically acti‐
vated again.
Seat, mirror, and steering
wheel memory
The concept
Two different driver's seat, exterior mirror and
steering wheel positions can be stored per
profile, refer to page 58, and called up.
Information
WARNING
Using the memory function while driving
can lead to unexpected seat or steering wheel
movements. Vehicle control could be lost.
There is risk of an accident. Only retrieve the
memory function when the vehicle is station‐
ary.◀
WARNING
There is risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is risk of injuries or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
justment.◀
Seite 87
Adjusting Controls
87
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Overview
Front
Rear
Storing
1.
Set the desired position.
2.
Press button. The writing on the
button lights up.
3. Press desired button 1 or 2 while the LED
is lit. Lighting of the writing goes out.
Button was pressed inadvertently:
Press button again.
Lighting of the writing goes out.
Calling up settings
Comfort function
Press selected button 1 or 2.
The corresponding seat position is performed
automatically.
The procedure stops when a switch for adjust‐
ing the seat or one of the buttons is pressed.
The comfort function is not available on the
driver's seat while driving.
Safety mode
While driving, a profile can be called up on the
driver's seat:
Press and hold the desired button 1 or 2 until
the adjustment procedure is completed.
BMW Touch Command
The memory function can also be operated on
the front passenger seat and in the rear via
BMW Touch Command.
Massage function
The concept
Depending on the program, the massage func‐
tion ensures relaxed muscles and better blood
circulation and can avoid fatigue.
General information
Eight different massage programs can be se‐
lected:
▷ Pelvis activation.
▷ Upper body activation.
▷ Full body activation.
▷ Back massage.
▷ Shoulder massage.
▷ Lumbar massage.
▷ Upper body training.
▷ Full body training.
Seite 88
Controls Adjusting
88
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Overview
Front
Massage function
Rear
Massage function
Switching on
Via the iDrive
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Seat comfort"
4. Select desired seat.
5. "Seat massage"
6. "Level"
7. Select intensity 1–3.
Using the button
Whole-body training is started.
Press button once for each massage level.
The highest level is active when three LEDs
are lit.
Switch off
Via the iDrive
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Seat comfort"
4. Select desired seat.
5. "Seat massage"
6. "Level"
7. "OFF"
Using the button
Press and hold the button, until the
LEDs go out.
Adjusting the massage program
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Seat comfort"
4. Select desired seat.
5. "Seat massage"
6. Select desired setting.
BMW Touch Command
Operation of the massage function is also pos‐
sible via BMW Touch Command.
Captain’s chair
The concept
The Captain’s chair offers maximum legroom
and increased traveling comfort to the rear
passenger on the front passenger's side.
Seite 89
Adjusting Controls
89
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
General information
The following settings are applied to the seat
automatically on system activation:
▷ The front passenger's seat moves forward
and adjusts the height if necessary.
▷ Backrest and head restraint of the front
passenger seat are inclined forward.
▷ The tilt of the screen in the rear is adjusted
to the rest incline of the passenger's seat.
▷ The head restraint on the backrest of the
front passenger seat folds out.
▷ The backrest of the rear seat inclines to the
rear.
The adjusted end position can be manually ad‐
justed, refer to page 78, and stored using the
Memory function, refer to page 87, if needed.
Information
WARNING
If the Captain’s chair is activated, the
view on the right exterior mirror can be ob‐
structed. There is risk of an accident. Adjust
the front passenger seat such that the view on
the exterior mirror is not obstructed.◀
Overview
Captain’s chair
Switching on
Press button.
Resetting to standard position
Press button to reset to standard po‐
sition.
The process is canceled if the button is
pressed again.
Vitality programs
The concept
Different muscles can be trained using the vi‐
tality program in the rear. Active movements
help in preventing signs of fatigue.
General information
After each start of the vitalization program,
there is a calibration run. Here the intensity of
the exercises is set individually.
Videos on the respective screens in the rear
show, which motions should be executed. A
display informs about the still-remaining dura‐
tion of each exercise. There is direct feedback
to the exercise executed by a display of stars
and a color bar display:
▷ Green: exercise was correctly executed.
▷ Gray: the pressure was too weak.
▷ Red: the pressure was too weak.
The goal of the exercises is to keep the bar
display in the green area as long as possible.
Every exercise is evaluated by awarding stars.
Seite 90
Controls Adjusting
90
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Switching on
On the screens in the rear:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Seat comfort"
3. "BMW Vitality Program"
Switch off
On the screens in the rear:
1. Press left arrow button on the remote con‐
trol in the rear.
2. "Stop"
BMW Touch Command
The vitality program can also be operated us‐
ing BMW Touch Command.
Seat and armrest heating
General information
The system heats seats and armrests as
needed. Seat heating can also be used without
armrest heating.
Overview
Front
Seat and armrest heating
Rear
Seat and armrest heating
Switching on
Press button once for each tempera‐
ture level.
Highest level if three bars are shown on the cli‐
mate control display.
If the trip is continued within approx. 15 mi‐
nutes, the seat and armrest heating is acti‐
vated automatically with the temperature se‐
lected last.
When ECO PRO, refer to page 241, is acti‐
vated, the heater output is reduced.
Switch off
Press button and hold until bar display
on the climate control display goes
out.
Temperature distribution
The heating action in the seat cushion and
backrest can be distributed in different ways.
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Climate functions"
4. "Seat and armrest heating"
Seite 91
Adjusting Controls
91
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
5. Select desired seat.
6. Pres the controller and turn to set the tem‐
perature distribution.
Switching armrest heating on/off
About iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Climate functions"
4. "Seat and armrest heating"
5. Select desired seat.
6. "Heat up armrest together with seat"
Active seat ventilation
The concept
The seat cushion and backrest surfaces are
cooled by means of integrated fans.
The ventilation cools the seat, e. g., if the vehi‐
cle interior is overheated or for continuous
cooling at high temperatures.
Overview
Front
Active seat ventilation
Rear
Active seat ventilation
Switching on
Press button once for each ventilation
level.
Highest level if three bars are shown on the cli‐
mate control display.
After a short time, the system automatically
moves down one level in order to prevent ex‐
cessive cooling.
Switch off
Press button and hold until bar display
on the climate control display goes
out.
Seite 92
Controls Adjusting
92
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Transporting children safely
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
The right place for children
Information
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
move the vehicle and endanger themselves
and traffic, e.g. with the following actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing of doors or windows.
▷ Shifting the selector lever into neutral.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Carry remote control along when exiting
and lock the vehicle.◀
Children should always be in the rear
WARNING
Persons shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm cannot
correctly fasten the safety belt without suitable
additional restraint systems. The protective ef‐
fect of the safety belts can be limited or lost
when safety belts are fastened incorrectly. An
incorrectly fastened safety belt can cause ad‐
ditional injuries, e.g. in the event of an accident
or during braking and evasive maneuvers.
There is risk of injuries or danger to life. Secure
persons shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm using suita‐
ble restraint systems.◀
Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is in the back seat.
Only transport children younger than 13 years
of age or shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm in the rear in
child restraint systems provided in accordance
with the age, weight and size of the child.
Children 13 years of age or older must wear a
safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint
system can no longer be used due to their age,
weight and size.
Children on the front passenger seat
Before using a child restraint system on the
front passenger seat, ensure that the front,
knee, and side airbags on the front passenger
side are deactivated. Automatic deactivation of
front-seat passenger airbags, refer to
page 138.
Information
WARNING
Active front-seat passenger airbags can
injure a child in a child restraint system when
the airbags are activated. There is risk of inju‐
ries. Make sure that the front-seat passenger
airbags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
GER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up.◀
Seite 93
Transporting children safely Controls
93
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Installing child restraint
systems
Information
Pay attention to the specifications of the child
restraint system manufacturer when selecting,
installing, and using child restraint systems.
WARNING
The stability of the child restraint system
is limited or compromised with incorrect seat
adjustment or improper installation of the child
seat. There is risk of injuries or danger to life.
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad‐
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that
seats and backrests are securely engaged. If
possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
straints or remove them.◀
On the front passenger seat
Deactivating airbags
WARNING
Active front-seat passenger airbags can
injure a child in a child restraint system when
the airbags are activated. There is risk of inju‐
ries. Make sure that the front-seat passenger
airbags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
GER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up.◀
After installing a child restraint system in the
front passenger seat, make sure that the front,
knee and side airbags on the front passenger
side are deactivated.
Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags
automatically, refer to page 138.
Seat position and height
Before installing a child restraint system, move
the front passenger seat as far back as possi‐
ble and bring it up to medium height to obtain
the best possible position for the belt and to
offer optimal protection in the event of an acci‐
dent.
If the upper anchorage of the safety belt is lo‐
cated in front of the belt guide of the child seat,
move the passenger seat carefully forward un‐
til the best possible belt guide position is
reached.
Backrest width
Adjustable backrest width: before installing a
child restraint system in the front passenger
seat, open the backrest width completely. Do
not change the backrest width again and do
not call up a memory position.
Child seat security
The rear safety belts and the front passenger
safety belt can be permanently locked to fas‐
ten child restraint systems.
The front passenger safety belt can be perma‐
nently locked to fasten child restraint systems.
Locking the safety belt
1.
Pull out the strap completely.
2. Secure the child restraint system with the
belt.
3. Allow the strap to be pulled in and pull it
tight against the child restraint system.
The safety belt is locked.
Unlocking the safety belt
1.
Unbuckle the belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint system.
3. Allow the strap to be pulled in completely.
Seite 94
Controls Transporting children safely
94
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
LATCH child restraint system
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil‐
dren.
Information
Pay attention to the operating and safety infor‐
mation of the child restraint system manufac‐
turer when installing and using LATCH child
restraint fixing system.
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors
General information
The lower anchors may be used to attach the
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child
and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the child
is restrained by the internal harnesses.
Information
WARNING
If the LATCH child restraint fixing sys‐
tems are not correctly engaged, the protective
effect of the LATCH child restraint fixing sys‐
tem can be limited. There is risk of injuries or
danger to life. Make sure that the lower an‐
chors are securely engaged and that the
LATCH child restraint fixing system fits se‐
curely against the backrest.◀
Position
The corresponding symbol shows the
mounts for the lower LATCH anchors.
Seats equipped with lower anchors are
marked with a pair, 2, of LATCH sym‐
bols. It is not recommended to use the
inner lower anchors of standard outer
LATCH positions to fasten a child restraint
system on the middle seat. Use the vehicle
seat belt instead for the middle seat.
Before installing LATCH child
restraint systems
Pull the belt away from the area of the child re‐
straint system.
Without comfort seats in the rear:
Assembly of LATCH child restraint
systems
1. Install child restraint system, see manufac‐
turer's information.
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐
erly connected.
With comfort rear seats: Assembly of
LATCH child restraint fixing systems
1.
Before mounting, adjust the seats to their
basic position, refer to page 80.
2. For better accessibility, tilt the backrest
back slightly.
3. Install child restraint system, see manufac‐
turer's information.
4. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐
erly connected.
5. After mounting, move the backrest back up
slightly so that the child restraint system
rests lightly against the backrest.
Child restraint fixing system with a
tether strap
Mounting points
The respective symbol shows the an‐
chor for the upper retaining strap.
Seats with an upper Top Tether are
marked with this symbol. It can be found on
the rear seat backrest or the rear window shelf.
Seite 95
Transporting children safely Controls
95
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Information
CAUTION
The mounting points for the upper re‐
taining straps of child restraint systems are
only provided for these retaining straps. When
other objects are mounted, the anchors can be
damaged. There is risk of property damage.
Only mount child restraint systems to the up‐
per retaining straps.◀
Retaining strap guide
WARNING
If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly
used for the child restraint system, the protec‐
tive effect can be reduced. There is risk of inju‐
ries. Make sure that the upper retaining strap is
not guided across sharp edges and without
twisting to the upper retaining strap.◀
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
3 Hook for upper retaining strap
4 Mounting point
5 Rear window shelf
6 Seat backrest
7 Upper retaining strap
Attaching the upper retaining strap to
the mounting point
1.
Remove the mounting point cover.
2. Raise the head restraint.
3. Guide the upper retaining strap between
the supports of the head restraint.
Guide it over the head restraint of the mid‐
dle seat.
4. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to
the anchor.
5. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it
down.
6. Lower and lock head restraints as needed.
Locking the doors and
windows in the rear
Doors
Push the locking lever on the rear doors up.
The door can now be opened from the outside
only.
Safety switch for the rear
Press button on the driver's door if
children are being transported in the
rear.
This locks various functions so that they can‐
not be operated from the rear: safety switch,
refer to page 71.
Seite 96
Controls Transporting children safely
96
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Driving
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Start/Stop button
The concept
Pressing the Start/Stop button
switches drive readiness on or
off.
Drive readiness starts with the
brake pedal pressed when you
press the Start/Stop button.
Pressing the Start/Stop button again switches
drive readiness back off and operating readi‐
ness, refer to page 19, is switched back on.
Drive readiness
Information
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila‐
tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can
enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases con‐
tain carbon monoxide, an odorless and color‐
less but highly toxic gas. In enclosed areas, ex‐
haust gases can also accumulate outside of
the vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep the
exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient ventila‐
tion.◀
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can put itself into
motion and roll away. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against
rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, turn the
front wheels in the direction of the curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, also secure
the vehicle, e.g. with a wheel chock.◀
CAUTION
In the case of repeated starting attempts
or repeated starting in quick succession, the
fuel is not burned or is inadequately burned.
The catalytic converter can overheat. There is
risk of property damage. Avoid repeated start‐
ing in quick succession.◀
Switching on drive readiness
Steptronic transmission
1.
Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The ignition is activated automatically for a
certain time and is stopped as soon as the en‐
gine starts.
Most of the indicator and warning lights in the
instrument cluster light up for a varied length
of time.
Switch off drive readiness
Steptronic transmission
1.
Engage selector lever position P with the
vehicle stopped.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The engine is switched off.
Seite 97
Driving Controls
97
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
3. Set the parking brake.
Before driving into a car wash
So that the vehicle can roll into a car wash ob‐
serve instructions for going into an automatic
car wash, refer to page 291.
Auto Start/Stop function
The concept
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.
The system switches off the engine during a
stop, e.g., in traffic congestion or at traffic
lights. Drive readiness remains switched on.
The engine starts again automatically for driv‐
ing off.
Information
After every engine start via the Start/Stop but‐
ton, the Auto Start/Stop function is activated or
deactivated, according to the last setting, refer
to page 99. If the Auto Start/Stop function is
active, it is available as soon as a speed of ap‐
prox. 3 mph, approx. 5 km/h is exceeded.
Engine stop
The engine is switched off automatically dur‐
ing a stop under the following conditions:
▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi‐
tion D.
▷ The brake pedal remains pressed while the
vehicle is stationary or the vehicle is held
by Automatic Hold.
▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the
driver's door is closed.
The air flow from the air conditioner is reduced
when the engine is switched off.
Displays in the instrument cluster
The display in the tachometer
indicates that the Auto Start/
Stop function is ready for an Au‐
tomatic engine start.
The display indicates that the
conditions for an automatic en‐
gine stop have not been met.
Functional limitations
The engine is not switched off automatically in
the following situations:
▷ In case of a steep downhill grade.
▷ Brake not engaged strongly enough.
▷ The external temperature is high and auto‐
matic climate control is running.
▷ The car's interior has not yet been heated
or cooled to the required level.
▷ If window condensation is imminent.
▷ Engine or other parts not at operating tem‐
perature.
▷ Engine cooling is required.
▷ The wheels are at a sharp angle or the
steering wheel is being turned.
▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.
▷ At higher elevations.
▷ The engine compartment lid is unlocked.
▷ HDC Hill Descent Control is activated.
▷ The parking assistant is activated.
▷ Stop-and-go traffic.
▷ Selector lever position in N or R.
▷ After driving in reverse.
▷ Use of fuel with high ethanol content.
Starting the engine
The engine starts automatically under the fol‐
lowing conditions:
Seite 98
Controls Driving
98
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
▷ By releasing the brake pedal.
▷ When Automatic Hold is activated: press
the accelerator pedal.
After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.
Safety mode
After the engine switches off automatically, it
will not start again automatically if any one of
the following conditions are met:
▷ The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and
the driver's door is open.
▷ The hood was unlocked.
Some indicator lights light up for a varied
length of time.
The engine can only be started via the Start/
Stop button.
Functional limitations
Even if driving off was not intended, the deacti‐
vated engine starts up automatically in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ Excessive warming of the car's interior
when the cooling function is switched on.
▷ Excessive cooling of the car's interior when
the heating is switched on.
▷ If window condensation is imminent.
▷ The steering wheel is turned.
▷ Change from selector lever position D to N
or R.
▷ Change from selector lever position P to N,
D or R.
▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.
▷ Start of an oil level measurement.
Activating/deactivating the system
manually
Using the button
Press button.
▷ LED comes on: Auto Start/Stop function is
deactivated.
The engine is not automatically switched
off.
The engine is started during an automatic
engine stop.
The Auto Start/Stop function is deacti‐
vated in selector lever position M/S or in
SPORT drive mode.
▷ LED goes out: Auto Start/Stop function is
activated.
Switching off the vehicle during an
automatic engine stop
During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle
can be switched off permanently, e. g., when
leaving it.
1.
Press the Start/Stop button.
▷ Drive readiness is switched off.
▷ Operating readiness is switched on.
▷ Selector lever position P is engaged
automatically.
2. Set the parking brake.
Seite 99
Driving Controls
99
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Automatic deactivation
In certain situations, Auto Start/Stop function
is deactivated automatically for safety reasons
as if the driver were absent.
Malfunction
The Auto Start/Stop function no longer
switches off the engine automatically. A Check
Control message is displayed. It is possible to
continue driving. Have the system checked.
Parking brake
The concept
The parking brake is used to prevent the vehi‐
cle from rolling when it is parked.
Information
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can put itself into
motion and roll away. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against
rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, turn the
front wheels in the direction of the curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, also secure
the vehicle, e.g. with a wheel chock.◀
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
move the vehicle and endanger themselves
and traffic, e.g. with the following actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing of doors or windows.
▷ Shifting the selector lever into neutral.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Carry remote control along when exiting
and lock the vehicle.◀
Overview
Parking brake
Setting
Pull the switch.
LED on the switch lights up.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up red. The parking brake
is set.
While driving
Use as emergency brake while driving:
Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle brakes
hard while the switch is being pulled.
The indicator lamp lights up red, a sig‐
nal sounds and the brake lights light
up.
A Check Control message is displayed.
If the vehicle is slowed down to a speed of ap‐
prox. 2 mph/3 km/h the parking brake is set.
Releasing
With drive readiness switched on:
Seite 100
Controls Driving
100
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Press the switch while stepping on the
brake pedal or selector lever position P is
set.
The LED and indicator lamp go out.
The parking brake is released.
Automatic release
The parking brake is released automatically
when you drive away.
The LED and indicator lamp go out.
Automatic Hold
The concept
This system assists the driver by automatically
setting and releasing the brake, such as when
moving in stop-and-go traffic.
The vehicle is automatically held in place when
it is stationary.
On inclines, the system prevents the vehicle
from rolling backward when driving off.
General information
Under the following conditions, the parking
brake is automatically engaged:
▷ Drive readiness is deactivated.
▷ The driver's door is opened while the vehi‐
cle is stationary.
▷ The moving vehicle is brought to a stand‐
still using the parking brake.
The indicator lamp changes from green
to red.
The indicator lamp goes out.
Information
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can put itself into
motion and roll away. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against
rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, turn the
front wheels in the direction of the curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, also secure
the vehicle, e.g. with a wheel chock.◀
CAUTION
If the vehicle is stationary, Automatic
Hold engages the parking brake. It prevents
the vehicle from rolling in a car wash. There is
risk of property damage. Deactivate Automatic
Hold prior to entering the car wash.◀
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
move the vehicle and endanger themselves
and traffic, e.g. with the following actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing of doors or windows.
▷ Shifting the selector lever into neutral.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Carry remote control along when exiting
and lock the vehicle.◀
Seite 101
Driving Controls
101
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Overview
Automatic Hold
Establishing function readiness from
Automatic Hold
Press the button while pressing on the
brake pedal.
The LED on the button lights up.
The indicator lamp lights up green.
Automatic Hold is functional.
After every new vehicles start, the last
selected setting is active.
Automatic Hold holding the vehicle
Function readiness is established.
After stepping on the brake pedal, e.g. when
stopping at a traffic light, the vehicle is auto‐
matically secured against rolling.
The indicator lamp lights up green.
Step on the accelerator pedal to drive
off.
The brake is released automatically.
The indicator lamp goes out.
Parking
The parking brake is engaged automatically if
the vehicle is stopped with Automatic Hold and
the drive-ready state is deactivated.
The indicator lamp changes from green
to red.
The parking brake is not set if the drive-ready
state is deactivated while the vehicle is coast‐
ing to a halt. Automatic Hold is deactivated.
Automatic Hold remains active during the en‐
gine stop brought about by the Auto Start/
Stop function.
Switching function readiness off
Press button.
The LED on the button goes out.
The indicator lamp goes out.
Automatic Hold is switched off.
If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold,
press on the brake pedal to switch it off.
Malfunction
In the event of a failure or malfunction of the
parking brake, secure the vehicle against roll‐
ing using a wheel chock, e.g., when leaving it.
After a power failure
Putting the parking brake into
operation
1.
Turn on operations.
2.
Pull the switch while stepping on the
brake pedal or selector lever position P is
set and then push.
It may take several seconds for the brake to be
put into operation. Any sounds associated with
this are normal.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster goes out as soon as the parking
brake is ready for operation.
Seite 102
Controls Driving
102
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Turn signal, high beams,
headlight flasher
Turn signal
Turn signal in exterior mirror
When driving and during operation of the turn
signals or hazard warning system, do not fold
in the exterior mirrors, so that the signal lights
on the exterior mirror are easy to see.
Using turn signals
Press the lever beyond the resistance point.
The turn signal lever returns into is starting po‐
sition after actuation.
To switch off manually, slightly tap the lever to
the resistance point.
Triple turn signal activation
Slightly tap lever.
The triple turn signal duration can be adjusted.
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting"
5. "One-touch turn signal"
6. Select desired setting.
The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐
rently used.
Signaling briefly
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold
it there for as long as you want the turn signal
to flash.
High beams, headlight flasher
▷ High beams, arrow 1.
▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.
Washer/wiper system
Switching the wipers on/off and brief
wipe
General information
Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry,
as this may damage the wiper blades or cause
them to become worn more quickly.
Information
CAUTION
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper
motor overheat on switching on. There is risk
of property damage. Defrost the windshield
prior to switching the wipers on.◀
Seite 103
Driving Controls
103
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Switching on
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
▷ Normal wiper speed: tap up once.
The wipers switch to intermittent operation
when the vehicle is stationary.
▷ Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap once
beyond the resistance point.
Wipers change to normal speed when ve‐
hicle comes to standstill.
Switch off and brief wipe
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
▷ Single wipe: press down once.
▷ To switch off from normal wiper speed:
press down once.
▷ To switch off from fast wiper speed: press
down twice.
Intermittent operation or rain sensor
The concept
Without the rain sensor, the frequency of the
wiper operation is preset.
The rain sensor automatically controls the time
between wipes depending on the intensity of
the rainfall. The sensor is located on the wind‐
shield, directly behind the interior rearview mir‐
ror.
Activating/deactivating
Press button on the wiper lever.
Wiping is started. If the vehicle is equipped
with a rain sensor: LED in wiper lever lights up.
When wipers are frozen to windshield, wiper
operation is deactivated.
During trip interruption with the rain sensor
switched on: if the trip is resumed within ap‐
prox. 15 minutes, the rain sensor is automati‐
cally activated again.
CAUTION
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers
can accidentally start moving in car washes.
There is risk of property damage. Deactivate
the rain sensor in car washes.◀
Seite 104
Controls Driving
104
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Setting the interval time or sensitivity
of the rain sensor
Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the frequency
or sensitivity of the rain sensor.
Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the rain
sensor.
Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the rain
sensor.
Clean the windshield, headlights
Pull the wiper lever towards you.
The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐
shield and activates the wipers briefly.
In addition, the headlights are cleaned at regu‐
lar intervals when the vehicle's lights are acti‐
vated.
WARNING
The washer fluid can freeze onto the win‐
dow at low temperatures and obstruct the
view. There is risk of an accident. Only use the
washer systems, if the washer fluid cannot
freeze. Use antifreeze if needed.◀
CAUTION
When the wiper water container is
empty, the wash pump cannot work as in‐
tended. There is risk of property damage. Do
not use the washer system when the wash wa‐
ter container is empty.◀
Windshield washer nozzles
The windshield washer nozzles are automati‐
cally heated while operating readiness is
switched on.
Fold-out position of the wipers
Fold wipers back when you want to change the
blades or with pending low temperatures.
WARNING
If the wipers start moving in the folded
away state, damage may occur to parts of the
vehicle or body parts can be jammed. There is
risk of injuries or risk of property damage.
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off
when the wipers are in the folded away state
and the wipers are folded in when switching
on.◀
1.
Turn on operations.
2. With icy conditions make sure that blades
are not frozen to the windshield.
3. Press and hold wiper lever downward, until
the wipers stop in a close to vertical posi‐
tion.
Seite 105
Driving Controls
105
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
After the wipers are folded back down, the
wiper system must be reactivated.
1. Switch on drive readiness and press and
hold the wiper lever downward again.
2. Wipers return to their resting position and
are ready again for operation.
Washer fluid
Information
WARNING
Some antifreeze agents can contain
harmful substances and are flammable. There
is risk of fire and risk of injuries. Observe the
instructions on the containers. Keep antifreeze
away from ignition sources. Do not refill oper‐
ating materials into different bottles. Store op‐
erating materials out of reach of children.
United States: The washer fluid mixture ratio is
regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual
states; do not exceed the allowable washer
fluid dilution ratio limits that apply. Follow the
usage instructions on the washer fluid con‐
tainer.
Use of BMW’s Windshield Washer Concen‐
trate or the equivalent is recommended.◀
WARNING
Improperly executed work under the
hood can damage components and lead to a
safety risk. There is risk of accidents or risk of
property damage. Have work under the hood
be executed by a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.◀
Washer fluid reservoir
All washer nozzles are supplied from one res‐
ervoir in the engine compartment.
Fill with a mixture of windshield washer con‐
centrate and tap water and – if required – with a
washer antifreeze, according to the manufac‐
turer's recommendations.
Mix the washer fluid before adding to find the
right mixture.
Do not add windshield washer concentrate and
antifreeze undiluted and do not fill with pure
water; this could damage the wiper system.
Do not mix window washer concentrates of dif‐
ferent manufacturers because they can clog
the windshield washer nozzles.
Recommended minimum fill quantity:
0.2 US gal/1 liter.
Steptronic transmission
Information
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can put itself into
motion and roll away. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against
rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, turn the
front wheels in the direction of the curb.
Seite 106
Controls Driving
106
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, also secure
the vehicle, e.g. with a wheel chock.◀
Selector lever positions
D Drive
Selector lever position for normal vehicle oper‐
ation. All gears for forward travel are activated
automatically.
To reduce fuel consumption, the engine is au‐
tomatically decoupled from the transmission
under the conditions described for Coasting,
refer to page 245.
R is Reverse
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
N Neutral:
The vehicle may roll in selector lever posi‐
tion N.
Engage selector lever position N, e.g. in car
washes, refer to page 291.
With operating readiness switched off, refer to
page 20, selector lever position P is engaged
automatically.
P Park
Select only when the vehicle is stationary. The
drive wheels are blocked.
Selector lever position P is engaged automati‐
cally:
▷ After drive readiness, refer to page 97, is
switched off and selector lever position R
or D is engaged.
▷ If operating readiness is switched off and
selector lever position N is engaged.
▷ If the driver's safety belt is released, the
driver's door is opened, and the brake
pedal is not pressed while the vehicle is
stationary and selector lever position D or
R is set.
Kickdown
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving
performance. Step on the accelerator pedal
beyond the resistance point at the full throttle
position.
Engaging selector lever positions
General information
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you
select a gear, maintain pressure on the brake
pedal until you are ready to start.
It is not possible to shift out of selector lever
position P until the engine is running and the
brake is applied.
With the vehicle is stationary, press on the
brake pedal before shifting out of selector lever
position P or N; otherwise, the shift command
will not be executed: shift lock.
A block prevents the inadvertent switching to
selector lever position R or the inadvertent
change from selector lever position P.
Engaging selector lever position D, N,
R
Briefly push the selector lever in the desired di‐
rection, beyond a resistance point if needed.
After releasing the selector lever, it returns to
its center position.
Seite 107
Driving Controls
107
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Canceling the lock
Press unlock button.
Engage selector lever position P
Press button P.
Sport program and manual mode
Activating the sport program
Press the selector lever to the left out of selec‐
tor lever position D.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster, e.g., S1.
The sport program of the transmission is acti‐
vated.
Activating the M/S manual mode
1. Press the selector lever to the left out of
selector lever position D.
2. Push the selector lever forward or pull it
backward.
Manual mode becomes active and the gear is
changed.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster, e.g., M1.
If the situation requires, the Steptronic trans‐
mission continues to shift automatically.
Example: once maximum engine speed is at‐
tained, M/S manual mode is automatically up‐
shifted as needed.
Switching to manual mode
▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐
ward.
▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rear‐
wards.
Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine
and road speeds, for example downshifting is
not possible if the engine speed is too high.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
strument cluster, followed by the currently se‐
lected gear.
Steptronic Sport transmission:
prevent automatic upshifting in M/S
manual mode
If drive mode SPORT, refer to page 111, is se‐
lected, the Steptronic Sport transmission does
not automatically upshift in M/S manual mode
once the maximum speed is reached.
In addition, there is no downshift for kickdown.
With the respective transmission version, the
lowest possible gear can be selected by simul‐
taneously operating the kickdown and the left
shift paddle. However, this effect is not pro‐
duced via the shift paddles when switching
briefly from selector lever position D to manual
mode.
Seite 108
Controls Driving
108
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Ending the sport program/manual
mode
Push the selector lever to the right.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Shift paddles
The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow
you to shift gears quickly while keeping both
hands on the steering wheel.
▷ Shift up: briefly pull right shift paddle.
▷ Shift down: briefly pull left shift paddle.
▷ With the respective transmission version,
the lowest possible gear can be selected
by pulling and holding the left shift paddle.
Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine
and road speeds, for example downshifting is
not possible if the engine speed is too high.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
strument cluster, followed by the current gear.
If the shift paddles on the steering wheel are
used to shift gears in automatic mode, the
transmission temporarily switches to manual
mode.
If the selector lever is still in selector lever po‐
sition D with the respective transmission ver‐
sion, it is possible to switch back into the auto‐
matic mode:
▷ Pull and hold right shift paddle.
or
▷ In addition to the briefly pulled right shift
paddle, briefly pull the left shift paddle.
In the manual mode, after conservative driving
for a certain amount of time or if there has
been no acceleration or shifting of the shift
paddles within a certain amount of time, the
transmission switches back to automatic
mode.
Displays in the instrument cluster
The selector lever position is
displayed, e.g.: P.
Electronic unlocking of the
transmission lock
General information
Electronically unlock the transmission lock to
maneuver vehicle from the danger area.
Unlocking is possible, if the started can spin
the engine.
Engaging selector lever position N
1.
Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press and hold the Start/Stop button. The
starter must audibly start.
3. Press and hold the selector lever into se‐
lector lever position N, until selector lever
position N is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
A corresponding Check Control message
is displayed.
4. Release Start/Stop button and selector
lever.
5. Release brake, as soon as the starter
stops.
6. Maneuver the vehicle from the danger area
and secure it against moving on its own.
Launch Control
The concept
Launch Control enables optimum acceleration
on surfaces with good traction.
Seite 109
Driving Controls
109
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
General information
The use of Launch Control causes premature
component wear since this function represents
a very heavy load for the vehicle.
Do not use Launch Control during the break-in,
refer to page 234, period.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC
again as soon as possible.
An experienced driver may be able to achieve
better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode.
Requirements
Launch Control is available when the engine is
warmed up, that is, after uninterrupted driving
of at least 6 miles/10 km.
To start with Launch Control do not steer the
steering wheel.
Start with launch control
While the engine is running:
1. Press button.
TRACTION is displayed in the instrument
cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC OFF
lights up.
2. Engage selector lever position S.
3. With the left foot, forcefully press down on
the brake.
4. Press and hold down the accelerator pedal
beyond the resistance point at the full
throttle position, kickdown.
A flag symbol is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster.
5. The starting engine speed adjusts. Within
3 seconds, release the brake.
Before using Launch Control, allow the trans‐
mission to cool down for approx. 5 minutes.
Launch Control adjusts to the surrounding
conditions, e.g., wet pavement, when used
again.
Driving Dynamics Control
The concept
The Driving Dynamics Control influences the
driving dynamics properties of the vehicle. The
vehicle can be adjusted depending on the sit‐
uation using various driving modes.
The following systems are affected:
▷ Engine characteristics.
▷ Steptronic transmission.
▷ Dynamic Damping Control.
▷ Air suspension
▷ Active roll stabilization.
▷ Integral Active Steering.
▷ Display in the instrument cluster.
▷ Cruise control.
▷ Backrest width for comfort seats.
Overview
Controls
Drive modes
Press but‐
ton
Drive mode Configuration
SPORT INDIVIDUAL
COMFORT PLUS
ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL
ADAPTIVE
Seite 110
Controls Driving
110
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Selecting a driving mode
Press button for the desired driving mode
once.
Activating configuration of the driving
mode
Press button for the desired driving mode sev‐
eral times.
Configure INDIVIDUAL driving mode
1. Activate desired driving mode with Driving
Dynamics Control switch.
2. "Configure INDIVIDUAL"
Select desired setting.
The individual configuration of the driving
mode is taken over for the active profile. The
last set configuration is activated directly when
the driving mode is called up. With activating of
the drive-ready state, the COMFORT driving
mode is selected automatically.
Displays in the instrument cluster
The selected drive mode is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
Display on the Control Display
Drive mode changes can be briefly shown on
the Control Display.
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Driving Experience Control"
4. "Driving mode information in control
display"
Driving modes in detail
COMFORT
The concept
Balanced tuning between dynamic and con‐
sumption-optimized driving.
Switching on
Press button repeatedly until COM‐
FORT is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
COMFORT PLUS
The concept
Particularly comfortable tuning for optimum
traveling comfort.
Switching on
Press button repeatedly until COM‐
FORT PLUS is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster.
SPORT
The concept
Dynamic tuning for higher agility.
Switching on
Press button. SPORT is displayed in
the instrument cluster.
SPORT INDIVIDUAL
The concept
Individual settings can be adjusted in the
SPORT INDIVIDUAL drive mode.
Seite 111
Driving Controls
111
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Configuration
About iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Driving Experience Control"
4. "Configure SPORT INDIVIDUAL"
5. Select desired setting.
The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐
rently used.
Reset SPORT INDIVIDUAL to the standard
settings:
"Reset to SPORT STANDARD".
ECO PRO
The concept
Consumption-optimized tuning, refer to
page 241.
Switching on
Press button. ECO PRO is displayed
in the instrument cluster.
ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL
The concept
Individual settings can be adjusted in the ECO
PRO INDIVIDUAL drive mode.
Configuration
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Driving Experience Control"
4. "Configure ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL"
5. Select desired setting.
The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐
rently used.
Reset ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL to the standard
settings:
"Reset to ECO PRO STANDARD".
ADAPTIVE
The concept
Comfort-oriented drive mode, whose tuning is
automatically adjusted to the driving situation
and driving style.
If the navigation system is active, upcoming
road sections are considered as well.
Switching on
Press button. ADAPTIVE is displayed
in the instrument cluster.
Seite 112
Controls Driving
112
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Displays
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Instrument cluster
The concept
The instrument cluster is a variable display. In
the event of a program change, the display
rendition adapts to the respective program
through the Driving Dynamics Control. The
change of the display type can be deactivated
via iDrive.
Some of the displays in the instrument cluster
may differ from the way they are shown in this
Owner's Manual.
Overview
1 Fuel gauge 118
2 Speedometer
3 Time 118
External temperature 118
Driver assistance system displays
4 Tachometer 118
Seite 113
Displays Controls
113
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Selection lists 121
ECO PRO displays 241
Navigation display
Messages, e.g., Check Control
5 Engine temperature 118
6 Transmission display 106
Status, Driving Dynamics Control 110
7 On-board computer 122
8 Driver assistance system displays
Speed limit detection 120
9 Reset miles 123
Adjusting the view
The concept
In addition to the driving program views, the in‐
strument cluster can be adjusted to three dif‐
ferent operating modes.
Adjusting
About iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. Select desired setting.
▷ "STANDARD": All displays on the in‐
strument cluster are active.
▷ "REDUCED" All displays on the instru‐
ment cluster are reduced to the essen‐
tial.
▷ "INDIVIDUAL": All displays on the in‐
strument cluster are active. Individual
displays can be individually configured.
Individual view
▷ "Driving mode display": when the driving
program is switched into ECO PRO or
SPORT, the instrument cluster automati‐
cally switched into the respective view.
▷ "Traffic sign detection Speed Limit Info":
the traffic signs and additional signs recog‐
nized via speed limit detection are dis‐
played.
▷ "Speed limit exceeded": if the speed rec‐
ognized by speed limit detection is ex‐
ceeded, the exceeded range is marked red
in the speedometer.
▷ Instrument cluster with enhanced features:
"Magnifier function": the current speed is
shown enlarged in the speedometer.
Check Control
The concept
The Check Control system monitors functions
in the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions
in the monitored systems.
A Check Control message is displayed as a
combination of indicator or warning lights and
text messages in the instrument cluster and in
the Head-up Display.
In addition, an acoustic signal may sound and a
text message may appear on the Control Dis‐
play.
Indicator/warning lights
General information
The indicator and warning lights in the instru‐
ment cluster can light up in a variety of combi‐
nations and colors.
Several of the lamps are checked for proper
functioning and light up temporarily when drive
readiness is switched on.
Seite 114
Controls Displays
114
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Red lights
Safety belt reminder
Flashing or illuminated: safety belt on
the driver or passenger side is not
buckled. The safety belt reminder can
also be activated if objects are placed on the
front passenger seat.
Make sure that the safety belts are positioned
correctly.
Airbag system
Airbag system and belt tensioner are
not working.
Have the vehicle checked immediately
by a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
Parking brake
The parking brake is set.
For additional information, refer to Re‐
lease parking brake, refer to page 100.
Brake system
Braking system disrupted. Continue to
drive moderately.
Have the vehicle checked immediately
by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Yellow lights
Anti-lock Braking System ABS
Avoid sudden braking as much as pos‐
sible. Braking force boost may not be
working. Stop cautiously. Take into ac‐
count the longer brake distance. Have
checked immediately by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control
Flashing: DSC controls the drive and
braking forces. The vehicle is stabi‐
lized. Reduce speed and adapt driving
style to the driving circumstances.
Illuminated: DSC failed. Have system checked
immediately by a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
For additional information, refer to Dynamic
Stability Control DSC, refer to page 163.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is
deactivated or DTC Dynamic Traction
Control is activated
Dynamic Stability Control DSC is
switched off or Dynamic Traction Con‐
trol DTC is switched on.
For additional information, refer to Dynamic
Stability Control DSC, refer to page 163, and
Dynamic Traction Control DTC, refer to
page 164.
Flat Tire Monitor FTM
The Flat Tire Monitor signals a loss of
tire inflation pressure in a tire.
Reduce your speed and stop cau‐
tiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma‐
neuvers.
For more information, see Flat Tire Monitor, re‐
fer to page 268.
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
Illuminated: the Tire Pressure Monitor
signals a loss of tire inflation pressure
in a tire.
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid
sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
Flashing and then continuously illuminated: no
flat tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can be
detected.
Seite 115
Displays Controls
115
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
▷ Interference through systems or devices
with the same radio frequency: After leav‐
ing the area of the interference, the system
automatically becomes active again.
▷ TPM could not conclude the reset: perform
the reset of the system again.
▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is
mounted: Have it checked by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop as needed.
▷ Malfunction: Have system checked imme‐
diately by a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair
shop.
For more information, see Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor, refer to page 264.
Steering system
Steering system in some cases not
working.
Have steering system checked imme‐
diately by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Engine functions
Engine function disturbed. Have vehi‐
cle checked immediately by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
For additional information, refer to On-board
Diagnostics socket, refer to page 280.
Green lights
Turn signal
Turn signal switched on.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator
lamp indicates that a turn signal bulb
has failed.
For additional information, refer to Turn signal,
refer to page 103.
Parking lights, headlight control
Parking lights or headlights are acti‐
vated.
For additional information, refer to
Parking lights/low beams, headlight control, re‐
fer to page 129.
Lane departure warning
The system is activated. At least one
lane marking was detected and warn‐
ings can be issued.
For additional information, refer to Lane depar‐
ture warning, refer to page 150.
Front fog lights
Front fog lights are activated.
For additional information, refer to
Front fog lights, refer to page 132.
High-beam Assistant
High-beam Assistant is switched on.
High beams are activated and off auto‐
matically as a function of the traffic sit‐
uation.
For additional information, refer to High-beam
Assistant, refer to page 132.
Automatic Hold
Function is activated. The vehicle is au‐
tomatically held in place when it is sta‐
tionary.
For more information, see Automatic Hold, re‐
fer to page 101.
Blue lights
High beams
High beams are activated.
Seite 116
Controls Displays
116
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
For additional information, refer to High
beams, refer to page 103.
General lamps
Check Control
At least one Check Control message is
displayed or is stored.
Text messages
Text messages in combination with a symbol
in the instrument cluster explain a Check Con‐
trol message and the meaning of the indicator
and warning lights.
Supplementary text messages
Additional information, such as on the cause of
an error or the required action, can be called up
via Check Control.
With urgent messages the added text will be
automatically displayed on the Control Display.
Functions
Depending on the Check Control message, the
following functions can be selected.
▷ "Owner's Manual"
Display additional information about the
Check Control message in the Integrated
Owner's Manual.
▷ "Service request"
Contact a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair
shop.
▷ "BMW Roadside Assistance"
Contact Roadside Assistance.
Hiding Check Control messages
Press and hold PC button on blinker lever.
▷ Some Check Control messages are dis‐
played continuously and are not cleared
until the malfunction is eliminated. If sev‐
eral malfunctions occur at once, the mes‐
sages are displayed consecutively.
These messages can be faded for approx.
8 seconds. After this time, they are dis‐
played again automatically.
▷ Other Check Control messages are faded
automatically after approx. 20 seconds.
They are stored and can be displayed
again later.
Displaying stored Check Control
messages
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control"
4. Select the text message.
Messages after trip completion
Special messages displayed while driving are
displayed again after the drive readiness is
switched off.
Seite 117
Displays Controls
117
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Fuel gauge
Instrument cluster
Vehicle tilt position may cause
the display to vary.
An arrow beside the fuel pump
symbol shows which side of the
vehicle the fuel filler flap is on.
Hints on refueling, refer to page 250.
Instrument cluster with enhanced
features
Vehicle tilt position may cause
the display to vary.
The current range is also dis‐
played as numerical value.
An arrow beside the fuel pump
symbol shows which side of the vehicle the
fuel filler flap is on.
Hints on refueling, refer to page 250.
Tachometer
Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning
field. In this range, the fuel supply is inter‐
rupted to protect the engine.
Operating readiness and
drive readiness
The letters OFF on the tachom‐
eter indicate that the drive readi‐
ness is switched off and operat‐
ing readiness is switched on.
The letters READY in the tach‐
ometer indicate that the vehicle
is ready for driving.
Further information, see Idle state, operating
and drive readiness, refer to page 19.
Engine temperature
▷ Cold engine: the pointer is at
the low temperature end.
Drive at moderate engine
and vehicle speeds.
▷ Normal operating tempera‐
ture: the pointer is in the
middle or in the lower half of
the temperature display.
▷ Hot engine: the pointer is at the high end of
the temperature range. A Check Control
message is also displayed.
Check the coolant level, refer to page 277.
External temperature
If the indicator drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃ or lower, a
signal sounds.
A Check Control message is displayed.
There is an increased risk of ice on roads.
WARNING
Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃
there can be a danger of icy roads, e.g. on
bridges or shady sections of road. There is risk
of an accident. Adjust your driving style to the
weather conditions at low temperatures.◀
Time
The time is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Setting the time and time format, refer to
page 38.
Seite 118
Controls Displays
118
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Service requirements
The concept
After switching on the drive-ready state, the in‐
strument cluster briefly displays available driv‐
ing distance or time to the next scheduled
maintenance.
A service advisor can read out the current
service requirements from your remote con‐
trol.
Some information regarding the service re‐
quirements can also be shown on the remote
control with display.
Display
Detailed information on service
requirements
More information on the scope of service re‐
quired can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
Required maintenance procedures and le‐
gally mandated inspections are displayed.
4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa‐
tion.
Symbols
Sym‐
bols
Description
No service is currently required.
The deadline for scheduled mainte‐
nance or a legally mandated inspec‐
tion is approaching.
The service deadline has already
passed.
Entering appointment dates
Enter the dates for the required inspections.
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are
set correctly.
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
4. "Vehicle inspection"
5. "Date:"
6. Select desired setting.
7. Confirm.
The entered date is stored.
Automatic Service Request
Data regarding the service status or legally
mandated vehicle inspections are automati‐
cally transmitted to your dealer’s service cen‐
ter before a service due date.
You can check when your dealer’s service cen‐
ter was notified.
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service Request"
Seite 119
Displays Controls
119
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Gear shift indicator
The concept
The system recommends the most fuel effi‐
cient gear for the current driving situation.
General information
Depending on the vehicle's features and coun‐
try version of the vehicle, the gear shift indica‐
tor is active in the manual mode of the Step‐
tronic transmission.
Suggestions to shift gear up or down are dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
On vehicles without a gear shift indicator, the
engaged gear is displayed.
Displays
Example Description
Fuel efficient gear is set.
Shift into fuel efficient gear.
Speed limit detection
The concept
Speed limit detection
Speed limit detection shows the current maxi‐
mum permitted speed in the instrument clus‐
ter. The camera in the area of the interior rear‐
view mirror detects traffic signs at the edge of
the road as well as variable overhead sign
posts. Traffic signs with extra symbols for wet
road conditions, etc. are also detected and
compared with the vehicle's onboard data,
such as for the rain sensor, and will be dis‐
played depending on the situation. The system
takes into account the information stored in
the navigation system and also displays speed
limits present on routes without signs.
Information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess visi‐
bility and traffic situation. There is risk of an ac‐
cident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively
interfere in the respective situations.◀
Overview
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior rear‐
view mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior rearview mirror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. "INDIVIDUAL"
6. "Traffic sign detection Speed Limit Info"
If speed limit detection is switched on, it is
shown in the instrument cluster.
Seite 120
Controls Displays
120
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Display
The following is displayed in the instrument
cluster:
Speed limit detection
Current speed limit.
Speed limit detection is not
available.
Speed limit detection can also be displayed in
the Head-up Display.
System limits
The system may not be fully functional and
may provide incorrect information in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ When signs are concealed by objects.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
▷ When driving toward bright lights.
▷ When the windshield behind the interior
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐
ered by a sticker, etc.
▷ In the event of incorrect detection by the
camera.
▷ If the speed limits stored in the navigation
system are incorrect.
▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐
tem.
▷ When roads differ from the navigation,
such as due to changes in road routing.
▷ When passing buses or trucks with a
speed sticker.
▷ If the traffic signs are non-conforming.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
Selection lists in the
instrument cluster
The concept
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the
following can be displayed or operated using
the buttons and the thumbwheel on the steer‐
ing wheel as well as the displays in the instru‐
ment cluster and the Head-up Display:
▷ Current audio source.
▷ Redial phone feature.
▷ Turn on voice activation system.
Display
Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
the list in the instrument cluster can differ from
the illustration shown.
Seite 121
Displays Controls
121
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Activating a list and adjusting the
setting
On the right side of the steering wheel, turn
the thumbwheel to activate the corresponding
list.
Using the thumbwheel, select the desired set‐
ting and confirm it by pushing the thumbwheel.
On-board computer in the
instrument cluster
Display
The information from the on-board computer
is shown in the instrument cluster.
Calling up information
Press and hold PC button on blinker lever.
The respective information is displayed in the
instrument cluster.
Information at a glance
Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn
signal lever calls up the following information in
the instrument cluster:
▷ Miles and trip miles.
▷ Bar display for energy recovery and current
fuel consumption.
▷ Bar display for range.
▷ Average fuel consumption and average
speed.
▷ Time of arrival and distance to destination.
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
▷ In ECO PRO mode: bonus range.
▷ Digital speed.
Adjusting displays for on-board
computer
For several displays of the on-board computer,
it is possible to set whether they can be called
up in the instrument cluster.
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. "Onboard info"
6. Select desired setting.
Seite 122
Controls Displays
122
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Information in detail
Odometer and trip odometer
Display
▷ Odometer, arrow 1.
▷ Trip odometer, arrow 2.
Display/reset miles
Press the knob.
▷ With drive readiness
switched off, time, external
temperature and odometer
are displayed.
▷ When drive readiness is switched on, the
trip odometer is reset.
Energy recovery and current fuel
consumption
The concept
Energy recovery and current fuel consumption
can be displayed as bar displays in the on‐
board computer.
Display
▷ Energy recovery, arrow 1.
▷ Current fuel consumption, arrow 2.
▷ Average consumption, arrow 3.
Energy recovery
The kinetic energy of the vehicle is converted
into electric energy during coasting (overrun)
mode. The vehicle battery is partially charged
and fuel consumption can be reduced.
Current fuel consumption
The current fuel consumption displays the cur‐
rent consumption of fuel. Check whether you
are currently driving in an efficient and environ‐
mentally-friendly manner.
Range
The concept
Current range and total range can be displayed
as bar displays in the onboard computer.
Display
▷ Current range, arrow 1.
Seite 123
Displays Controls
123
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
▷ Total range, arrow 2.
With a low remaining range, a Check Control
message is briefly displayed. With a dynamic
driving style, e.g. taking curves aggressively,
the engine function is not always ensured.
The Check Control message appears continu‐
ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.
CAUTION
With a range of less than 30 miles/50 km
it is possible that the engine will no longer have
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are no longer
ensured. There is risk of property damage. Re‐
fuel promptly.◀
Average speed and average fuel
consumption
General information
Average speed and average fuel consumption
are calculated for the distance traveled since
the last reset in the onboard computer.
Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the
engine manually stopped are not included in
the calculation of the average speed.
Display
▷ Average speed, arrow 1.
▷ Average consumption, arrow 2.
Resetting average values
Press and hold PC button on blinker lever.
Time of arrival and distance to
destination
The concept
The estimated time of arrival and the distance
remaining to the destination are displayed if a
destination is entered in the navigation system
before the trip is started. A correctly adjusted
clock is a prerequisite for a correct time of ar‐
rival.
Display
▷ Time of arrival, arrow 1.
▷ Distance to destination, arrow 2.
ECO PRO bonus range
In the ECO PRO mode, the ECO PRO bonus
range, refer to page 243, can be displayed in
the instrument cluster.
Seite 124
Controls Displays
124
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Onboard computer on the
Control Display
General information
Two types of onboard computers are available
on the Control Display:
▷ "Onboard info": the values can be reset as
often as necessary.
▷ "Trip computer": the values provide an
overview of the current trip.
Calling up the onboard computer or
trip computer
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
Resetting the trip on-board computer
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Trip computer"
4.
▷ "Reset": all values are reset.
▷ "Automatic reset": all values are
reset approx. 4 hours after the vehicle
came to a standstill.
Resetting the fuel consumption or
speed
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Onboard info"
4. "Consumption" or "Speed"
5. "OK"
Sport displays
The concept
On the Control Display, the current values for
performance and torque can be displayed if
the vehicle is appropriately equipped.
Displaying sport displays on the
Control Display
About iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "Sport displays"
Speed warning
The concept
Displays a speed, when reached, should cause
a warning to be issued.
The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed
drops below the set speed once by at least
3 mph/5 km/h.
Displaying, setting or changing the
speed warning
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Speed warning"
4. "Warning at:"
5. Turn the controller until the desired speed
is displayed.
6. Press the controller.
Speed warning is stored.
Seite 125
Displays Controls
125
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Activating/deactivating the speed
warning
About iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Speed warning"
4. "Speed warning"
5. Press the controller.
Setting your current speed as the
speed warning
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Speed warning"
4. "Select current speed"
5. Press the controller.
The current vehicle speed is stored as the
speed warning.
Vehicle status
The concept
The status can be displayed and actions per‐
formed for several systems.
Opening the vehicle status
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
Information at a glance
▷ "Flat Tire Monitor": Status of the Flat
Tire Monitor, refer to page 269.
▷ "Tire Pressure Monitor": Status of the
Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 265.
▷ Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to
page 265.
▷ "Engine oil level"Electronic engine
oil level check, refer to page 273.
▷ "Check Control": Display of stored
Check Control messages, refer to
page 117.
▷ "Service required"Display of service
requirements, refer to page 119.
▷ "Service Request": Service request.
Head-up Display
Overview
The concept
This system projects important information
into the driver's field of vision, e. g., the speed.
The driver can get information without averting
his or her eyes from the road.
Information
Follow the instructions for cleaning the Head-
up Display, refer to page 294.
Display visibility
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up
Display is influenced by the following factors:
▷ Certain sitting positions.
▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis‐
play.
▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.
▷ Wet roads.
▷ Unfavorable light conditions.
Seite 126
Controls Displays
126
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
If the image is distorted, have the basic set‐
tings checked by a dealer’s service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop.
Switching on/off
About iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Head-Up Display"
Display
Overview
The following information is displayed on the
Head-up Display:
▷ Speed.
▷ Navigation system.
▷ Check Control messages.
▷ Selection list in the instrument cluster.
▷ Driver assistance systems.
Some of this information is only displayed
briefly as needed.
Selecting displays in the Head-up
Display
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. Select desired setting.
The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐
rently used.
View
Three different views are available for the
Head-up Display:
About iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. Select desired setting.
▷ "STANDARD": all displays in the Head-
up Display are active.
▷ "REDUCED": the displays in the Head-
up Display are reduced to the absolute
necessary.
▷ "INDIVIDUAL": all displays in the Head-
up Display are active. Individual dis‐
plays, e.g. Check Control messages,
can be individually configured.
The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the brightness
The brightness is automatically adjusted to the
ambient brightness.
The basic setting can be adjusted manually.
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Brightness"
6. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐
ness is set.
7. Press the controller.
When the low beams are activated, the bright‐
ness of the Head-up Display can be addition‐
ally influenced using the instrument lighting.
The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐
rently used.
Seite 127
Displays Controls
127
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Adjusting the height
About iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Height"
6. Turn the controller until the desired height
is reached.
7. Press the controller.
The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the rotation
The screen of the Head-up Display can be ro‐
tated around its own axis.
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Rotation"
6. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is selected.
7. Press the controller.
The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐
rently used.
Special windshield
The windshield is part of the system.
The shape of the windshield makes it possible
to display a precise image.
A film in the windshield prevents double im‐
ages from being displayed.
For this reason, it is strongly suggested to
have the special windshield replaced by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Seite 128
Controls Displays
128
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Lights
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Overview
Switches in the vehicle
The light switch elements is located next to the
steering wheel.
Light functions
Symbol Function
Front fog lights
Lights off
Daytime running lights
Parking lights
Symbol Function
Automatic headlight control
Adaptive Light Control
Low beams
Instrument lighting
Right roadside parking lamp
Left roadside parking lamp
Parking lights, cornering
lights and roadside parking
lights
General information
Position of switch: , ,
If the driver's door is opened when the drive-
ready state is switched off, the exterior lighting
is automatically switched off at these switch
settings.
Parking lights
Position of switch:
The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.
Do not use the parking lights for extended pe‐
riods; otherwise, they might drain the battery
and disable drive readiness.
When parking, switch on the one-sided road‐
side parking lamp, refer to page 130.
Low beams
Position of switch:
Seite 129
Lights Controls
129
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
The low beams light up when the drive-ready
state is switched on.
Roadside parking lights
When the vehicle is parked, a one-sided road‐
side parking lamp can be switched on.
Press button Function
Right roadside parking lamp
on/off
Left roadside parking lamp
on/off
Welcome lights and
headlight courtesy delay
feature
Welcome lights
General information
Depending on the equipment, the exterior
lighting of the vehicle can be set individually.
Activating/deactivating
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting"
5. Select desired setting:
▷ "Welcome lights"
Parking lights and tail lamps are
switched on for a limited time.
▷ "Door handle lighting"
Door handles and the ground in front of
the doors are illuminated for a limited
time.
▷ "Light carpet"
The area next to the vehicle is illumi‐
nated for a limited time.
Headlight courtesy delay feature
General information
The low beams stay lit for a particular time if
the high beams are switched on after opera‐
tional readiness is switched on.
Setting the duration
About iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting"
5. "Pathway lighting"
6. Select desired setting.
Automatic headlight control
The concept
The low beams are switched on and off auto‐
matically depending on the ambient bright‐
ness, e.g. in tunnels, in twilight or if there is
precipitation.
General information
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
cause the lights to be switched on.
When emerging from a tunnel during the day,
the low beams are not switched off immedi‐
ately but instead only after approx. 2 minutes.
Activating
Position of switch:
The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster
lights up when the low beams are switched on.
System limits
The automatic headlamp control cannot serve
as a substitute for your personal judgment of
lighting conditions.
Seite 130
Controls Lights
130
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
E. g. the sensors are unable to detect fog or
hazy weather. To avoid safety risks under
these conditions, you should always switch on
the lights manually.
Daytime running lights
General information
Position of switch: , ,
The daytime running lights light up when the
drive-ready state is switched on. After the
drive-ready state is switched off, the parking
lights light up in position .
Activating/deactivating
In some countries, daytime running lights are
mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti‐
vate the daytime running lights.
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting"
5. Select desired setting.
The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐
rently used.
Adaptive Light Control
The concept
Adaptive Light Control is a variable headlight
control system that enables dynamic illumina‐
tion of the road surface.
General information
Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐
rameters, the light from the headlight follows
the course of the road.
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adap‐
tive Light Control does not swivel to the driv‐
er's side when the vehicle is at a standstill.
Depending on the equipment version, Adap‐
tive Light Control consists of one or several
systems:
▷ Cornering light, refer to page 131.
▷ Adaptive headlight range control, refer to
page 131.
Activating
Switch setting
with switched-on drive-
ready state.
Corner-illuminating lights
In tight curves, e.g., on mountainous roads or
when turning, an additional, corner-illuminating
lamp is switched on that lights up the inside of
the curve when the vehicle is moving below a
certain speed.
The turning lights are automatically switched
on depending on the steering angle or the use
of turn signals.
When driving in reverse, the turning lights may
be automatically switched on regardless of the
steering angle.
Self-leveling headlights
The self-leveling headlights compensate for
acceleration and braking operations in order
not to blind the oncoming traffic and to achieve
optimum illumination of the roadway.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
Adaptive Light Control is malfunctioning or has
failed. Have the system checked as soon as
possible.
Seite 131
Lights Controls
131
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
High-beam Assistant
The concept
The high-beam Assistant detects other traffic
participants early on and automatically
switches the high beams on or off depending
on the traffic situation. The assistant ensures
that the high beams are activated whenever
the traffic situation allows. In the low speed
range, the high beams are not switched on by
the system.
General information
The system responds to light from oncoming
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to
adequate illumination, e.g., in towns and cities.
The driver can intervene at any time and switch
the high beams on and off as usual.
Depending on the version of the system in the
vehicle, the high beams may not switch off for
oncoming vehicles, but may only be dimmed in
the areas that blind oncoming traffic. In this
case, the blue indicator light will stay on.
Activating
1.
Turn the light switch to position .
2. Press and hold PC button on blinker lever.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up.
When the low beams are on, the lights are au‐
tomatically brightened or dimmed.
The blue indicator lamp in the instru‐
ment cluster lights up when the system
switches on the high beams.
Deactivating
The High-beam Assistant can be switched off
when manually switching the high beams on
and off, refer to page 103. To reactivate the
High-beam Assistant, press the button on the
turn signal lever.
System limits
The High-beam Assistant cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver's personal judgment of
when to use the high beams. Therefore, man‐
ually switch off the high beams in situations
where required to avoid a safety risk.
The system is not fully functional in the follow‐
ing situations, and driver intervention may be
necessary:
▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions,
such as fog or heavy precipitation.
▷ When detecting poorly-lit road users such
as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders
and wagons; when driving close to train or
ship traffic; or at animal crossings.
▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depres‐
sions, in cross traffic or half-obscured on‐
coming traffic on highways.
▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities or in the pres‐
ence of highly reflective signs.
▷ When the windshield behind the interior
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered with
stickers, etc.
Fog lights
Front fog lights
General information
The low beams must be switched on before
switching on the front fog lamps.
Seite 132
Controls Lights
132
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Switching on/off
Press button. The green indicator
lamp lights up.
If the automatic headlight control, refer to
page 130, is activated, the low beams will
come on automatically when you switch on the
front fog lights.
When the high beams or headlight flasher are
activated, the front fog lights are not switched
on.
Instrument lighting
The parking lights or low beams
must be switched on to adjust
the brightness.
Adjust the brightness with the
thumbwheel.
Interior lights
General information
Depending on the equipment version, interior
lights, footwell lights, entry lamps, door handle
lighting, and speaker lighting are automatically
controlled.
Overview
Buttons in the vehicle
Interior lights
Reading lights
Switching the interior lights on and off
Press button.
To switch off permanently: press the button
and hold for approx. 3 seconds.
The interior lights in the rear of the vehicle can
be switched on and off independently. The
button is located in the rear roofliner.
Switching the reading lamps on and
off manually
Press button.
The reading lamps are located at the front and
rear next to the interior lights.
Ambient light
General information
Depending on the equipment version, lighting
can be adjusted for some lights in the car's in‐
terior.
Switching on/off
The ambient light is switched on when the ve‐
hicle is unlocked, and switched off when the
vehicle is locked.
If the ambient light was deactivated via iDrive,
it will not be switched on when the vehicle is
unlocked.
Selecting color scheme
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Interior lighting"
5. "Color"
6. Select desired setting.
Seite 133
Lights Controls
133
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Setting the brightness
About iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Interior lighting"
5. "Brightness"
6. Select desired setting.
Dimmed when driving
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Interior lighting"
5. "Dimmed while driving"
The interior lighting is dimmed for some lights
while driving.
Panoramic glass sunroof, lighting
If the panoramic glass sunroof is opened or the
sliding visor closed, lighting of the panoramic
glass sunroof is switched off.
When closing the sliding visors, only the light‐
ing for the area in question is switched off.
BMW Touch Command
The ambient light can also be operated using
BMW Touch Command.
Bowers & Wilkins High End Surround
Sound System
General information
Some speakers in the vehicle are illuminated.
Brightness can be individually set.
Switching on/off
The speaker lighting is switched on when the
vehicle is unlocked, and switched off when the
vehicle is locked.
If the speakers are muted, speaker lighting will
be switched off.
Setting the brightness
About iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Bowers & Wilkins"
5. "Brightness"
6. Select desired setting.
BMW Touch Command
The operation of the Bowers & Wilkins high-
end surround sound system is also possible
with BMW Touch Command.
Ambient light accent
General information
The ambient light accent illuminates the door
pillar in the rear.
Switching on/off
The ambient light accent is switched on when
the vehicle is unlocked, and switched off when
the vehicle is locked.
When opening a rear door, the ambient light
accent of the respective door pillar is switched
off.
Setting the brightness
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Accent lighting in rear"
5. "Brightness"
The last brightness set is displayed.
6. Select desired setting.
Seite 134
Controls Lights
134
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Touch sensor
The ambient light accent is fitted with a touch
sensor. The ambient highlight is switched on
or off with a brief touch of the chrome bar. The
brightness is changed with a long touch.
BMW Touch Command
The ambient highlight can also be operated
using BMW Touch Command.
Seite 135
Lights Controls
135
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Safety
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver
2 Front airbag, front passenger
3 Head airbag
4 Side airbag
5 Knee airbag
Front airbags
Front airbags help protect the driver and front
passenger by responding to frontal impacts in
which safety belts alone would not provide ad‐
equate restraint.
Side airbag
In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the
side of the body in the chest and lap area.
Head airbag
In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports
the head.
Seite 136
Controls Safety
136
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Ejection Mitigation
The head airbag system is designed as an
ejection mitigation countermeasure to reduce
the likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants
through side windows during rollovers or side
impact events.
Knee airbag
The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal
impact.
Protective action
Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐
tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end
collisions.
Information for optimum effect of the
airbags
WARNING
If the seat position is incorrect or the de‐
ployment area of the airbags is impacted, the
airbag system cannot protect as intended or
cause additional injuries due to triggering.
There is risk of injuries or danger to life. Ob‐
serve the Information for optimum protective
effect of the airbag system.◀
▷ Keep at a distance from the airbags.
▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the
steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the
3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep
the risk of injury to your hands or arms as
low as possible when the airbag is trig‐
gered.
▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sit‐
ting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and
legs in the floor area.
▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads
away from the side airbag.
▷ There should be no persons, animals or
objects between an airbag and a person.
▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
the front passenger side as a storage area.
▷ Dashboard and windshield on the front
passenger side must stay clear - do not at‐
tach adhesive labels or coverings and do
not attach brackets or cables, e. g., for GPS
devices or' mobile phones.
▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐
bag cover panels, do not cover them or
modify them in any way.
▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or
other objects on the front passenger seat
that are not specifically suited for seats
with integrated side airbags.
▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as
jackets, over the backrests.
▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐
nents or the wiring in the airbag system.
This also applies to steering wheel covers,
the dashboard, and the seats.
▷ Do not remove the airbag system.
Even when you follow all instructions very
closely, injury from contact with the airbags
cannot be ruled out in certain situations.
The ignition and inflation noise may lead to
short-term and, in most cases, temporary
hearing impairment in sensitive individuals.
Warnings and information on the airbags are
also found on the sun visors.
Functional readiness of the airbag
system
Information
WARNING
Individual components can be hot after
triggering of the airbag system. There is risk of
injuries. Do not touch individual components.◀
WARNING
Improperly executed work can lead to
failure, malfunction or unintentional triggering
of the airbag system. In the case of a malfunc‐
tion, the airbag system could not trigger as in‐
tended in the event of an accident despite re‐
Seite 137
Safety Controls
137
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
spective accident severity. There is risk of
injuries or danger to life. Have the airbag sys‐
tem checked, repaired, dismantled and scrap‐
ped by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.◀
Correct function
When drive readiness is switched on,
the warning lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up briefly and thereby in‐
dicates the function readiness of the entire air‐
bag system and the belt tensioners.
Airbag system malfunctioning
▷ Warning lamp does not come on when
drive readiness is switched on.
▷ The warning lamp lights up continuously.
Automatic deactivation of the front-
seat passenger airbags
The concept
The system reads if the front passenger seat is
occupied by measuring the human body's re‐
sistance.
Front, knee and side airbag on the front pas‐
senger's side are either activated or deacti‐
vated.
Information
Before transporting a child on the front pas‐
senger seat, refer to the safety notes and in‐
structions for children on the front passenger
seat, see Children.
WARNING
The ensure the front-seat passenger air‐
bag function, it must be detected, whether a
person occupies the front passenger seat. The
entire seat cushion area must be used for this
purpose. There is risk of injuries or danger to
life. Make sure that the front passenger keeps
his or her feet in the floor area.◀
Malfunction of the automatic
deactivation system
When transporting older children and adults,
the front-seat passenger airbags may be deac‐
tivated in certain sitting positions. In this case,
the indicator lamp for the front-seat passenger
airbags lights up.
In this case, change the sitting position so that
the front-seat passenger airbags are activated
and the indicator lamp goes out.
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have
the person sit in the rear.
To enable correct recognition of the occupied
seat cushion
▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats
or other items to the front passenger seat
unless they are specifically determined to
be safe for use on the front passenger
seat.
▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the
passenger seat if a child restraint system is
to be installed on it.
▷ Do not place objects under the seat that
could press against the seat from below.
▷ No moisture in or on the seat.
Indicator lamp for the front-seat
passenger airbags
The indicator lamp for the front-seat passen‐
ger airbag in the roofliner indicates the operat‐
ing state of the front-seat passenger airbag.
The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ei‐
ther activated or deactivated.
After drive readiness is switched on, the lamp
briefly lights up and then indicates whether the
airbags are either activated or deactivated.
▷ The indicator lamp lights up
when a child is properly
seated in a child restraint fix‐
ing system or when the seat
is empty. The airbags on the
front passenger side are not
activated.
Seite 138
Controls Safety
138
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
▷ The indicator lamp does not light up when,
e.g., a correctly seated person of sufficient
size is detected on the seat. The airbags
on the front passenger side are activated.
Detected child seats
The system generally detects children seated
in a child seat, particularly in child seats re‐
quired by NHTSA when the vehicle was manu‐
factured. After installing a child seat, make
sure that the indicator lamp for the front-seat
passenger airbags lights up. This indicates
that the child seat has been detected and the
front-seat passenger airbags are not activated.
Strength of the driver's and front-seat
passenger airbag
The explosive power that activates driver's/
front passenger's airbags very much depends
on the positions of the driver's/front passeng‐
er's seat.
With a respective message appearing on Con‐
trol Display calibrate the front seats to keep
the accuracy of this function over the long-
term.
Calibrating the front seats
WARNING
There is risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is risk of injuries or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
justment.◀
A corresponding message appears on the
Control Display.
1.
Press the switch and move the respective
seat all the way forward.
2. Press the switch forward again. The seat
still moves forward slightly.
3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.
The calibration procedure is completed when
the message on the Control Display disap‐
pears.
If the message continues to be displayed, re‐
peat the calibration.
If the message does not disappear after a re‐
peat calibration, have the system checked as
soon as possible.
Intelligent Safety
The concept
Intelligent Safety enables central operation of
the driver assistance system. Depending on
how the vehicle is equipped, Intelligent Safety
consists of one or more systems that can help
prevent a imminent collision.
▷ Front-end collision warning with braking
function, refer to page 140.
▷ Pedestrian warning with City Braking func‐
tion, refer to page 144.
▷ Night Vision with pedestrian and animal
detection, refer to page 147.
▷ Lane departure warning, refer to
page 150.
▷ Active Blind Spot Detection, refer to
page 153.
▷ Side collision warning, refer to page 156.
Information
WARNING
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
from the personal responsibility. Due to sys‐
tem limits, warnings or reactions of the system
may not be output or they may be output too
late or incorrectly. There is risk of an accident.
Adjust the driving style to the traffic condi‐
tions. Watch traffic closely and actively inter‐
fere in the respective situations.◀
Seite 139
Safety Controls
139
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated,
e.g. approach control warning with light brak‐
ing function. There is risk of an accident.
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to
tow-starting/towing.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety
Switching on/off
Some Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐
cally active after every departure. Some Intelli‐
gent Safety systems activate according to the
last setting.
Press
button
Status
Button lights up green: all Intelli‐
gent Safety systems are
switched on.
Button lights up orange: some In‐
telligent Safety systems are
switched off or settings for the
sub-functions were changed.
Button does not light up: all Intel‐
ligent Safety systems are
switched off.
Press button:
The menu for the intelligent safety
system is displayed.
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched
off, all systems are now switched on.
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tems can be individually configured. The indi‐
vidual settings are activated and stored for the
profile currently used. As soon as a setting is
changed on the menu, all settings of the menu
are activated, the button lights up orange.
Press button repeatedly. It is switched
between the following settings:
"ALL ON" All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on. For the sub-functions, e.g. set‐
ting for warning time, basic settings are acti‐
vated.
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems
are switched on according to the individual
settings.
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be in‐
dividually switched off.
Press and hold this button:
All Intelligent Safety systems are
turned off.
Collision warning with
braking function
The concept
The system can help prevent accidents. If an
accident cannot be prevented, the system will
help reduce the collision speed.
The system sounds a warning before an immi‐
nent collision and actuates brakes independ‐
ently if needed.
The system is controlled using a camera.
If the vehicle is equipped with Active Cruise
Control with Stop & Go function, ACC, the
Seite 140
Controls Safety
140
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
front-end collision warning is additionally con‐
trolled via the cruise control radar sensor.
Active Protection: if a collision seems to be un‐
avoidable, PreCrash functions are triggered.
The front-end collision warning is available
even if cruise control has been deactivated.
With the vehicle approaching another vehicle
intentionally, the collision warning and braking
are delayed in order to avoid false system re‐
actions.
General information
The system issues a two-phase warning of a
possible danger of collision with vehicles at
speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. Time of
warnings may vary with the current driving sit‐
uation.
Detection range
It responds to objects if they are detected by
the system.
Information
WARNING
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
from the personal responsibility. Due to sys‐
tem limits, warnings or reactions of the system
may not be output or they may be output too
late or incorrectly. There is risk of an accident.
Adjust the driving style to the traffic condi‐
tions. Watch traffic closely and actively inter‐
fere in the respective situations.◀
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated,
e.g. approach control warning with light brak‐
ing function. There is risk of an accident.
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to
tow-starting/towing.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior rear‐
view mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior rearview mirror clean and clear.
Seite 141
Safety Controls
141
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
With Active Cruise Control: radar
sensor
The radar sensor is located in the lower area of
the front bumper.
Always keep radar sensor clean and unob‐
structed.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active after every
driving-off.
Switching on/off manually
Press button:
The menu for the intelligent safety
system is displayed.
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched
off, all systems are now switched on.
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tems can be individually configured. The indi‐
vidual settings are activated and stored for the
profile currently used. As soon as a setting is
changed on the menu, all settings of the menu
are activated, the button lights up orange.
Press button repeatedly. It is switched
between the following settings:
"ALL ON" All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on. Basic settings are activated for
the subfunctions.
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems
are switched on according to the individual
settings.
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be in‐
dividually switched off.
Press and hold this button:
All Intelligent Safety systems are
turned off.
Press
button
Status
Button lights up green: all Intelli‐
gent Safety systems are
switched on.
Button lights up orange: some In‐
telligent Safety systems are
switched off or settings for the
sub-functions were changed.
Button does not light up: all Intel‐
ligent Safety systems are
switched off.
Setting the warning time
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Intelligent Safety"
4. "Frontal Collision Warning"
5. Select desired setting.
The selected time is stored for the profile cur‐
rently used.
Warning with braking function
Display
If a collision with a recognized vehicle is immi‐
nent a warning symbol appears in the instru‐
ment cluster and in the Head-Up Display.
Seite 142
Controls Safety
142
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Symbol Measure
Symbol lights up red: prewarning.
Brake and increase distance.
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic
signal sounds: acute warning.
You are requested to intervene by
braking or make an evasive maneu‐
ver.
Prewarning
This warning is issued, e.g., when there is the
impending danger of a collision or the distance
to the vehicle ahead is too small.
The driver must intervene actively when there
is a prewarning.
Acute warning with braking function
Acute warning in displayed in case of the immi‐
nent danger of a collision when the vehicle ap‐
proaches another object at a relatively high dif‐
ferential speed.
The driver must intervene actively when there
is an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is
assisted by an automatic braking intervention
in a possible risk of collision.
Acute warnings can also be triggered without
previous forewarning.
Brake intervention, City braking
function
The warning prompts the driver himself/herself
to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐
ing force is used when the brake is actuated.
Premise is sufficiently quick and hard stepping
on the brake pedal.
The system can additionally assist possibly
with automatic braking intervention if there is
risk of a collision.
At low speeds the vehicle can be decelerated
to a complete stop.
The braking intervention takes place up to ap‐
prox. 50 mph/80 km/h.
The braking intervention is executed only if
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on.
The braking intervention can be interrupted by
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐
tively moving the steering wheel.
Object detection can be restricted. Limitations
of the detection range and functional restric‐
tions are to be considered.
With radar sensor and Active Cruise
Control: braking intervention
The warning prompts the driver himself/herself
to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐
ing force is used when the brake is actuated.
Premise is sufficiently quick and hard stepping
on the brake pedal.
The system can assist with automatic braking
intervention if there is risk of a collision.
The intervention can bring the vehicle to a
complete stop.
The braking intervention is executed only if
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on.
Above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h the braking
intervention occurs as a brief braking pressure.
No automatic delay occurs.
The braking intervention can be interrupted by
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐
tively moving the steering wheel.
Object detection can be restricted. Limitations
of the detection range and functional restric‐
tions are to be considered.
System limits
Detection range
The system's detection potential is limited.
Thus a system reaction might not come or
might come late.
E. g. the following situations may not be de‐
tected:
Seite 143
Safety Controls
143
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach
them at high speed.
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of
you, or sharply decelerating vehicles.
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐
fall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are
limited or deactivated, e.g., DSC OFF.
▷ If the area of the front windshield in front of
the interior mirror is dirty or covered.
▷ Depending on equipment, if the radar sen‐
sor is dirty or obscured.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
gine, via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐
cause of oncoming light, e. g., from the sun
low in the sky.
Warning sensitivity
The more sensitive the warning settings are,
e.g. the warning time, the more warnings are
displayed. However, there may also be an ex‐
cess of premature warnings.
Pedestrian warning with City
braking function
The concept
The system can help prevent accidents with
pedestrians.
The system issues a warning in the city driving
speed area if there is imminent danger of a col‐
lision with pedestrians and includes a braking
function.
The camera in the area of the rearview mirror
controls the system.
Active Protection: if a collision seems to be un‐
avoidable, PreCrash functions are triggered.
General information
The system warns of possible collisions with
pedestrians at speeds from ap‐
prox. 6 mph/10 km/h to ap‐
prox. 35 mph/60 km/h and supports you with a
braking intervention shortly before a collision.
Under those circumstances it reacts to people
who are within the detection range of the sys‐
tem.
Detection range
The detection area in front of the vehicle is div‐
ided into two areas
▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the
vehicle.
▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and
left.
A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo‐
cated within the central area. A warning is is‐
sued about pedestrians who are located within
the extended area only if they are moving in
the direction of the central area.
Seite 144
Controls Safety
144
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Information
WARNING
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
from the personal responsibility. Due to sys‐
tem limits, warnings or reactions of the system
may not be output or they may be output too
late or incorrectly. There is risk of an accident.
Adjust the driving style to the traffic condi‐
tions. Watch traffic closely and actively inter‐
fere in the respective situations.◀
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated,
e.g. approach control warning with light brak‐
ing function. There is risk of an accident.
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to
tow-starting/towing.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior rear‐
view mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior rearview mirror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active after every
driving-off.
Switching on/off manually
Press button:
The menu for the intelligent safety
system is displayed.
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched
off, all systems are now switched on.
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tems can be individually configured. The indi‐
vidual settings are activated and stored for the
profile currently used. As soon as a setting is
changed on the menu, all settings of the menu
are activated, the button lights up orange.
Press button repeatedly. It is switched
between the following settings:
"ALL ON" All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on. Basic settings are activated for
the subfunctions.
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems
are switched on according to the individual
settings.
Seite 145
Safety Controls
145
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be in‐
dividually switched off.
Press and hold this button:
All Intelligent Safety systems are
turned off.
Press
button
Status
Button lights up green: all Intelli‐
gent Safety systems are
switched on.
Button lights up orange: some In‐
telligent Safety systems are
switched off or settings for the
sub-functions were changed.
Button does not light up: all Intel‐
ligent Safety systems are
switched off.
Warning with braking function
Display
If a collision with a person detected in this way
is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the
instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display.
The red symbol is displayed and a sig‐
nal sounds.
Intervene immediately by braking or make an
evasive maneuver.
Braking intervention
The warning prompts the driver himself/herself
to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐
ing force is used when the brake is actuated.
Premise for the brake booster is sufficiently
quick and hard stepping on the brake pedal.
The system can additionally assist with braking
intervention if there is risk of a collision.
At low speeds the vehicle can be decelerated
to a complete stop.
The braking intervention is executed only if
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on.
The braking intervention can be interrupted by
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐
tively moving the steering wheel.
Object detection can be restricted. Limitations
of the detection range and functional restric‐
tions are to be considered.
System limits
Detection range
The detection potential of the camera is lim‐
ited.
Thus a warning might not be issued or be is‐
sued late.
E. g. the following situations may not be de‐
tected:
▷ Partially covered pedestrians.
▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such
because of the viewing angle or contour.
▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range.
▷ Pedestrians having a body size less than
32 in/80 cm.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional or may
not be available in the following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐
fall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are
deactivated, e.g. DSC OFF.
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the front
windshield are dirty or covered.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
gine, via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
Seite 146
Controls Safety
146
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐
cause of oncoming light, e. g., from the sun
low in the sky.
▷ When it is dark outside.
Night Vision with pedestrian
and animal detection
The concept
Night Vision with pedestrian and animal detec‐
tion is a night vision system.
An infrared camera scans the area in front of
the vehicle and issues a warning if it detects
pedestrians and animals on the street. Warm
objects that are similar in shape to human be‐
ings or animals are detected by the system. If
necessary, the heat image can be displayed on
the Control Display.
Heat image
The image shows the heat radiated by objects
in the field of view of the camera.
Warm objects have a light appearance and
cold objects a dark appearance.
The ability to detect an object depends on the
temperature difference between the object
and the background and on the level of heat
radiation emitted by the object. Objects that
are similar in temperature to the environment
or that radiate very little heat are difficult to de‐
tect.
For safety reasons, when driving at speeds
above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h and in low ambi‐
ent light, the image is only displayed when the
low beams are activated.
A still image is displayed at regular intervals for
a fraction of a second.
Pedestrian and animal detection
Object detection and warning only functions in
darkness.
Objects whose form is similar to people with
sufficient heat radiation are detected.
In addition, the system also detects animals
above a certain minimum size, e.g., deer.
Display on the Control Display with heat image
activated:
▷ People detected by the system: in light
yellow.
▷ Animals detected by the system: in dark
yellow.
Range of object detection, with good ambient
conditions:
▷ Pedestrian detection: up to approx.
330 ft/100 m
▷ Detection of large animals: up to approx.
490 ft/150 m
▷ Detection of medium animals: up to ap‐
prox. 230 ft/70 m
Environmental influences can limit the availa‐
bility of object detection.
If the vehicle systems detect that the vehicle is
located in a residential area, the animal detec‐
tion is temporarily switched off.
Seite 147
Safety Controls
147
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess visi‐
bility and traffic situation. There is risk of an ac‐
cident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively
interfere in the respective situations.◀
Overview
Buttons in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety
Switch on/switch off heat image
Camera
The camera is automatically heated when the
external temperatures are low.
The camera lens is automatically cleaned to‐
gether with the headlights.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
When it is dark outside, the system is automat‐
ically active after every driving-off.
Switching on heat image additionally
The heat image from the Night Vision camera
can also be displayed on the Control Display.
This function has no effect on object detec‐
tion.
Press button.
The image from the camera is displayed on the
Control Display.
Set heat image via iDrive
With heat image switched on:
1.
Select brightness or contrast.
▷ "Brightness".
▷ "Contrast".
2. Set the desired value.
Seite 148
Controls Safety
148
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Display
Warning of people or animals in
danger
If a collision with a person or an animal de‐
tected in this way is imminent, a warning sym‐
bol appears on the instrument cluster and in
the Head-up Display.
Although both the shape and the heat radiation
are analyzed, false warnings cannot be ruled
out.
Warning area in front of the vehicle
The warning area for the pedestrian warning
consists of two parts:
▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the
vehicle.
▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and
left.
With animal warnings, no distinction is made
between the central or expanded area.
The entire area moves along with the vehicle in
the direction of the steering angle and changes
with the vehicle speed. As the vehicle speed
increases, the area becomes longer and wider,
e.g.
Symbols
Symbol Meaning
Pedestrian warning
Animal warning
Symbol lights
up red.
Advance warning: intervene
actively by braking or mak‐
ing an evasive maneuver
Symbol flashes
red and a signal
sounds.
Acute warning: intervene
immediately by braking or
making an evasive maneu‐
ver.
The displayed symbol shows the side of the
road on which the person or animal was de‐
tected.
Prewarning
Prewarning for persons is displayed when a
person is detected in the central area immedi‐
ately in front of the vehicle as well as on the left
or right side in the extended area.
Prewarning for animals is displayed when an
animal is detected in the front of the vehicle.
The driver must intervene actively when there
is a prewarning.
Acute warning
Acute warning is displayed if a person or an
animal is detected in direct proximity if front of
the vehicle.
The driver must immediately intervene actively
when there is an acute warning.
Active Protection: if a collision seems to be un‐
avoidable, PreCrash functions are triggered.
Seite 149
Safety Controls
149
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Display in the Head-up Display
The warning is displayed simultaneously in the
Head-up Display and on the instrument clus‐
ter.
System limits
Basic limits
System operation is limited in situations such
as the following:
▷ On steep hills, in steep depressions or in
tight curves.
▷ When the camera is dirty or the protective
glass is damaged.
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ At very high external temperatures.
Limits of pedestrian and animal
detection
In some situations, it may occur that pedes‐
trians are detected as animals or animals as
pedestrians.
Small animals are not detected by the object
detection function, even if they are clearly visi‐
ble in the image.
Limited detection, e.g. in the following circum‐
stances:
▷ People or animals who are fully or partially
covered, especially when their heads are
covered.
▷ People who are not in an upright position,
e.g., lying down.
▷ Cyclists on unconventional bicycles (e.g.,
recumbent bicycles).
▷ After physical damage to the system, e.g.,
after an accident.
No display on the rear screen
The image from Night Vision cannot be dis‐
played on the rear screen.
Lane departure warning
The concept
This system alerts at speeds be‐
tween 45 mph/70 km/h and 130 mph/210 km/h
when the vehicle on roads with lane markings
is about to leave the lane.
The steering wheel begins vibrating gently in
the event of warnings. The time of the warning
may vary depending on the current driving sit‐
uation.
The system does not provide a warning if the
turn signal is set before leaving the lane.
Vehicles with side collision warning: if the vi‐
brating steering wheel is ignored and the lane
marking crossed, the system intervenes with a
brief active steering intervention and helps to
maintain the vehicle in the lane.
Information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess
route and traffic situation. There is risk of an
accident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively
interfere in the respective situations. In the
event of a warning, do not unnecessarily jerk
the steering wheel.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Seite 150
Controls Safety
150
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Intelligent Safety
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior rear‐
view mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior rearview mirror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The lane departure warning is automatically
activated after departure, if the function was
switched on the last time the engine was stop‐
ped.
Switching on/off manually
Press button:
The menu for the intelligent safety
system is displayed.
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched
off, all systems are now switched on.
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tems can be individually configured. The indi‐
vidual settings are activated and stored for the
profile currently used. As soon as a setting is
changed on the menu, all settings of the menu
are activated, the button lights up orange.
Press button repeatedly. It is switched
between the following settings:
"ALL ON" All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on. Basic settings are activated for
the subfunctions.
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems
are switched on according to the individual
settings.
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be in‐
dividually switched off.
Press and hold this button:
All Intelligent Safety systems are
turned off.
Press
button
Status
Button lights up green: all Intelli‐
gent Safety systems are
switched on.
Button lights up orange: some In‐
telligent Safety systems are
switched off or settings for the
sub-functions were changed.
Button does not light up: all Intel‐
ligent Safety systems are
switched off.
Setting warning sensitivities
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Intelligent Safety"
4. "Lane Departure Warning"
5. Select desired setting.
▷ "Always": the system always alerts
within the technical limitations.
▷ "Reduced": some warning are sup‐
pressed depending on the situation,
e.g. during passing without turn signal
or when purposefully driving over lane
markings in curves.
▷ "Off": no warnings are issued.
Seite 151
Safety Controls
151
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
The selected setting is stored for the drive pro‐
file currently used.
Set force of the steering wheel
vibration
About iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Steering wheel vibration"
4. Select desired setting.
The setting is applied to all Intelligent Safety
systems and stored for the profile currently
used.
Vehicles with side collision warning:
switching steering intervention on/off
The steering intervention can be switched on
and off separately for Active Blind Spot Detec‐
tion and lane departure warning.
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Intelligent Safety"
4. "Steering intervention"
The selected setting is stored for the drive pro‐
file currently used.
Display in the instrument cluster
Green symbol: at least one lane mark‐
ing was detected and warnings can be
issued.
Issued warning
If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has
been detected, the steering wheel begins vi‐
brating.
If the turn signal is set before changing the
lane, a warning is not issued.
Vehicles with side collision warning: if the vi‐
brating steering wheel is ignored and the lane
marking crossed, the system intervenes with a
brief active steering intervention and helps to
maintain the vehicle in the lane. The steering
intervention can be noticed on the steering
wheel and can be manually overridden at any
time.
End of warning
The warning is canceled in the following situa‐
tions:
▷ Automatically after approx. 3 seconds.
▷ When returning to your own lane.
▷ When braking hard.
▷ When using the turn signal.
▷ When DSC is actively controlling stability.
System limits
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visi‐
ble, merging, diverging, or multiple lane
markings such as in construction areas.
▷ When lane markings are covered in snow,
ice, dirt or water.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
▷ When the lane markings are covered by
objects.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐
cause of oncoming light, e. g., from the sun
low in the sky.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐
ered with stickers, etc.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
A Check Control message is displayed when
the system is not fully functional.
Seite 152
Controls Safety
152
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Warning sensitivity
The more sensitive the warning settings are,
the more warnings are displayed. However,
there may also be an excess of undesired
warnings.
Active Blind Spot Detection
The concept
Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor
the area behind and next to the vehicle starting
from a preset minimum speed.
The minimum speed is country-specific and is
displayed in the menu for the Intelligent Safety
systems.
The system indicates whether there are vehi‐
cles in the blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching
from behind on the adjacent lane, arrow 2.
The lamp in the exterior mirror is dimmed.
Before you change lanes after setting the turn
signal, the system issues a warning in the sit‐
uations described above.
The lamp in the exterior mirror flashes and the
steering wheel vibrates.
Vehicles with side collision warning: at speeds
between 45 mph/70 km/h and
130 mph/210 km/h, the system can intervene
with a brief active steering intervention and
help to return the vehicle into the lane.
Information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess visi‐
bility and traffic situation. There is risk of an ac‐
cident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively
interfere in the respective situations.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety
Radar sensors
The radar sensors are located in the rear
bumper.
Always keep the bumper in the area of the ra‐
dar sensors clean and unobstructed.
Seite 153
Safety Controls
153
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The Active Blind Spot Detection is automati‐
cally activated after departure, if the function
was switched on the last time the engine was
stopped.
Switching on/off manually
Press button:
The menu for the intelligent safety
system is displayed.
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched
off, all systems are now switched on.
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tems can be individually configured. The indi‐
vidual settings are activated and stored for the
profile currently used. As soon as a setting is
changed on the menu, all settings of the menu
are activated, the button lights up orange.
Press button repeatedly. It is switched
between the following settings:
"ALL ON" All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on. Basic settings are activated for
the subfunctions.
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems
are switched on according to the individual
settings.
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be in‐
dividually switched off.
Press and hold this button:
All Intelligent Safety systems are
turned off.
Press
button
Status
Button lights up green: all Intelli‐
gent Safety systems are
switched on.
Button lights up orange: some In‐
telligent Safety systems are
switched off or settings for the
sub-functions were changed.
Button does not light up: all Intel‐
ligent Safety systems are
switched off.
Setting the warning time
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Intelligent Safety"
4. "Blind Spot Detection"
5. Select desired setting.
"Off": With this setting, no warning is out‐
put.
The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐
rently used.
Set force of the steering wheel
vibration
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Steering wheel vibration"
4. Select desired setting.
The setting is applied to all Intelligent Safety
systems and stored for the profile currently
used.
Seite 154
Controls Safety
154
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Vehicles with side collision warning:
switching steering intervention on/off
The steering intervention can be switched on
and off separately for Active Blind Spot Detec‐
tion and lane departure warning.
About iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Intelligent Safety"
4. "Steering intervention"
The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐
rently used.
Issued warning
Lamp in the exterior mirror
Information stage
The dimmed lamp in the exterior mirror indi‐
cates when there are vehicles in the blind spot
or approaching from behind.
WARNING
If the turn signal is set while a vehicle is in the
critical zone, the steering wheel vibrates briefly
and the lamp in the exterior mirror flashes
brightly.
Vehicles with side collision warning: it at
speeds between 45 mph/70 km/h and
130 mph/210 km/h the vibrating steering
wheel is ignored and the lane marking crossed,
the system intervenes with a brief active steer‐
ing intervention and helps to return the vehicle
into the lane. The steering intervention can be
noticed on the steering wheel and can be man‐
ually overridden at any time.
The warning stops when the turn signal is
switched off, or the other vehicle leaves the
critical zone.
Brief flashing of the lamp
A brief flashing of the lamp during vehicle un‐
locking serves as system self-test.
System limits
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
much faster than your own.
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
▷ If the bumper is dirty or iced up, or covered
with stickers.
For vehicles with side collision warning, the
steering intervention can be limited e.g. in the
following situation:
▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visi‐
ble, merging, diverging, or multiple lane
markings such as in construction areas.
▷ When lane markings are covered in snow,
ice, dirt or water.
▷ When the lane markings are not white.
▷ When the lane markings are covered by
objects.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐
cause of oncoming light, e. g., from the sun
low in the sky.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐
ered with stickers, etc.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
Seite 155
Safety Controls
155
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
A Check Control message is displayed when
the system is not fully functional.
Displaying warnings
Depending on the selected warning settings,
e.g. warning time, more warnings can be dis‐
played. However, there may also be an excess
of premature warnings of critical vehicles.
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐
erned by the following:
FCC ID:
▷ NBG009014A.
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐
ference, and
▷ this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to
operate this equipment.
Side collision warning
The concept
The system helps to avoid imminent side colli‐
sions.
Four radar sensors in the bumpers monitor the
area next to the vehicle in the speed range
from approx. 45 mph/70 km/h to ap‐
prox. 130 mph/210 km/h.
The front camera determines the lane marking
positions.
If e.g. another vehicle is detected next to the
vehicle and if there is a danger of collision with
this vehicle, the system helps the driver to
avoid the collision via steering intervention.
Information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess visi‐
bility and traffic situation. There is risk of an ac‐
cident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively
interfere in the respective situations.◀
Functional requirements
A prerequisite for activating the side collision
warning with steering intervention is that the
camera detects the lane markings.
Seite 156
Controls Safety
156
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety
Radar sensors
The radar sensors are located in the bumpers.
Front side bumper.
Rear bumper.
Always keep the bumper in the area of the ra‐
dar sensors clean and unobstructed.
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior rear‐
view mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior rearview mirror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The side collision warning is automatically acti‐
vated after departure, if the function was
switched on the last time the engine was stop‐
ped.
Switching on/off manually
Press button:
The menu for the intelligent safety
system is displayed.
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched
off, all systems are now switched on.
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tems can be individually configured. The indi‐
vidual settings are activated and stored for the
profile currently used. As soon as a setting is
changed on the menu, all settings of the menu
are activated, the button lights up orange.
Press button repeatedly. It is switched
between the following settings:
"ALL ON" All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on. Basic settings are activated for
the subfunctions.
Seite 157
Safety Controls
157
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems
are switched on according to the individual
settings.
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be in‐
dividually switched off.
Press and hold this button:
All Intelligent Safety systems are
turned off.
Press
button
Status
Button lights up green: all Intelli‐
gent Safety systems are
switched on.
Button lights up orange: some In‐
telligent Safety systems are
switched off or settings for the
sub-functions were changed.
Button does not light up: all Intel‐
ligent Safety systems are
switched off.
Issued warning
Lamp in the exterior mirror
WARNING
The lamp in the exterior mirror flashes and the
steering wheel vibrates. An active steering in‐
tervention takes place to prevent collisions and
maintain the vehicle within its own lane. The
steering intervention can be noticed on the
steering wheel and can be manually overridden
at any time.
System limits
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
much faster than your own.
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
▷ If the bumpers are dirty or iced up, or cov‐
ered with stickers.
▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visi‐
ble, merging, diverging, or multiple lane
markings such as in construction areas.
▷ When lane markings are covered in snow,
ice, dirt or water.
▷ When the lane markings are covered by
objects.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐
cause of oncoming light, e. g., from the sun
low in the sky.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐
ered with stickers, etc.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
A Check Control message is displayed when
the system is not fully functional.
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐
erned by the following:
FCC ID:
▷ NBG009014A.
Compliance statement:
Seite 158
Controls Safety
158
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐
ference, and
▷ this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to
operate this equipment.
Rear collision prevention
The concept
Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor
the area behind the vehicle.
If a vehicle approaches from the rear at a cer‐
tain speed, the system responds as follows:
▷ Active Protection: if a collision seems to be
unavoidable, PreCrash functions are trig‐
gered.
The system is automatically active after every
driving-off.
The system is deactivated in the following sit‐
uations:
▷ If reverse gear is engaged
▷ If the trailer power socket is in use, e.g.
during operation with trailer or bicycle rack
Information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess visi‐
bility and traffic situation. There is risk of an ac‐
cident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively
interfere in the respective situations.◀
Overview
Radar sensors
The radar sensors are located in the rear
bumper.
Always keep the bumper in the area of the ra‐
dar sensors clean and unobstructed.
System limits
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
much faster than your own.
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
▷ If the bumper is dirty or iced up, or covered
with stickers.
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐
erned by the following:
FCC ID:
Seite 159
Safety Controls
159
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
▷ NBG009014A.
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐
ference, and
▷ this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to
operate this equipment.
Brake force display
The concept
▷ During normal brake application, the outer
brake lights light up.
▷ During heavy brake application, the inner
brake lights light up in addition.
Active Protection
The concept
Active Protection prepares occupants and the
vehicle for a possible accident in critical driving
or collision situations.
General information
Active Protection consists of various PreCrash
functions, which can vary depending on the
equipment.
The system is used to detect certain critical
driving situations that might lead to an acci‐
dent. Critical driving situations are:
▷ Emergency stop.
▷ Severe understeering.
▷ Severe oversteering.
Certain functions of several systems can -
within the system limits - lead to Active Pro‐
tection triggering:
▷ Collision warning with braking function: de‐
tection of imminent front collisions or auto‐
matic braking intervention.
▷ Collision warning with braking function or
Night Vision with Dynamic Marker Light:
brake booster.
▷ Rear collision prevention: detection of im‐
minent rear collisions.
Information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from the
personal responsibility. Due to the system lim‐
its, critical situation could not be detected reli‐
ably or in time. There is risk of an accident. Ad‐
just the driving style to the traffic conditions.
Watch traffic closely and actively interfere in
the respective situations.◀
Function
When the belt is closed, the driver's and pas‐
senger's belt straps are automatically tight‐
ened once after driving away.
In accident-critical situations, the following in‐
dividual functions become active as needed:
▷ The front belts are automatically preten‐
sioned.
▷ Automatic window closing up to a narrow
gap.
Seite 160
Controls Safety
160
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
▷ Automatic closing of the glass sunroof, in‐
cluding sliding visor.
▷ For vehicles equipped with Comfort seats
in the front: automatic positioning of the
backrest for the front passenger seat.
▷ For vehicles equipped with Comfort seats
in the rear: automatic positioning of the
backrests for the rear passenger seats.
After a critical driving situation without an acci‐
dent, the front belts are loosened again. All
other systems can be restored to the desired
setting.
If the belt tension does not loosen automati‐
cally, stop the vehicle and unbuckle the belt
using the red button in the buckle. Fasten the
belt before continuing on your trip.
Post Crash — iBrake
The concept
In certain accident situations, e.g. collision, the
system can bring the vehicle to a halt automat‐
ically without driver intervention. This can re‐
duce the risk of a further collision and the con‐
sequences thereof.
At standstill
After coming to a halt, the brake is released
automatically.
Harder vehicle braking
It can be necessary to bring the vehicle in cer‐
tain situations to a halt quicker.
Here, a higher braking pressure must be gen‐
erated for a short period when pressing the
brake pedal than during automatic braking.
This interrupts automatic braking.
Interrupting automatic braking
It can be necessary to interrupt automatic
braking in certain situations,e.g. for an evasive
maneuver.
Interrupt automatic braking:
▷ By pressing the brake pedal.
▷ By pressing the accelerator pedal.
Attentiveness assistant
The concept
The system can detect increasing lack of alert‐
ness or fatigue of the driver during long, mo‐
notonous journeys, e.g., on highways. In this
situation, it is recommended that the driver
takes a break.
Information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess
one's physical state. An increasing lack of
alertness or fatigue may not be detected or not
be detected in time. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Make sure that the driver is rested and
alert. Adjust the driving style to the traffic con‐
ditions.◀
Function
The system is switched on each time drive
readiness is switched on.
After travel has begun, the system is trained
about the driver, so that increasing lack of
alertness or fatigue can be detected.
This procedure takes the following criteria into
account:
▷ Personal driving style, e.g., steering behav‐
ior.
▷ Driving conditions, e.g., length of trip.
Starting at approximately 43 mph/70 km/h, the
system is active and can display a recommen‐
dation to take a break.
Seite 161
Safety Controls
161
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Break recommendation
Switching on/off, adjusting
The Attentiveness Assistant is active automat‐
ically with each switching on of drive readiness
and can thus display a break recommendation.
The break recommendation can also be
switched on or off via iDrive and adjusted:
About iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Driver attention control"
4. Select desired setting.
▷ "Off": no break recommendation is
made.
▷ "Standard": the break recommendation
is made with a defined value.
▷ "Sensitive": the break recommendation
is issued earlier.
Display
If the driver becomes increasingly less alert or
fatigued, a message is displayed in the Control
Display with the recommendation to take a
break.
During the display, the following settings can
be selected:
▷ "Do not ask again"
▷ "Places to stop"
▷ "Remind me later"
The break recommendation is repeated af‐
ter 20 minutes.
After a break, another recommendation to take
a break cannot be displayed until after approxi‐
mately 45 minutes.
System limits
The function may be limited in the following
situations, for instance, and will either output
an incorrect warning or no warning at all:
▷ When the clock is set incorrectly.
▷ When the vehicle speed is mainly below
about 43 mph/70 km/h.
▷ With a sporty driving style, such as during
rapid acceleration or when cornering fast.
▷ In active driving situations, such as when
changing lanes frequently.
▷ When the road surface is poor.
▷ In the event of strong side winds.
Seite 162
Controls Safety
162
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Driving stability control systems
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Anti-lock Braking System
ABS
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during
braking.
The vehicle contains its steering power even
during full brake applications, thus increasing
active safety.
ABS is operational every time you start the en‐
gine.
Brake assistant
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system
automatically produces the greatest possible
braking force boost. It reduces the braking dis‐
tance to a minimum during emergency stop.
This system utilizes all of the benefits provided
by ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal
for the duration of the emergency stop.
Adaptive brake assistant
In combination with the Active Cruise Control,
this system ensures that the brakes respond
even more rapidly when braking in critical sit‐
uations.
Drive-off assistant
This system supports driving off on inclines.
The parking brake is not required.
1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot
brake.
2. Release the foot brake and drive off with‐
out delay.
After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is
held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
The possible holding duration amounts to
2 minutes.
Depending on the vehicle load or when a trailer
is used, the vehicle may roll back slightly.
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control
The concept
DSC prevents traction loss in the power
wheels when driving off and accelerating.
DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle condi‐
tions such as fishtailing or nose-diving. Within
the physical limits DSC helps to keep the vehi‐
cle on a steady course by reducing engine
speed and by applying brakes to the individual
wheels.
Information
Adapt your driving style to the situation, for an
appropriate driving style is always the respon‐
sibility of the driver.
The laws of physics cannot be repealed, not
even with DSC.
Therefore, do not reduce the additional safety
margin by driving in a risky manner.
Seite 163
Driving stability control systems Controls
163
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
WARNING
When driving with roof load, e.g. with
roof-mounted luggage rack, driving safety may
not be ensured in driving-critical situations due
to the elevated center of gravity. There is risk
of accidents or risk of property damage. Do not
deactivate Dynamic Stability Control DSC
when driving with roof load.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
DSC OFF
Indicator/warning lights
The indicator lamp flashes: DSC con‐
trols the drive and braking forces.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has
failed.
Deactivating/activating DSC
When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is
reduced during acceleration and when driving
in curves.
Stabilizing interventions by the Integral Active
Steering system are only performed by the
rear axle steering.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC
again as soon as possible.
Deactivating DSC
Hold the button down until the DSC
OFF indicator lamp is displayed in the
instrument cluster and DSC OFF is displayed.
The DSC system is switched off.
The steering and, depending on the equip‐
ment, suspension are tuned for sporty driving.
Activating DSC
Press button.
DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator
lamp go out.
Indicator/warning lights
When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC is
deactivated.
DTC Dynamic Traction
Control
The concept
The DTC system is a version of the DSC where
forward momentum is optimized.
The system ensures maximum headway on
special road conditions or loose road surfaces,
e.g., unplowed snowy roads, but with some‐
what limited driving stability.
Activating the Dynamic Traction Control DTC
provides maximum traction. Driving stability is
limited during acceleration and when driving in
curves.
Therefore drive with appropriate caution.
You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC
under the following special circumstances:
▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared,
snow-covered roads.
Seite 164
Controls Driving stability control systems
164
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
▷ When freeing vehicle from deep snow or
driving off from loose grounds.
▷ When driving with snow chains.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
DSC OFF
Indicator/warning lights
If DTC is activated, TRACTION is displayed in
the instrument cluster.
The indicator lamp lights up: DTC Dy‐
namic Traction Control is activated.
Activating/deactivating DTC
Activating DTC
Press button.
TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC
OFF lights up.
Deactivating DTC
Press button again.
TRACTION and the DSC OFF indica‐
tor lamp go out.
xDrive
xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of the ve‐
hicle. Concerted action by the xDrive and DSC
further optimize traction and driving dynamics.
The xDrive all-wheel-drive system variably dis‐
tributes the drive forces to the front and rear
axles as demanded by the driving situation and
road surface.
HDC Hill Descent Control
The concept
HDC is a downhill driving assistant that auto‐
matically controls vehicle speed on steep
downhill gradients. Without applying the
brakes, the vehicle moves at slightly more than
walking speed.
Hill Descent Control can be activated at
speeds below approx. 22 mph/35 km/h. When
driving downhill, the vehicle reduces its speed
to approx. walking speed and then keeps its
speed constant.
As long as there is active braking, the system
is on standby. The system does not brake the
vehicle during this time.
Only use HDC in low gears or in selector lever
position D or R.
Increasing or decreasing vehicle
speed
Specify desired speed in the range from ap‐
prox. 4 mph/6 km/h to approx. 15 mph/25 km/h
using the rocker switch of the cruise control on
the steering wheel. Vehicle speed can be
changed by lightly accelerating.
Seite 165
Driving stability control systems Controls
165
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
▷ Press the rocker switch up to the point of
resistance: the speed increases gradually.
▷ Press up the rocker switch past the point
of resistance: the speed increases while
the rocker switch is pressed.
▷ Press the rocker switch down to the point
of resistance: the speed decreases gradu‐
ally.
▷ Press the rocker switch down past the
point of resistance: when driving forward,
the speed decreases to approx.
6 mph/10 km/h; when reversing, the speed
decreases to approx. 4 mph/6 km/h.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
HDC
Activating HDC
Press button. The LED above the button
lights up.
Deactivating HDC
Press button again and the LED goes
out. HDC is automatically deactivated
above approx. 37 mph/60 km/h.
Display in the instrument cluster
Status display
A symbol and the selected de‐
sired speed are displayed.
The desired speed is hidden af‐
ter a brief time.
With a change of the desired
speed via the rocker switch on the steering
wheel, it is displayed briefly.
Desired speed
Display in the speedometer:
▷ Green marking: system is
active.
▷ Marking is orange/white: the
system has been paused.
▷ No marking: system is
switched off.
Malfunction
A message is displayed in the instrument clus‐
ter. HDC is not available, e.g., due to elevated
brake temperatures.
Integral Active Steering
The concept
Integral Active Steering is a combination of Ac‐
tive Steering and rear axle steering.
The system varies the steering angle of the
wheels in relation to the steering wheel move‐
ment.
Seite 166
Controls Driving stability control systems
166
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
With strong steering movements and low
speeds, e.g. when parking, the wheel angle is
magnified, that is, the steering is more direct.
The rear axle steering acts to increase maneu‐
verability by turning the rear wheels slightly in
a direction opposite to the front wheels.
At higher speeds, the rear wheels are turned in
the same direction as the front wheels.
In critical driving situations, the Integral Active
Steering can stabilize the vehicle through pur‐
poseful steering of the rear wheels before the
driver intervenes, e.g. in case of oversteering.
General information
The system offers several different tunings.
These are assigned to the different driving
modes of the Driving Dynamics Control, refer
to page 110.
Tuning
Drive mode Integral Active Steering
COMFORT/E
CO PRO
comfortable, for optimal
travel comfort
SPORT dynamic, for greater agility
Using snow chains
Information
When snow chains are in use, refer to
page 264, rear wheel steering is deactivated.
Malfunction
In the event of a malfunction, the steering
wheel must be turned further, while the vehicle
responds more sensitively to steering wheel
movements in the higher speed range.
The stability-enhancing intervention may be
deactivated.
Proceed cautiously and drive defensively.
Have the system checked.
Seite 167
Driving stability control systems Controls
167
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Driver assistance systems
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Active Cruise Control with
Stop & Go function, ACC
The concept
Use this system to select a desired speed that
the vehicle will maintain automatically on clear
roads.
To the extent possible, the system automati‐
cally adjusts the speed to a slower vehicle
ahead of you.
The distance that the vehicle maintains to the
vehicle ahead of you can be varied. For safety
reasons, it depends on the speed.
To maintain a certain distance, the system au‐
tomatically reduces the speed, applies the
brakes lightly, or accelerates again if the vehi‐
cle ahead begins moving faster.
If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, and
then proceeds to drive again within a brief pe‐
riod, the system is able to detect this within the
given system limits. Your own vehicle will
brake automatically and then accelerate again.
If the vehicle ahead of you drives away again
after a prolonged period, briefly press the ac‐
celerator pedal or press the appropriate button
to reactivate the system. The vehicle will auto‐
matically accelerate.
As soon as the road is clear, the vehicle accel‐
erates to the desired speed.
Vehicles driving ahead are captured by a radar
sensor and a camera.
General information
Depending on the driving settings, the features
of the cruise control can change in certain
areas.
The desired speed is also maintained downhill,
but may not be maintained on uphill grades if
engine power is insufficient.
Due to the driving style that minimizes fuel
consumption in ECO PRO drive mode, the ve‐
hicle may drop below the set desired speed in
some situations, e.g. on uphill grades.
Information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is risk of an accident. Adjust
the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively interfere in the re‐
spective situations.◀
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can put itself into
motion and roll away. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against
rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, turn the
front wheels in the direction of the curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, also secure
the vehicle, e.g. with a wheel chock.◀
Seite 168
Controls Driver assistance systems
168
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Press
button
Function
Cruise control on/off, refer to
page 169.
Store/maintain speed, refer to
page 170.
Pause cruise control, refer to
page 170.
Continue cruise control with the
last setting, refer to page 171.
Without steering and lane guid‐
ance assistant:
Increase distance, refer to
page 171.
Without steering and lane guid‐
ance assistant:
Reduce distance, refer to
page 171.
With steering and lane guidance
assistant:
Adjust distance, refer to
page 171.
Rocker switch:
Maintain, store, change speed,
refer to page 170.
With steering and lane guidance
assistant:
Steering and lane guidance as‐
sistant including Traffic Jam As‐
sist on/off, refer to page 177.
Radar sensor
The radar sensor is located in the front
bumper.
Always keep radar sensor clean and unob‐
structed.
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior rear‐
view mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior rearview mirror clean and clear.
Switching on/off and interrupting
cruise control
Switching on
Press button on the steering wheel.
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster
light up and the mark in the speedometer is set
to the current speed.
Cruise control is active.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control will be
switched on if needed.
Seite 169
Driver assistance systems Controls
169
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Switch off
To switch off the system while standing, step
on brake pedal at the same time.
Press button on the steering wheel.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed
is deleted.
Interrupting
When active, press the button on the
steering wheel.
If interrupting the system while stationary,
press on the brake pedal at the same time.
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations:
▷ When the brakes are applied.
▷ When selector lever position D is disen‐
gaged.
▷ When DTC Dynamic Traction Control is
activated or DSC is deactivated.
▷ When DSC is actively controlling stability.
▷ If the safety belt and the driver's door are
opened while the vehicle is standing still.
▷ If the system has not detected objects for
an extended period, e.g., on a road with
very little traffic without curb or shoulder
markings.
▷ If the detection range of the radar is dis‐
rupted, e.g., by dirt or heavy fog.
▷ After a longer stationary period when the
vehicle has been braked to a stop by the
system.
Maintaining, storing, and changing the
speed
Information
WARNING
The desired speed can be incorrectly ad‐
justed or called up by mistake. There is risk of
an accident. Adjust the desired speed to the
traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
tively interfere in the respective situations.◀
WARNING
Risk of accident due to too high speed
differences to other vehicles, e.g. in the follow‐
ing situations:
▷ When fast approaching a slowly moving
vehicle.
▷ Suddenly swerving vehicle onto the own
lane.
▷ When fast approaching standing vehicles.
There is risk of injuries or danger to life. Watch
traffic closely and actively interfere in the re‐
spective situations.◀
Maintaining/storing the speed
Press button.
Or:
Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐
terrupted.
When the system is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and stored as the desired
speed.
This is displayed in the speedometer and
briefly in the instrument cluster, refer to
page 172.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control will be
switched on if needed.
Seite 170
Controls Driver assistance systems
170
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Changing the speed
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the
road is clear.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to
the resistance point, the desired speed in‐
creases or decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed
past the point of resistance, the desired
speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐
mum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the
action.
Distance
WARNING
The system does not relieve from the
personal responsibility. Due to the system lim‐
its, braking can be late. There is risk of acci‐
dents or risk of property damage. Be aware to
the traffic situation at all times. Adjust the dis‐
tance to the traffic and weather conditions and
maintain the prescribed safety distance, possi‐
bly by braking.◀
Without steering and lane guidance
assistant: reducing distance
Press button repeatedly until the de‐
sired distance is set.
Instrument cluster will display selected dis‐
tance, refer to page 172.
Without steering and lane guidance
assistant: increasing distance
Press button repeatedly until the de‐
sired distance is set.
Instrument cluster will display selected dis‐
tance, refer to page 172.
With steering and lane guidance
assistant: adjusting distance
Press button repeatedly until the de‐
sired distance is set.
Continuing cruise control
General information
Press button with the system inter‐
rupted.
The stored speed is reached and maintained.
In the following cases, the stored speed value
is deleted and cannot be called up again:
▷ When the system is switched off.
▷ When drive readiness is switched off.
While standing
The system brought the vehicle to a complete
standstill:
▷ Green marking in the speedometer:
Your vehicle accelerates automatically as
soon as the vehicle in the range of the ra‐
dar sensor moves off.
▷ Speedometer markings turn orange/white
after a short time: no automatic driving off.
By pressing the button, the time in
which there is automatic driving off is
extended.
Vehicle symbol in the distance indicator is
moving away: detected vehicle drove off.
The system was paused or your vehicle was
brought to a halt actively through stepping on
the brake pedal and it is standing behind an‐
other vehicle:
1. Press button to call up a stored
desired speed.
2. Release the brake pedal.
3. When the vehicle in front drives off:
▷ briefly press the gas pedal.
Seite 171
Driver assistance systems Controls
171
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
▷
Press button.
▷
Press button
▷ Press the rocker switch.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Desired speed
Display in the speedometer:
▷ Green marking: system is
active.
▷ Marking is orange/white: the
system has been paused.
▷ No marking: system is
switched off.
Status display
The selected desired speed is hidden
after a brief time.
If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the
conditions necessary for operation are not cur‐
rently fulfilled.
Distance to vehicle ahead of you
Shown is selected distance to the vehicle driv‐
ing ahead of you.
Symbol Description
Distance 1
Distance 2
Symbol Description
Distance 3
Distance 4
This value is set automatically
after the system is switched
on.
System interrupted.
Distance control suppressed
briefly because the gas pedal is
pressed.
Vehicle symbol in the distance indicator is
moving away: detected vehicle drove off.
ACC is no longer accelerating. To accelerate
further, activate ACC by briefly stepping on
the accelerator pedal or pressing the rocker
switch.
Seite 172
Controls Driver assistance systems
172
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Indicator/warning lights
Symbol Description
Green symbols:
A vehicle has been detected
ahead of you. The system
maintains the set distance to
the vehicle in front.
Vehicle symbol flashes:
The conditions are not ade‐
quate for the system to work.
The system was deactivated
but applies the brakes until you
actively resume control by
pressing on the brake pedal or
accelerator pedal.
The vehicle symbol and dis‐
tance bars flash red and an
acoustic signal sounds:
You are requested to intervene
by braking or make an evasive
maneuver.
Displays in the Head-up Display
With Active Cruise control, some system infor‐
mation can also be displayed in the Head-up
Display.
The symbol is displayed on the Head-
up Display if the set desired speed is
reached.
Distance information
The symbol is displayed when the dis‐
tance from the vehicle traveling ahead
is too short.
The distance information is active under the
following circumstances:
▷ Active Cruise Control switched off.
▷ Display in the Head-up Display selected,
refer to page 126.
▷ Distance too short.
▷ Speed greater than approx.
40 mph/70 km/h.
System limits
Speed range
The system is best used on well-constructed
roads.
The minimum speed that can be set is
20 mph/30 km/h.
The maximum speed that can be set is
115 mph/180 km/h.
The system can also be activated when sta‐
tionary.
Comply with the legal speed limit in every sit‐
uation when using the system.
Detection range
The detection capacity of the system and the
automatic braking capacity are limited.
Two-wheeled vehicles for instance might not
be detected.
Deceleration
The system also does not decelerate in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ For pedestrians or similar slow-moving
road users.
▷ For red traffic lights.
▷ For cross traffic.
▷ For oncoming traffic.
Seite 173
Driver assistance systems Controls
173
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Swerving vehicles
A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected
until it is completely within the same lane as
your vehicle.
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly
swerves into your lane, the system may not be
able to automatically restore the selected dis‐
tance. This also applies to major speed differ‐
ences to vehicles driving ahead of you, e.g.,
when rapidly approaching a truck. When a ve‐
hicle driving ahead of you is reliably detected,
the system requests that the driver intervene
by braking and carrying out evasive maneu‐
vers, if needed.
WARNING
The system does not relieve from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is risk of an accident. Adjust
the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively interfere in the re‐
spective situations.◀
Cornering
If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the
speed is reduced slightly, although curves can‐
not be anticipated in advance. Therefore, drive
into a curve at an appropriate speed.
In tight curves the system offers only restricted
detection where a vehicle ahead of you might
be detected late or not at all.
When you approach a curve the system may
briefly report vehicles in the next lane due to
the bend of the curve. If the system deceler‐
ates you may compensate it by briefly acceler‐
ating.
After releasing the gas pedal the system is re‐
activated and controls speed independently.
Driving away
In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off
automatically; for example:
▷ On steep inclines.
▷ From behind bumps in the road.
In these cases, step on the accelerator pedal.
Seite 174
Controls Driver assistance systems
174
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Weather
In the event of unfavorable weather and light
conditions, e. g. if there is rain, snowfall, slush,
fog or glare, this may result in poorer recogni‐
tion of vehicles as well as short-term interrup‐
tions for vehicles that are already detected.
Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic
situation. If necessary, intervene actively, e.g.
by braking, steering or evading.
Radar sensor
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐
erned by the following:
FCC ID:
▷ OAYARS3-A
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐
ference, and
▷ this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to
operate this equipment.
Malfunction
The system cannot be activated if the radar
sensor is not aligned correctly. This may be
caused by damage incurred during parking,
e.g.
A Check Control message is displayed if the
system fails.
The function for detecting and responding
when approaching stationary vehicles may be
limited in the following situations:
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
▷ If the camera is malfunctioning or dirty. A
Check Control message is displayed.
Cruise control
The concept
The system maintains a preset speed via the
buttons on the steering wheel. The system
brakes on downhill gradients if engine braking
is insufficient.
General information
Depending on the driving settings, the features
of the cruise control can change in certain
areas.
The desired speed is also maintained downhill,
but may not be maintained on uphill grades if
engine power is insufficient.
Due to the driving style that minimizes fuel
consumption in ECO PRO drive mode, the ve‐
hicle may drop below the set desired speed in
some situations, e.g. on uphill grades.
Information
WARNING
The use of the system can lead to an in‐
creased risk of accidents in the following situa‐
tions:
▷ On winding roads.
▷ In heavy traffic.
▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or
on a loose road surface.
There is risk of accidents or risk of property
damage. Only use the system if driving at con‐
stant speed is possible.◀
Seite 175
Driver assistance systems Controls
175
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Press but‐
ton
Function
Cruise control on/off, refer to
page 176.
Store/maintain speed, refer to
page 176.
Pause cruise control, refer to
page 176.
Continue cruise control, refer to
page 177.
Rocker switch:
Maintain, store, change speed,
refer to page 177.
Controls
Switching on
Press button on the steering wheel.
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster
light up and the mark in the speedometer is set
to the current speed.
Cruise control is active.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control will be
switched on if needed.
Switch off
WARNING
The system does not relieve from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is risk of an accident. Adjust
the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively interfere in the re‐
spective situations.◀
Press button on the steering wheel.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed
is deleted.
Interrupting
When active, press the button.
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations:
▷ When the brakes are applied.
▷ If selector lever position D is disengaged.
▷ If DTC Dynamic Traction Control is acti‐
vated or DSC is deactivated.
▷ When DSC is actively controlling stability.
Maintaining, storing, and changing the
speed
Information
WARNING
The desired speed can be incorrectly ad‐
justed or called up by mistake. There is risk of
an accident. Adjust the desired speed to the
traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
tively interfere in the respective situations.◀
Maintaining/storing the speed
Press button.
Or:
Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐
terrupted.
Seite 176
Controls Driver assistance systems
176
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
When the system is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and stored as the desired
speed.
This is displayed, refer to page 177, in the
speedometer and briefly in the instrument
cluster.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control will be
switched on if needed.
Changing the speed
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the
road is clear.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to
the resistance point, the desired speed in‐
creases or decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed
past the point of resistance, the desired
speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐
mum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
The maximum speed that can be set de‐
pends on the vehicle.
▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resist‐
ance point and holding it accelerates or de‐
celerates the vehicle without requiring
pressure on the accelerator pedal.
After the rocker switch is released, the ve‐
hicle maintains its final speed. Pressing the
switch beyond the resistance point causes
the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.
Continuing cruise control
Press button while the system is inter‐
rupted.
The stored speed is reached and maintained.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Desired speed
Display in the speedometer:
▷ Green marking: system is
active.
▷ Marking is orange/white: the
system has been paused.
▷ No marking: system is
switched off.
Indicator lamp
Indicator lamp green: system is active.
Gray indicator lamp: the system has
been paused.
No indicator lamp: system is switched off.
Status display
The selected desired speed is hidden
after a brief time.
If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the
conditions necessary for operation are not cur‐
rently fulfilled.
Displays in the Head-up Display
Some system information can also be dis‐
played in the Head-up Display.
The symbol is displayed on the Head-
up Display if the set desired speed is
reached.
Steering and lane guidance
assistant including Traffic
Jam Assist
The concept
The system assists the driver in keeping the
vehicle within the lane. For this purpose, the
system steers independently, e.g., when driv‐
ing in a curve.
Depending on the speed, the system orients it‐
self according to the lane markings or vehicles
in front.
Seite 177
Driver assistance systems Controls
177
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
General information
The system determines the position of the
lane markings and the vehicle driving ahead
using five radar sensors and a camera.
Sensors on the steering wheel detect whether
the steering wheel is being touched.
In order to be able to use the system, place
your hands around the steering wheel.
The system is deactivated if the steering wheel
is no longer being touched.
Information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is risk of an accident. Adjust
the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively interfere in the re‐
spective situations.◀
Overview
Button the steering wheel
Press but‐
ton
Function
Switch steering and lane guid‐
ance assistant including Traffic
Jam Assist on/off, refer to
page 179.
Radar sensors
The radar sensors are located in the bumpers.
Front center bumper
Front side bumper
Rear bumper
Always keep the bumper in the area of the ra‐
dar sensors clean and unobstructed.
Seite 178
Controls Driver assistance systems
178
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior rear‐
view mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior rearview mirror clean and clear.
Functional requirements
▷ Speed below 130 mph/210 km/h.
▷ Sufficient lane width.
▷ Above approx. 43 mph, 70 km/h: lane
marking on both sides is detected.
▷ Below approx. 43 mph, 70 km/h: lane
marking on both sides or a vehicle driving
ahead is detected.
▷ At least one hand on the steering wheel
rim.
▷ Wide curves.
▷ Drive in the center of the lane.
▷ Turn signal not actuated.
▷ Camera calibration immediately after vehi‐
cle delivery is completed.
Switching on/off
Switching on
Press button on the steering wheel.
Steering wheel symbol lights up gray.
System activates automatically as soon as all
function conditions are fulfilled, refer to
page 179.
Steering wheel symbol lights up green.
The system is active.
With the system switched on, pedestrian warn‐
ing and side collision warning are active. Set‐
tings on the Control Display remain un‐
changed.
Switch off
Press button on the steering wheel.
The indicator goes out.
The system does not manipulate steering.
Automatic interruption
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations:
▷ At a speed above 130 mph/210 km/h.
▷ When the steering wheel is released.
▷ When you manipulate steering.
▷ When you leave your own lane.
▷ When the turn signal is on.
▷ When the lane is too narrow.
▷ If for a particular time no lane marking is
detected and there is no vehicle driving in
front.
Steering wheel symbol lights up gray.
The system is paused and does not
manipulate steering.
If the system conditions are met, the system
reactivates automatically.
Seite 179
Driver assistance systems Controls
179
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Displays in the instrument cluster
Symbol Description
Steering wheel symbol gray:
the system is on standby.
Steering wheel symbol green:
system activated.
Steering wheel symbol and
lane marking green: the system
assists the driver in keeping
the vehicle within the lane.
Steering wheel symbol green,
lane marking gray: no lane
marking detected. The vehicle
follows the vehicle in front.
Steering wheel symbol yellow:
hold steering wheel. The sys‐
tem is still active.
Steering wheel symbol red and
a signal tone sounds: system
interrupted. It does not manip‐
ulate steering.
Displays in the Head-up Display
All system information can also be displayed in
the Head-up Display.
System limits
When driving with gloves or with protective
covers, contact with the steering wheel cannot
be detected by the sensors. In this case sys‐
tem cannot be used.
When driving within narrow lanes, the system
cannot be activated or meaningfully used.
Do not use the system, e.g.:
▷ In construction zones.
▷ In rescue lanes.
▷ Within city limits.
Weather
In the event of unfavorable weather and light
conditions, e. g. if there is rain, snowfall, slush,
fog or glare, this may result in poorer recogni‐
tion of vehicles as well as short-term interrup‐
tions for vehicles that are already detected.
Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic
situation. If necessary, intervene actively, e.g.
by braking, steering or evading.
PDC Park Distance Control
The concept
PDC is a support when parking. Objects that
you are approaching slowly in front of or be‐
hind the vehicle are indicated with:
▷ Signal tones.
▷ Visual display.
With parking assistant: obstacles on the side of
the vehicle that are detected by the sensors of
the parking assistant, can also be reported by
the PDC. Side protection, refer to page 183.
General information
Ultrasound sensors in the bumpers and possi‐
bly sideways on the vehicle measure the dis‐
tances from objects.
The maneuvering range, depending on the ob‐
stacle and environmental conditions, is approx.
6 ft/2 m.
An acoustic warning is first given with the fol‐
lowing circumstances:
▷ By the front center sensors at ap‐
prox. 74 in/70 cm.
▷ By the rear middle sensors at approx.
5 ft/1.50 m.
▷ By the corner sensors at ap‐
prox. 24 in/60 cm.
Seite 180
Controls Driver assistance systems
180
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
▷ With parking assistant: by the side sensors
at approx. 24 in/60 cm.
▷ When a collision is imminent.
Information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is risk of an accident. Adjust
the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively interfere in the re‐
spective situations.◀
WARNING
Due to high speeds when PDC is acti‐
vated, the warning can be delayed due to
physical circumstances. There is risk of injuries
or risk of property damage. Avoid approaching
an object too fast. Avoid driving off fast while
PDC is not yet active.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
PDC Park Distance Control
Ultrasound sensors
Ultrasound sensors of the PDC,
e.g. in the bumpers.
Functional requirements
To ensure full functionality:
▷ Do not cover sensors, e.g., with stickers,
bicycle racks.
▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.
To clean: when using high-pressure washers,
do not spray the sensors for long periods and
maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
PDC switches on automatically in the following
situations:
▷ If selector lever position R is engaged
when the engine is running.
▷ While approaching detected obstacles if
the speed is slower than approx.
2.5 mph/4 km/h. The activation distance
depends on the situation in question.
You may switch on and off automatic activation
when obstacles are detected.
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Parking"
4. "Automatic PDC activation": only with re‐
spective equipment.
5. "Automatic PDC activation"
The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐
rently used.
Depending on equipment, an appropriate cam‐
era view is also switched on.
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on if needed.
Seite 181
Driver assistance systems Controls
181
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Switching on/off manually
Press button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The rearview camera image is displayed when
the reverse gear is engaged by pressing the
button.
Display
Signal tones
When approaching an object, an intermittent
sound indicates the position of the object. E. g.
if an object is detected to the left rear of the
vehicle, a signal tone sounds from the left rear
speaker.
The shorter the distance to the object, the
shorter the intervals.
If the distance to a detected object is less than
approx. 10 in/25 cm, a continuous tone is
sounded.
If there are objects in front of and behind the
vehicle at the same time, with a distance
smaller than approx. 10 in/25 cm, an alternat‐
ing constant tone will sound.
The interval tone and constant tone are
switched off if the selector lever position P is
engaged.
The interval tone is switched off after a short
time when the vehicle is stationary.
Volume
The ratio of the PDC signal tone volume to the
entertainment volume can be adjusted.
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "System settings"
3. "Tone"
4. "Volume settings"
5. "PDC"
6. Set the desired value.
The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐
rently used.
Visual warning
The approach of the vehicle to an object is
shown on the Control Display. Objects that are
farther away are already displayed on the Con‐
trol Display before a signal sounds.
The display appears as soon as PDC is acti‐
vated.
The range of the sensors is represented in the
colors green, yellow and red.
Pathway lines are faded in for better estimation
of the required space.
When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐
played, the switch can be made to PDC or to a
different view with obstacle markings as
needed:
"Rear view camera"
Cross traffic warning, refer to page 197: de‐
pending on the equipment, it is warned in the
PDC display against vehicles approaching in
the front or rear from the side.
With parking assistant: emergency
braking function, Active PDC
The concept
The emergency braking function of PDC ini‐
tiates an emergency braking in case of acute
risk of collision. Due to system limits, a colli‐
Seite 182
Controls Driver assistance systems
182
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
sion cannot be prevented under all circum‐
stances.
The function is available from walking speed
while backing up or rolling backward.
A press of the gas pedal interrupts the braking
intervention.
After emergency braking to a stop, further
creeping toward an obstacle is possible. To
creep toward the obstacle, lightly press the ac‐
celerator pedal and release it again.
If the accelerator pedal is heavily depressed,
the vehicle drives off as usual. Manual braking
is possible at any time.
General information
The system uses the ultrasound sensors of
PDC and parking assistant.
Information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess the
traffic situation. There is risk of an accident.
Adjust the driving style to the traffic condi‐
tions. Watch traffic and vehicle surroundings
closely and actively interfere in the respective
situations.◀
Activating/deactivating the system
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Parking"
4. "Active PDC emergency brake function"
5. "Active PDC emergency brake function"
The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐
rently used.
With parking assistant: side
protection
The concept
Obstacles on the side of the vehicle are de‐
tected by the sensors of the system. The sys‐
tem warns against these obstacles.
Display
Obstacle markings are displayed sideways on
the vehicle to protect the vehicle sides.
▷ Gray markings: the area next to the vehicle
was not captured.
▷ No markings: no obstacles were detected.
▷ Color markings: warning against detected
obstacles.
Limits of side protection
The system only displays stationary obstacles
that were previously detected by sensors while
passing them.
The system does not detect, whether an ob‐
stacle moves later on. For this reason, at
standstill, the markings are shown in the dis‐
play in gray after a certain time. The area next
to the vehicle must be newly captured.
System limits
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
Ultrasonic measuring might not function under
the following circumstances:
▷ For small children and animals.
Seite 183
Driver assistance systems Controls
183
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
▷ For persons with certain clothing, e.g.
coats.
▷ With external interference of the ultra‐
sound, e.g. from passing vehicles or loud
machines.
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam‐
aged or out of position.
▷ Under certain weather conditions such as
high relative humidity, rain, snowfall, ex‐
treme heat or strong wind.
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other
vehicles.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With moving objects.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
ledges or cargo.
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
such as fences.
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can
move into the blind area of the sensors before
or after a continuous tone sounds.
Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter of
the vehicle is not taken into account by the
system.
False warnings
PDC may issue a warning under the following
conditions even though there is no obstacle
within the detection range:
▷ In heavy rain.
▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered
with ice.
▷ When sensors are covered in snow.
▷ On rough road surfaces.
▷ On uneven surfaces, such as speed
bumps.
▷ In large buildings with right angles and
smooth walls, e.g., in underground ga‐
rages.
▷ In automatic car washes.
▷ Through heavy pollution.
▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, e.g.,
sweeping machines, high pressure steam
cleaners or neon lights.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
White symbol is displayed, and the
range of the sensors is dimmed on the
Control Display.
PDC has failed. Have the system checked.
Without Surround View:
rearview camera
The concept
The rearview camera provides assistance in
parking and maneuvering backwards. The area
behind the vehicle is shown on the Control
Display.
Information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess the
traffic situation. There is risk of an accident.
Adjust the driving style to the traffic condi‐
tions. Watch traffic and vehicle surroundings
closely and actively interfere in the respective
situations.◀
Seite 184
Controls Driver assistance systems
184
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Rearview camera
Camera
The camera lens is located in the handle of the
tailgate.
The image quality may be impaired by dirt.
Clean the camera lens, refer to page 294.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
With the engine running, engage lever in posi‐
tion P R.
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on if needed.
Switching on/off manually
Press button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The PDC is shown on the Control Display.
The rearview camera image is displayed when
the reverse gear is engaged by pressing the
button.
Switching the view via iDrive
With PDC activated:
"Rear view camera"
The rearview camera image is displayed.
Display on the Control Display
Functional requirement
▷ The rearview camera is switched on.
▷ The trunk lid is fully closed.
Assistance functions
Activate/deactivate assistance
functions
More than one assistance function can be ac‐
tive at the same time.
▷ "Parking aid lines"
Pathway lines and turning radius lines are
displayed, refer to page 186.
▷ "Obstacle marking"
Spatially-shaped markings are displayed,
refer to page 186.
Seite 185
Driver assistance systems Controls
185
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Parking aid lines
Pathway lines
Pathway lines help you to estimate the space
required when parking and maneuvering on
level roads.
Pathway lines depend on the current steering
angle and are continuously adjusted to the
steering wheel movements.
Turning circle lines
Turning circle lines can only be superimposed
on the rearview camera image together with
pathway lines.
Turning circle lines show the course of the
smallest possible turning radius on a level
road.
Only one turning radius line is displayed after
the steering wheel is turned past a certain an‐
gle.
Parking using pathway and turning radius
lines
1. Position the vehicle so that the red turning
radius line leads to within the limits of the
parking space.
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
the green pathway line covers the corre‐
sponding turning radius line.
Obstacle marking
Obstacles behind the vehicle are detected by
the PDC sensors.
Obstacle markings can be faded into the image
of the rearview camera.
Their colored margins of the obstacle mark‐
ings match the markings of the PDC.
Setting brightness and contrast via
iDrive
With the rearview camera switched on:
1.
Move the controller to the left.
2.
▷ "Brightness"
▷ "Contrast"
3. Set the desired value.
System limits
Deactivated camera
If the camera is deactivated, e.g. if the tailgate
is open, the camera image is displayed
hatched in gray.
Seite 186
Controls Driver assistance systems
186
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Detection of objects
Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding
objects such as ledges may not be detected by
the system.
Assistance functions also take into account
data of the PDC.
Follow instructions in the PDC chapter, refer to
page 180.
The objects displayed on the Control Display
under certain circumstances are closer than
they appear. Do not estimate the distance from
the objects on the display.
Malfunction
A camera malfunction is displayed on the Con‐
trol Display.
A red symbol is displayed and the re‐
cording range of the malfunctioning
camera is displayed in black on the
Control Display.
Surround View
The concept
The system provides assistance in parking and
maneuvering. The area around the vehicle is
shown on the Control Display.
Several cameras display the area from different
selectable perspectives. In addition, assistance
functions, e.g. guidelines, can be faded into the
camera image.
General information
The following camera perspectives can be dis‐
played:
▷ Automatic camera perspective: the system
shows the camera perspective suitable for
the respective driving situation, refer to
page 188.
▷ Rearview camera: to represent the areas
behind the vehicle, refer to page 188.
▷ Top view onto the vehicle, Top View, refer
to page 188.
▷ Right-hand and left-hand side view for rep‐
resenting the areas on the sides of the ve‐
hicle, refer to page 191.
▷ Camera perspective movable via iDrive, re‐
fer to page 188.
▷ Panorama View: to present cross traffic,
e.g. at junctions and driveways, depending
on the currently engaged gear, refer to
page 191.
Depending on the view, the environment
around the vehicle or a part of it is depicted.
Information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess the
traffic situation. There is risk of an accident.
Adjust the driving style to the traffic condi‐
tions. Watch traffic and vehicle surroundings
closely and actively interfere in the respective
situations.◀
Overview
Buttons in the vehicle
Surround View
Panorama View
Seite 187
Driver assistance systems Controls
187
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Cameras
Front camera
Rearview camera
There are two cameras at the bottom in the ex‐
terior mirror housings.
The image quality may be impaired by dirt on
the camera lenses. Clean the camera lenses,
refer to page 294.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
With the engine running, engage lever in posi‐
tion P R.
The camera perspective suitable for the re‐
spective driving situation is displayed.
Switching on/off manually
Press button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The rearview camera cannot be switched off if
the reverse gear is engaged.
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on if needed.
Display
Overview
1 Function bar
2 Selection window
3 Side view
4 Automatic camera perspective
5 Movable camera perspective
6 Camera image
7 Top View
8 Rearview camera
Seite 188
Controls Driver assistance systems
188
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Selecting the camera perspective
General information
The individual camera perspectives can be se‐
lected in the selection window via iDrive.
Side view
The side view can be selected for the right or
left vehicle side.
This view helps when positioning the vehicle at
the curb or with other obstacles on the side by
displaying the side surroundings.
The side view looks from rear to front and in
case of danger, focuses automatically on pos‐
sible obstacles.
Automatic camera perspective
The automatic camera perspective shows a
steering-dependent view in the respective
driving direction.
This perspective adapts to the respective driv‐
ing situation.
As soon as obstacles are detected, the view
changes to a fixed display of the area in front or
at the rear behind the bumper or if necessary,
changes to a side view.
Movable camera perspective
With selection of the movable camera per‐
spective, a circle appears on the Control Dis‐
play.
By turning the controller or via touch function,
specified perspectives on the circle can be se‐
lected.
The current perspective is marked with a cam‐
era symbol.
With BMW Gesture Control: an additional cam‐
era symbols appears on the circuit. This cam‐
era symbol is freely movable via BMW Gesture
Control, refer to page 30.
Exit the circle by pressing the controller or via
touch function on the active camera symbol.
Top view
The top view shows the vehicle and surround‐
ings from above.
Rearview camera
This view shows the picture of the rearview
camera.
Function bar
Assistance functions can be activated, refer to
page 189, via the function bar and settings ap‐
plied.
▷ "Parking Assistant", refer to page 193.
▷ "Brightness", refer to page 192.
▷ "Contrast", refer to page 192.
▷ "Parking aid lines", refer to page 190.
▷ "Obstacle marking", refer to page 190.
▷ "Car wash", refer to page 190.
▷ "Settings": apply settings, e.g. to use
the activation points for Panorama View.
Assistance functions
Activate/deactivate assistance
functions
More than one assistance function can be ac‐
tive at the same time.
The following assistance functions can be
manually activated:
▷ "Parking aid lines"
▷ "Obstacle marking"
▷ "Car wash"
The following assistance functions are auto‐
matically displayed:
▷ Side protection, refer to page 191.
▷ Rim protection, refer to page 191.
▷ Door opening angle, refer to page 191.
Seite 189
Driver assistance systems Controls
189
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Parking aid lines
Pathway lines
Pathway lines help you to estimate the space
required when parking and maneuvering on
level roads.
Pathway lines depend on the current steering
angle and are continuously adjusted to the
steering wheel movements.
Turning circle lines
Turning circle lines can only be superimposed
on the rearview camera image together with
pathway lines.
Turning circle lines show the course of the
smallest possible turning radius on a level
road.
Only one turning radius line is displayed after
the steering wheel is turned past a certain an‐
gle.
Parking using pathway and turning radius
lines
1. Position the vehicle so that the red turning
radius line leads to within the limits of the
parking space.
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
the green pathway line covers the corre‐
sponding turning radius line.
Obstacle marking
Obstacles behind the vehicle are detected by
the PDC sensors.
Obstacle markings can be shown in the cam‐
era image.
Their colored margins of the obstacle mark‐
ings match the markings of the PDC.
Car wash view
The car wash view assists when entering a car
wash by displaying the floor and the own lane.
Seite 190
Controls Driver assistance systems
190
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Side protection
The concept
Obstacles on the side of the vehicle are de‐
tected by the sensors of the system. The sys‐
tem warns against these obstacles.
Display
Obstacle markings are displayed sideways on
the vehicle to protect the vehicle sides.
▷ Gray markings: the area next to the vehicle
was not captured.
▷ No markings: no obstacles were detected.
▷ Color markings: warning against detected
obstacles.
Limits of side protection
The system only displays stationary obstacles
that were previously detected by sensors while
passing them.
The system does not detect, whether an ob‐
stacle moves later on. For this reason, at
standstill, the markings are shown in the dis‐
play in gray after a certain time. The area next
to the vehicle must be newly captured.
Rim protection
An imminent collision of the wheel with the
curb is displayed. The wheel in question is
marked in red.
Door opening angle
The maximum opening angle of the doors is
displayed in selector lever position P.
Panorama View
The concept
The system provides an early look at cross
traffic at blind driveways and intersections.
Road users concealed by obstacles to the left
and right of the vehicle can only be detected
Seite 191
Driver assistance systems Controls
191
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
relatively late from the driver's seat. The cam‐
eras in the front and rear capture the sideways
traffic area to improve the view.
Yellow lines in the screen display mark the
front and rear end of the vehicle.
The camera image shows different levels of
distortion in some areas and is thus not suita‐
ble for distance estimations.
Display on the Control Display
Press the button when the engine is run‐
ning.
Depending on the driving direction, the image
of the respective camera is displayed:
▷ "front": front camera image.
▷ "rear": rear camera image.
The cross traffic warning, refer to page 197,
can additionally warn against oncoming vehi‐
cles using radar sensors.
With navigation system: activation
points
The concept
Positions at which Panorama View is to switch
on automatically can be stored as activation
points as soon as a GPS signal is received.
Up to ten activation points can be stored.
Activation points can be used when driving for‐
ward for the front camera.
Storing activation points
1.
Drive to the position at which the system is
to be switched on, and stop.
2.
Press button.
3. Move the controller to the left.
4. "Add activation point"
The current position is displayed.
5. "Add activation point"
Activation points are, if possible, stored with
town/city and street address or with the GPS
coordinates.
Using activation points
The use of activation points can be switched
on and off.
1.
Press button.
2. Move the controller to the left.
3. "Settings"
4. "Panorama view, GPS-based"
5. "Panorama view, GPS-based"
Displaying or deleting activation points
1. Press button.
2. Move the controller to the left.
3. "Show activation points"
A list of all activation points is displayed.
4. "Delete this activation point" or "Delete all
activation points"
Setting brightness and contrast via
iDrive
With Surround View or Panorama View
switched on:
1.
Move the controller to the left.
2.
▷ "Brightness"
▷ "Contrast"
3. Set the desired value.
Functional limitations
The system can be used only to a limited ex‐
tent in the following situations:
▷ In poor light.
▷ In case of soiled cameras.
▷ With a door open.
▷ With the tailgate open.
▷ With exterior mirrors folded in.
Seite 192
Controls Driver assistance systems
192
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Gray hatched areas with symbol, e.g. open
door, in the camera image mark areas that are
currently not displayed.
Gray hatched areas without symbol, e.g. in
front of the vehicle, mark areas that are not
visible to the cameras.
System limits
Non-visible areas
Areas around the vehicle that are not visible
because of the viewing angle of the cameras,
are presented hatched in gray.
Detection of objects
Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding
objects such as ledges may not be detected by
the system.
Assistance functions also take into account
data of the PDC.
Follow instructions in the PDC chapter, refer to
page 180.
The objects displayed on the Control Display
under certain circumstances are closer than
they appear. Do not estimate the distance from
the objects on the display.
Malfunction
A camera malfunction is displayed on the Con‐
trol Display.
A yellow symbol is displayed and the
recording range of the malfunctioning
camera is displayed in black on the
Control Display.
Parking assistant
The concept
The system supports parking in the following
situations:
▷ When parking parallel to the road.
▷ When reverse parking diagonally to the
road.
Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces
on both sides of the vehicle.
The system calculates the best possible park‐
ing line.
When parking parallel or diagonal to the road,
the system takes control of steering, accelera‐
tion and braking and if needed changes the
gears during the parking procedure.
Hold down the parking assistant button for the
duration of the parking procedure. At the end
of the parking procedure, the P selector lever
position is set.
When parking, also take note of the visual and
acoustic information and instructions issued
by the PDC, the parking assistant and the rear‐
view camera and react accordingly.
A component of the system is the PDC Park
Distance Control, refer to page 180.
Information
Loud noises from outside and inside the vehi‐
cle may prevent you from hearing the PDC's
signal tone.
Seite 193
Driver assistance systems Controls
193
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
WARNING
The system does not relieve from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is risk of an accident. Adjust
the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively interfere in the re‐
spective situations.◀
CAUTION
The parking assistant can steer the vehi‐
cle over or onto curbs. There is risk of property
damage. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐
terfere in the respective situations.◀
An engine that has been switched off by the
Auto Start Stop function is restarted automati‐
cally when the parking assistant is activated.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Parking assistant
Ultrasound sensors
With the four side ultrasound sensors, arrows,
and the ultrasound sensors of the PDC in the
bumpers, the parking spaces are measured
and the distances to obstacles determined.
To ensure full functionality:
▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice, re‐
fer to page 294.
▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not
spray the sensors for long periods and
maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.
▷ Do not put stickers over sensors.
Requirements
For measuring parking spaces
▷ Maximum speed while driving forward ap‐
prox. 22 mph/35 km/h.
▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehi‐
cles: 5 ft/1.5 m.
Suitable parking space
General information:
▷ Gap behind an object that has a min. length
of 1.7 ft/0.5 m.
▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum
length of approx. 1.7 ft/0.5 m.
Parallel parking to the road:
▷ Min. length of gap between two objects:
your vehicle's length plus approx.
2.6 ft/0.8 m.
▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
Diagonal parking:
Seite 194
Controls Driver assistance systems
194
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
▷ Width of gap between two objects: your
vehicle's width plus approx. 2.3 ft/0.7 m up
to maximum 16 ft/5 m.
▷ Minimum depth: your vehicle's length.
The depth of diagonal parking spaces must
be estimated by the driver. Dur to technical
limitations, the system can approximate
the depth of diagonal parking spaces only.
Regarding the parking procedure
▷ Doors and trunk lid closed.
▷ Parking brake released.
▷ Driver's safety belt fastened.
Switching on/off
Switching on with the button
Press button.
The LED lights up.
The current status of the parking space search
is indicated on the Control Display.
Parking assistant is activated automatically.
Switching on with reverse gear
Shift into reverse.
The current status of the parking space search
is indicated on the Control Display.
To activate: "Parking Assistant"
Switch off
The system can be deactivated as follows:
▷ Press button.
Signal tone for switching suitable
parking spaces on/off
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Parking"
4. "Parking Assistant"
5. "Sound if parking space detected"
Settings are stored.
Display on the Control Display
System activated/deactivated
Symbol Meaning
Gray: the system is not available.
White: the system is available but
not activated.
The system is activated.
System status
▷ Colored symbols, arrows, on the side of
the vehicle illustrated. Parking assistant is
activated and search for parking space ac‐
tive.
▷ Control Display shows suitable parking
spaces at the edge of the road next to the
vehicle symbol. When the parking assistant
is active, suitable parking spaces are high‐
lighted in color and a signal tone sounds.
Switch signal tone on/off, refer to
page 195.
▷ If a diagonal or parallel parking space is
clearly detected, the system automatically
adjusts the suitable parking method. In the
case of parking spaces suitable for parallel
and diagonal parking, a selection menu is
displayed. In this case, the desired parking
method must be selected manually.
Seite 195
Driver assistance systems Controls
195
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
▷ The parking procedure is ac‐
tive. Steering control has
been taken over by system.
▷ Parking space search is always active
whenever the vehicle is moving forward
slow and straight, even if the system is de‐
activated. When the system is deactivated,
the displays on the Control Display are
shown in gray.
Parking using the parking assistant
1. Press the button or shift into reverse
to switch on the parking assistant. Activate
parking assistant if necessary.
The parking assistant is activated.
2. Drive by the row of parked vehicles at a
speed of up to approx. 22 mph/35 km/h
and at a distance of maximum 5 ft/1.5 m.
The status of the parking space search and
possible parking spaces are displayed on
the Control Display.
3. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
play.
Hold down the parking assistant button for
the duration of the parking procedure. At
the end of the parking procedure, the P se‐
lector lever position is set.
The end of the parking procedure is indi‐
cated on the Control Display.
4. Adjust the parking position yourself if
needed.
Interrupting manually
The parking assistant can be interrupted at any
time:
▷ "Parking Assistant" Select the symbol
on the Control Display.
▷ Release button during the parking
procedure.
Interrupting automatically
The system is interrupted automatically in the
following situations:
▷ If the driver grasps the steering wheel or if
he takes over steering.
▷ Possible on snow-covered or slippery road
surfaces.
▷ When there are obstacles that are hard to
overcome, such as curbs.
▷ When there are obstacles that suddenly
arise.
▷ If the Park Distance Control PDC displays
clearances that are too small.
▷ If a maximum number of parking attempts
or the time taken for parking is exceeded.
▷ When switching to another function on the
Control Display.
▷ When the button is released.
▷ If the tailgate is open.
▷ If doors are open.
▷ When setting the parking brake.
▷ During acceleration.
▷ When the brake pedal remains pressed for
an extended period while the vehicle is sta‐
tionary.
▷ When unfastening the driver's safety belt.
A Check Control message is displayed.
Resume
An interrupted parking procedure can be con‐
tinued if needed.
Follow the instructions on the Control Display.
System limits
No parking assistance
The parking assistant does not offer assis‐
tance in the following situations:
▷ In tight curves.
Seite 196
Controls Driver assistance systems
196
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel
roads.
▷ On slippery ground.
▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades.
▷ With accumulations of leaves/snow in the
parking space.
▷ With a mounted emergency wheel.
▷ In case of changes to an already-measured
parking space.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
Ultrasonic measuring might not function under
the following circumstances:
▷ For small children and animals.
▷ For persons with certain clothing, e.g.
coats.
▷ With external interference of the ultra‐
sound, e.g. from passing vehicles or loud
machines.
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam‐
aged or out of position.
▷ Under certain weather conditions such as
high relative humidity, rain, snowfall, ex‐
treme heat or strong wind.
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other
vehicles.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With moving objects.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
ledges or cargo.
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
such as fences.
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can
move into the blind area of the sensors before
or after a continuous tone sounds.
Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter of
the vehicle is not taken into account by the
system.
It can happen that parking spaces are detected
that are not suitable or suitable parking spaces
are not detected.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
The parking assistant failed. Have the system
checked.
Cross traffic warning
The concept
Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor
the area behind the vehicle.
At blind driveways or when driving out of diag‐
onal parking spaces, approaching cross traffic
is earlier detected by the system than possible
from the driver's seat.
The system indicates approaching traffic.
The lamp in the exterior mirror lights up, a sig‐
nal tone may sound, and the respective indica‐
tor is called up on the Control Display.
With the respective equipment variant, the
traffic area in front of the vehicle is monitored
as well. Two additional radar sensors are lo‐
cated in the front bumpers.
Seite 197
Driver assistance systems Controls
197
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess visi‐
bility and traffic situation. There is risk of an ac‐
cident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively
interfere in the respective situations.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Parking assistance systems
Radar sensors
The radar sensors are located in the rear
bumper.
With the respective equipment variant, there
are two additional radar sensors in the front
bumper.
Always keep the bumper in the area of the ra‐
dar sensors clean and unobstructed.
Switching on/off
Activating/deactivating the system
1. Press button.
2. Move the controller to the left.
3. "Settings"
4. "Cross traffic alert"
5. "Crossing-traffic warning"
Switching on automatically
If the system is activated on the Control Dis‐
play, it is automatically switched on as soon as
PDC or Panorama View is active.
Switching off automatically
The system is automatically switched off in the
following situations:
▷ When exceeding a speed of ap‐
prox. 4 mph/7 km/h.
▷ With the steering and lane guidance assis‐
tant active, when a certain driving distance
is exceeded.
Seite 198
Controls Driver assistance systems
198
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Display
Lamp in the exterior mirror
The lamp in the exterior mirror flashes if vehi‐
cles are detected by the rear sensors and the
vehicle is moving backwards.
Display in the PDC view
The respective boundary area in the PDC view
flashes red, if vehicles are detected by the sen‐
sors.
Display in the camera view
The respective boundary area, arrow 1, in the
camera view flashes red, if vehicles are de‐
tected by the sensors.
Yellow lines, arrow 2, mark the front or rear
edge of the own vehicle.
Acoustic warning
In addition to the optical indicator, a warning
signal sounds if the own vehicle moves into the
respective direction.
System limits
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ If the speed of the approaching vehicle is
very high.
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the bumper is dirty or iced up, or covered
with stickers.
▷ If crossing objects move at a very slow
speed.
▷ If other objects are in the capture range of
the sensors, that hide cross traffic.
Seite 199
Driver assistance systems Controls
199
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Driving comfort
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Air suspension
The concept
Air suspension ensures best possible driving
comfort under all load conditions. Due to a var‐
iable adjustment of the front and rear axles, the
damping is adjusted to the vehicle condition.
General information
In the case of an uneven road surface, the ve‐
hicle level can be elevated to increase ground
clearance.
▷ Normal level, for normal road surface.
▷ Raised level, when the road surface is poor.
In the SPORT driving mode, refer to page 110,
or at higher speeds, the vehicle lowers itself.
Information
WARNING
With lowering the vehicle, body parts can
be jammed. There is risk of injuries. When low‐
ering the vehicle, make sure that the areas of
movement under the vehicle and under the
wheel housing are free.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Level adjustment
Adjusting the level manually
Press button.
In the low speed range, the vehicle is raised to
the raised level with a press of the button.
Starting at a speed of approx. 20 mph/35 km/h
the vehicle lower itself automatically to the
normal level.
Display
▷ LED off: normal level.
▷ LED flashes: level is being adjusted.
▷ LED lit: raised level.
▷ LED flashes fast: level adjustment not pos‐
sible.
System limits
With several manual level changes one after
another, the system will switch itself off if nec‐
essary. The fast-flashing LED on the button in‐
dicates that the system is temporarily unavaila‐
ble.
Tire change
Before a tire change, deactivate the system:
Seite 200
Controls Driving comfort
200
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Press button and hold for approx. 7 sec‐
onds, then release. The LED flashes fast.
Activate system:
The system is activated again automatically
when you drive away.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed. The
system is disrupted. Vehicle handling may be
altered and driving comfort may be noticeably
reduced. Have checked by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
Long periods when vehicle is parked
During long periods when the vehicle is
parked, it can lower itself. This is not a mal‐
function.
Dynamic Damping Control
The concept
This system reduces undesirable vehicle mo‐
tion when using a dynamic driving style or trav‐
eling on uneven road surfaces.
The system enhances driving dynamics and
comfort fitting road surface and driving style.
General information
The system offers several different damping
settings.
These are assigned to the different driving
modes of the Driving Dynamics Control, refer
to page 110.
Tuning
Drive mode Damper tuning
COMFORT PLUS comfortable
SPORT firm
COMFORT/ECO PRO balanced out
Executive Drive Pro
The concept
Executive Drive Pro is an actively controlled
chassis. It increases driving comfort and mini‐
mizes the lateral tilt when driving around
curves. This increases both the agility of the
vehicle as well as the vehicle comfort.
Executive Drive Pro includes the following sys‐
tems:
▷ Active damping adjustment, refer to
page 201.
▷ Active roll stabilization, refer to page 202.
Active damping adjustment
The concept
The system increases driving comfort. Using a
camera in the area of the interior mirror, the
road surface is detected and damping auto‐
matically adjusted to the road surface.
Seite 201
Driving comfort Controls
201
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Overview
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior rear‐
view mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior rearview mirror clean and clear.
General information
The system is active up to a speed
of 75 mph/120 km/h.
System limits
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional or may
not be available in the following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐
fall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ At rapid steering angles.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
gine, via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the front
windshield are dirty or covered.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐
cause of oncoming light, e. g., from the sun
low in the sky.
▷ When it is dark outside.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed when
there is a camera malfunction. Visit the nearest
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Active roll stabilization
The concept
The system reduces the lateral inclination of
the vehicle that occurs during rapid driving in
curves or during quick evasive maneuvers.
The lateral inclination of the vehicle is bal‐
anced out by permanent adjustment on the
front and rear axles. The vehicle is thus always
stabilized.
Agility and driving comfort are increased under
all driving conditions.
General information
The system offers several different damping
settings.
These are assigned to the different driving
modes of the Driving Dynamics Control, refer
to page 110.
Tuning
Drive mode Damper tuning
COMFORT/COMFORT
PLUS
comfortable
SPORT firm
Seite 202
Controls Driving comfort
202
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Climate control
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Automatic climate control
Overview
Switch in the center console
Press but‐
ton
Function
Temperature, refer to
page 204.
Climate control operation, refer
to page 204.
Maximum cooling, refer to
page 204.
AUTO program, refer to
page 204.
Press but‐
ton
Function
Recirculated-air mode, refer to
page 205.
Air flow, manual, refer to
page 205.
Air distribution, manual, refer
to page 205.
SYNC program, refer to
page 206.
Defrost and defog window, re‐
fer to page 206.
Rear window defroster, refer to
page 206.
Active seat ventilation, refer to
page 92.
Seat heating, refer to page 91.
Ambient air package, refer to
page 211.
Climate control functions in detail
Switching the system on/off
Switching on
Press any button except:
▷ Rear window defroster.
▷ Left side of Air volume button.
▷ Seat heating.
▷ Seat ventilation.
▷ SYNC program.
Switch off
▷ Complete system:
Seite 203
Climate control Controls
203
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Press and hold the left button on
the driver's side until the control
clicks off.
▷ On the front passenger side:
Press and hold the left button on
the front passenger side.
Temperature
Turn the ring to set the desired
temperature.
The automatic climate control achieves this
temperature as quickly as possible, if needed
by using the maximum cooling or heating ca‐
pacity, and then keeps it constant.
Do not rapidly switch between different tem‐
perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli‐
mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐
just the set temperature.
Information
Symbol is displayed permanently on the
display of the automatic climate control.
Cooling function
The car's interior can only be cooled with the
engine running.
Press button. The LED lights up.
The air will be cooled and dehumidi‐
fied and, depending on the temperature set‐
ting, warmed again.
Depending on the weather, the windshield and
side windows may fog up briefly when the en‐
gine is started.
The cooling function is switched on automati‐
cally with the AUTO program.
When using the automatic climate control,
condensation water, refer to page 236, devel‐
ops that exits underneath the vehicle.
Maximum cooling
Press button.
The system is set to the lowest tem‐
perature, optimum air flow and air circulation
mode.
Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐
gion. The vents need to be open for this.
The function is available with external temper‐
atures beyond approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the
engine running.
Adjust air flow on the driver's side with the pro‐
gram active.
AUTO program
Press button.
Air flow, air distribution and tempera‐
ture are controlled automatically.
Depending on the selected temperature,
AUTO intensity program and outside influen‐
ces, the air is directed to the windshield, side
windows, upper body, and into the footwell.
The cooling function, refer to page 204, is
switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐
gram.
At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐
trols the program so as to prevent window
condensation as much as possible.
To switch off the program: press the button
again or manually adjust the air distribution.
Intensity of the AUTO program
With the AUTO program activated, the auto‐
matic intensity control can be changed.
Press the left or right side of the but‐
ton: decrease or increase the inten‐
sity.
The selected intensity is shown on the display
of the automatic climate control.
Seite 204
Controls Climate control
204
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Automatic recirculated-air control
AUC
The concept
The automatic recirculated air control AUC au‐
tomatically recognizes odors or pollutants in
the outside air. The outside air supply is then
automatically shut off, the interior air is recircu‐
lated.
General information
If the system is activated, a sensor detects pol‐
lutants in the outside air and controls the shut-
off automatically.
If the system is deactivated, outside air contin‐
uously flows into the car's interior.
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air
quality in the car's interior deteriorates and the
fogging of the windows increases.
If there is window condensation,
switch off the recirculated-air mode
and press the button on the driver's side to uti‐
lize the condensation sensor. Make sure that
air can flow to the windshield.
Switching on/off
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Climate functions"
4. "Air quality"
5. "Automatic air recirculation"
Recirculated-air mode
The concept
You may respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐
tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
system then recirculates the air currently
within the vehicle.
Operating via button
Press button repeatedly to select an
operating mode:
▷ LED off: outside air flows in continuously.
▷ LED on: the supply of outside air is perma‐
nently shut off.
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air
quality in the car's interior deteriorates and the
fogging of the windows increases.
If there is window condensation,
switch off the recirculated-air mode
and press the button on the driver's side to uti‐
lize the condensation sensor. Make sure that
air can flow to the windshield.
Air flow, manual
To manually adjust air flow turn off AUTO pro‐
gram first.
Press the left or right side of the but‐
ton: decrease or increase air flow.
The selected air flow is shown on the display of
the automatic climate control.
The air flow of the automatic climate control
may be reduced automatically to save battery
power.
Manual air distribution
Press button repeatedly to select a
program:
▷ Windows, upper body region, and footwell.
▷ Upper body region and footwell.
▷ Footwell.
▷ Windows and footwell.
▷ Windows.
▷ Windows and upper body.
▷ Upper body region.
The selected air distribution is shown on the
display of the automatic climate control.
Seite 205
Climate control Controls
205
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
If there is window condensation, press
the button on the driver's side to uti‐
lize the condensation sensor.
SYNC program
Press button.
The current settings on the driver's
side for temperature, air flow, air distribution,
and AUTO program are transferred to the front
passenger side and to the left and right rear.
To switch off, press the button again.
The program is switched off if the settings on
the front passenger side or in the rear are
changed.
Defrosts windows and removes
condensation
Press button.
Ice and condensation are quickly re‐
moved from the windshield and the front side
windows.
For this purpose, point the side vents onto the
side windows as needed.
Adjust air flow with the program active.
If there is window condensation, you
can also switch on the air conditioning
or press the button to utilize the condensation
sensor.
Rear window defroster
Press button.
The rear window defroster switches
off automatically after a certain period of time.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
The microfilter removes dust and pollen from
the incoming air.
The activated-charcoal filter removes gaseous
pollutants from the outside air that enters the
vehicle.
This combined filter should be replaced during
scheduled maintenance, refer to page 279, of
your vehicle.
Ventilation
Setting
The air flow directions can be individually ad‐
justed:
▷ Direct ventilation:
The air flow is directly pointed onto the
person. The air flow heats or cools noticea‐
bly, depending on the adjusted tempera‐
ture.
▷ Indirect ventilation:
If the vents are fully or partly closed, the air
is directly routed into the car's interior.
Indirect ventilation can also be adjusted on
the Control Display.
Front ventilation
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,
arrow 1.
▷ Thumbwheel for continuous opening and
closing of the vents, arrow 2
▷ Touch sensor or thumbwheel to vary the
temperature, arrow 3.
With touch sensor, push the marking in the
desired direction:
Toward blue: colder.
Toward red: warmer.
Seite 206
Controls Climate control
206
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
The set interior temperature for the driver
and passenger are not changed.
Adjusting the ventilation
▷ Ventilation for cooling:
Direct vent in your direction when vehicle's
interior is too hot.
▷ Draft-free ventilation:
Adjust the vent to let the air flow past the
occupants.
Indirect ventilation
Air is indirectly routed into the car's interior.
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Climate functions"
4. "Indirect ventilation"
Ventilation in rear, center
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,
arrow 1.
▷ Thumbwheels to vary the temperature, ar‐
row 2.
Toward blue: colder.
Toward red: warmer.
Lateral ventilation
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,
arrow 1.
▷ Thumbwheel for continuous opening and
closing of the vents, arrow 2.
Rear automatic climate
control
Overview
1 Temperature
2 AUTO program
3 Air distribution, manual
4 Air flow, AUTO intensity
5 Display
6 Maximum cooling
7 Seat heating 91
8 Active seat ventilation 92
Seite 207
Climate control Controls
207
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Switch on/off: via iDrive
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Climate functions"
4. "Rear climate"
The rear automatic climate control is not ready
for operation if the automatic climate control is
switched off or if the function for defrosting or
defogging the windows is active: defrost win‐
dows and remove condensation.
Switch on/off: via button
Switching on
Press any button except:
▷ Left side of Air volume button.
▷ Seat heating.
▷ Seat ventilation.
Switch off
Press and hold the left button.
AUTO program
Press button.
Air flow, air distribution, and tempera‐
ture are controlled automatically:
Depending on the selected temperature, the
AUTO intensity, and outside influences, the air
is directed to the upper body and into the foot‐
well.
The cooling function is switched on automati‐
cally with the AUTO program.
Intensity of the AUTO program
With the AUTO program activated, the auto‐
matic intensity control can be changed:
Press the left or right side of the but‐
ton: decrease or increase the inten‐
sity.
The selected intensity is shown on the display
of the automatic climate control.
Temperature
Turn the ring to set the desired
temperature.
The automatic climate control achieves this
temperature as quickly as possible, if needed
by using the maximum cooling or heating ca‐
pacity, and then keeps it constant.
Do not rapidly switch between different tem‐
perature settings. The automatic climate con‐
trol will not have sufficient time to adjust the
set temperature.
The temperature can also be operated using
BMW Touch Command.
Information
Symbol is displayed permanently on the
display of the automatic climate control.
Manual air distribution
The air distribution can be adjusted to individ‐
ual needs.
Press button repeatedly to select a
program:
▷ Upper body region.
▷ Upper body region and footwell.
▷ Footwell.
The air distribution can also be operated using
BMW Touch Command.
Air flow, manual
To manually adjust air flow turn off AUTO pro‐
gram first.
Press the left or right side of the but‐
ton: decrease or increase air flow.
Seite 208
Controls Climate control
208
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
The selected air flow is shown on the display of
the automatic climate control.
The air flow can also be operated using BMW
Touch Command.
Maximum cooling
Press button.
The system is set to the lowest tem‐
perature, maximum air flow and air circulation
mode.
Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐
gion. The vents need to be open for this.
Air is cooled as quickly as possible:
▷ At an external temperature of approx.
32 ℉/0 ℃.
▷ When the engine is running.
Operation is also possible using BMW Touch
Command.
Climate control operation on the
roofliner
Temperature
Turn the ring to set the desired
temperature.
Air flow
Press the left or right side of the but‐
ton: decrease or increase air flow.
LEDs indicate the intensity of the air supply.
The air flow may be reduced automatically to
save battery power.
Ventilation
Thumbwheel for changing the air flow direc‐
tion.
Parked-car ventilation/
heating
The concept
The parked-car ventilation ventilates the vehi‐
cle interior and lowers its temperature, if
needed.
The parked-car heating warms the vehicle in‐
terior, making snow and ice easier to remove.
The system uses the fuel of the vehicle for
heat generation.
Parked-car ventilation and parked-car heating
can be switched on and off directly or via a pre-
set departure time.
The reel-on time is automatically determined
based on the external temperature. The sys‐
tem promptly switches on before the selected
departure time.
Information
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila‐
tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can
enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases con‐
tain carbon monoxide, an odorless and color‐
less but highly toxic gas. In enclosed areas, ex‐
haust gases can also accumulate outside of
the vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep the
exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient ventila‐
Seite 209
Climate control Controls
209
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
tion. Do not switch on parked-car heating in
enclosed areas.◀
WARNING
During parked-car heating operation,
high temperatures can occur underneath the
body, e.g. caused by the exhaust gas system. If
combustible materials, such as leaves or grass,
come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust
gas system, these materials can ignite. There
is risk of fire. Make sure that no combustible
materials can come in contact with hot vehicle
parts during parked-car heating operation.◀
At external temperatures below 32 ℉/0 ℃, wa‐
ter vapor occurs that emerges from below the
vehicle.
Functional requirements
▷ The vehicle is in the idle or operating readi‐
ness state.
▷ Battery is sufficiently charged.
▷ Parked-car heating: the fuel tank is filled to
above the reserve range.
Open the vents to allow air to flow out.
Switching on/off directly
There are different ways to switch the system
on or off.
It switches of automatically after some time.
The system continues to run for some time af‐
ter being switched off.
Via the automatic climate control
button
When the vehicle is in standby state, parked-
car ventilation can be switched on or off via the
automatic climate control buttons.
Press any button except:
▷ Rear window defroster.
▷ Left side of Air volume button.
▷ Seat heating.
▷ Seat ventilation.
▷ SYNC program.
Via the iDrive
Parked-car ventilation can be switched on or
off via iDrive.
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Climate functions"
4. "Comfort ventilation" or "Comfort heating/
ventilation"
5. "Activate now"
symbol on the automatic climate control
signals to switched on system.
Via BMW display key
Parked-car ventilation and parked-car heating
can be switched on or off via the BMW display
key.
Switching on directly
1.
Switch on the display of the BMW display
key.
2. "Climate control setting"
3. , Tap symbol.
4. "Activate now"
5. "Start"
Switching off directly
1.
Switch on the display of the BMW display
key.
2. "Climate control setting"
3. , Tap symbol.
4. "Stop"
Departure time
Different departure times can be adjusted to
ensure a comfortable interior temperature in
the vehicle at the time of departure.
▷ One-time departure time: the time can be
set.
Seite 210
Controls Climate control
210
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
The system is switched on once at the de‐
sired time.
▷ Departure time with weekday: time and day
of the week can be set.
The system is switched on repeatedly on
the desired day of the week and time.
The departure time is pres-set in two steps:
▷ Set departure times.
▷ Activate departure times.
Setting departure time
Via the iDrive
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Climate functions"
3. "Comfort ventilation" or "Comfort heating/
ventilation"
4. Select the desired departure time.
5. Set the departure time.
6. Select day of the week if needed.
Via BMW display key
1.
Switch on the display of the BMW display
key.
2. "Climate control setting"
3. , Tap symbol.
4. Select the desired departure time.
5. If necessary, tap day of the week.
6. Select time.
7. "OK"
Activating the departure time
If a departure time should influence the switch‐
ing on of parked-car heating/ventilation, the re‐
spective departure time must be activated first.
Via the iDrive
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Climate functions"
3. "Comfort heating/ventilation"
4. "For departure time"
Activate the desired departure time.
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol signals an activated departure time.
Via BMW display key
1. Switch on the display of the BMW display
key.
2. "Climate control setting"
3. , Tap symbol.
4. Tap symbol.
Activate the desired departure time.
Ambient air package
The concept
The Ambient Air Package can be used to clean
and scent the interior air with high-quality fra‐
grances.
Two fragrances can be selected in the vehicle.
A variety other fragrances is possible by re‐
placing the fragrance cartridges.
Ionization is used to clean the air from sus‐
pended particles. Together with the selected
fragrance, ionization enhances well-being and
relaxation while driving.
Ionization
Ionization cleans the vehicle's interior air of
suspended particles.
Switching ionization on/off
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Climate functions"
4. "Air quality"
5. "Ionization"
Seite 211
Climate control Controls
211
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
An indicator in the climate control display sig‐
nals that the ionization is switched on.
Ionization can also be operated using BMW
Touch Command.
Fragrancing
General information
Perfuming is done at intervals in order to avoid
a habituation effect.
Two fragrance cartridges in the vehicle allow
comfortable switching between the fragrances.
The fragrance cartridges are located in the
glove compartment.
Overview
Button in the center console
Switch fragrancing on/off, adjust in‐
tensity.
Functional requirements
▷ Fragrance cartridges are sufficiently filled.
▷ Interior temperature between 41 ℉/+5 ℃
and 104 ℉/+40 ℃.
Selecting the fragrance
Two different fragrances can be selected in the
vehicle.
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Climate functions"
4. "Air quality"
5. "Fragrance"
6. Select desired setting.
The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐
rently used.
Switching fragrancing on/off,
adjusting intensity
The fragrance intensity can be adjusted on the
Control Display or via the button on the center
console.
Adjusting via iDrive
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Climate functions"
4. "Air quality"
5. "Fragrance"
6. "Level"
7. Select desired setting.
Adjusting via button
Press button once for each intensity
level.
Highest intensity if three bars are shown on
the climate control display.
Fragrancing is deactivated if no bars are dis‐
played.
Adjusting via BMW Touch Command
The ambient air package can also be operated
using BMW Touch Command.
Display
On the Control Display
With operation via button, the menu of the Am‐
bient Air Package can be displayed on the
Control Display automatically.
Seite 212
Controls Climate control
212
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Thus additional settings can be made if de‐
sired.
About iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Climate functions"
4. "Air quality"
5. "Fragrance"
6. "Show fragrance setting"
The menu is shown on the Control Display.
Fragrance cartridge filling level
The illustrations on the Control Display show
the actual filling level of the fragrance car‐
tridges.
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Climate functions"
4. "Air quality"
5. "Fragrance"
The fill level of the current fragrance is dis‐
played.
6. Select desired setting.
If an empty fragrance cartridge is indicated,
carrier fluid is still left. However, it is not suffi‐
cient for the perfuming.
A required fragrance cartridge replacement is
automatically indicated on the Control Display.
Inserting fragrance cartridges
The system can be accessed via the glove
compartment.
1.
Open the glove compartment, refer to
page 225.
2. Press on the bottom of the cartridge
holder, arrow.
The cartridge holder slides down.
3. Remove cover of the fragrance cartridge to
be inserted. Touch the cover on its top to
push it away from the fragrance cartridge,
arrow 1.
Insert the cover on the back side of the fra‐
grance cartridge, arrow 2.
4. Position fragrance cartridge such that the
chip faces away from the cartridge holder,
arrow 1.
Insert the fragrance cartridge without pres‐
sure into the cartridge holder, arrow 2. The
cartridge engages easily noticeable.
5. Push the cartridge holder up, until it en‐
gages.
Seite 213
Climate control Controls
213
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Make sure that no objects press against
the cartridge holder from below, otherwise
the function of the ambient air package
could be impacted.
6. Close the glove compartment.
Removing the fragrance cartridge
The fragrance cartridges are accessed via the
glove compartment.
1. Open the glove compartment, refer to
page 225.
2. Press on the bottom of the cartridge
holder, arrow.
The cartridge holder slides down.
3. Fragrance cartridge, arrow 1: corresponds
to the first fragrance indicated on the Con‐
trol Display.
Fragrance cartridge, arrow 2: corresponds
to the second fragrance indicated on the
Control Display.
4. Pull the desired fragrance cartridge from
the holder, arrow.
Empty fragrance cartridges can taken to a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop for recycling.
If the fragrance cartridges are refilled with fra‐
grance of a different brand, the vehicle manu‐
facturer will not assume warranty for possible
effects of the fragrances on interior materials,
e.g. odor, deposits, color changes, or possible
system damages.
Seite 214
Controls Climate control
214
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Interior equipment
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Universal Integrated Remote
Control
The concept
The universal garage door opener can operate
up to 3 functions of remote-controlled sys‐
tems such as garage door drives or lighting
systems. The universal garage door opener re‐
places up to 3 different hand-held transmitters.
To operate the remote control, the buttons on
the interior rearview mirror must be program‐
med with the desired functions. The hand-held
transmitter for the particular system is required
in order to program the remote control.
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored
functions for the sake of security.
Information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing remote-controlled systems, e.g. the garage
door, using the universal garage door opener.
There is risk of injuries or risk of property dam‐
age. Make sure that the area of movement of
the respective system is clear during program‐
ming and operation. Also follow the safety in‐
structions of the hand-held transmitter.◀
Compatibility
If this symbol is printed on the packag‐
ing or in the instructions of the system
to be controlled, the system is gener‐
ally compatible with the universal garage door
opener.
If you have any questions, please contact:
▷ A dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex
Corporation.
Controls on the interior rearview
mirror
▷ Buttons, arrow 1
▷ LED, arrow 2.
▷ The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re‐
quired for programming.
Programming
General information
1.
Turn on operations.
2. Initial setup:
Press and hold the left and right buttons on
the interior mirror simultaneously for ap‐
proximately 10 seconds until the LED
flashes rapidly green. This erases all pro‐
Seite 215
Interior equipment Controls
215
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
gramming of the buttons on the interior
rearview mirror.
3. Press the interior mirror button to be pro‐
grammed. The LED flashes orange.
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the sys‐
tem to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to
8 cm away from the buttons of the interior
mirror. The required distance depends on
the manual transmitter.
5. Press and hold the button of the desired
function on the hand-held transmitter. The
LED on the interior mirror will begin flash‐
ing slowly orange.
6. As soon as the LED flashes green more
rapidly or lights up continuously, release
the button. Green light indicates that the
button on the interior mirror was program‐
med. Faster green flashing indicates that it
is a change-code wireless system.
If the LED does not flash faster after at
least 60 seconds, change the distance be‐
tween the interior rearview mirror and the
hand-held transmitter and repeat the step.
Several more attempts at different distan‐
ces may be necessary. Wait at least
15 seconds between attempts.
Canada: if programming with the hand-
held transmitter was interrupted, hold
down the interior rearview mirror button
and repeatedly press and release the
hand-held transmitter button for 2 sec‐
onds.
7.
To program other functions on other but‐
tons, repeat steps 3 to 5.
The systems can be controlled using the inte‐
rior rearview mirror buttons.
Special feature of the alternating-
code wireless system
If you are unable to operate the system after
repeated programming, please check if the
system to be controlled features an alternat‐
ing-code system.
Read the system's operating manual, or press
the programmed button on the interior rear‐
view mirror longer. If the LED on the interior
rearview mirror starts flashing rapidly and then
stays lit constantly for 2 seconds, the system
features an alternating-code system. Flashing
and continuous illumination of the LED will re‐
peat for approximately 20 seconds.
For systems with an alternating-code system,
the universal garage door opener and the sys‐
tem also have to be synchronized.
Please read the operating manual to find out
how to synchronize the system.
Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a sec‐
ond person.
To synchronize:
1.
Park the vehicle within range of the re‐
mote-controlled system.
2. Program the relevant button on the interior
rearview mirror as described.
3. Locate and press the synchronizing button
on the system being programmed. You
have approx. 30 seconds for the next step.
4. Hold down the programmed button on the
interior rearview mirror for approximately
3 seconds and then release it. If necessary,
repeat this step up to three times in order
to finish synchronization. Once synchroni‐
zation is complete, the programmed func‐
tion will be carried out.
Reprogramming individual buttons
1.
Turn on operations.
2. Press the interior mirror button to be pro‐
grammed.
3. As soon as the interior mirror LED starts
flashing slowly, hold the hand-held trans‐
mitter for the system to be controlled ap‐
prox. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm away from the
buttons of the interior mirror. The required
distance depends on the manual transmit‐
ter.
Seite 216
Controls Interior equipment
216
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
4. Likewise, press and hold the button of the
desired function on the hand-held trans‐
mitter.
5. Release both buttons as soon as the inte‐
rior mirror LED flashes more rapidly or
lights up continuously. The LED flashing
more rapidly or being continuously light up
indicates that the button on the interior
mirror has been programmed. The system
can then be controlled by the button on the
interior rearview mirror.
If the LED does not flash faster after at
least 60 seconds, change the distance and
repeat the step. Several more attempts at
different distances may be necessary. Wait
at least 15 seconds between attempts.
Canada: if programming with the hand-
held transmitter was interrupted, hold
down the interior rearview mirror button
and repeatedly press and release the
hand-held transmitter button for 2 sec‐
onds.
Controls
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing remote-controlled systems, e.g. the garage
door, using the universal garage door opener.
There is risk of injuries or risk of property dam‐
age. Make sure that the area of movement of
the respective system is clear during program‐
ming and operation. Also follow the safety in‐
structions of the hand-held transmitter.◀
The system, such as the garage door, can be
operated using the button on the interior mirror
while the drive or operating readiness is
switched on. To do this, hold down the button
within receiving range of the system until the
function is activated. The interior rearview mir‐
ror LED stays lit while the wireless signal is be‐
ing transmitted.
Deleting stored functions
Press and hold the left and right button on the
interior mirror simultaneously for approxi‐
mately 10 seconds until the LED flashes rap‐
idly green. All stored functions are deleted.
The functions cannot be deleted individually.
Sun visor
Glare shield
Fold the sun visor down or up.
Glare shield from the side
Folding out
1.
Fold the sun visor down.
2. Unhook it from the holder and swing it to
the side.
3. Move it back to the desired position.
Folding up
Proceed in the reverse order to close the sun
visor.
Vanity mirror
A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor be‐
hind a cover. When the cover is opened, the
mirror lighting switches on.
Ashtray
Front
Opening
1.
Push the cover forward until it engages be‐
hind the cup holders. Push the cover for‐
Seite 217
Interior equipment Controls
217
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
ward again until it engages behind the stor‐
age compartment.
2. Fold the cover upward.
Emptying
Grasp the insert on the side and pull it out.
Rear
Opening
Press on the cover, arrow.
Emptying
Grasp the insert on the side, arrows, and re‐
move it.
Lighter
Information
WARNING
Contact with hot heating elements or the
hot socket of the cigarette lighter can cause
burns. Flammable materials can ignite if the
cigarette lighter falls down or is held against
the respective objects. There is risk of fire and
injuries. Hold the cigarette lighter on its handle.
Make sure that children do not use the ciga‐
rette lighter and do not burn themselves, e.g.
by carrying the remote control along when ex‐
iting the vehicle.◀
Seite 218
Controls Interior equipment
218
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
CAUTION
If metal objects fall into the socket, they
can cause a short circuit. There is risk of prop‐
erty damage. Replace the cigarette lighter or
socket cover again after using the socket.◀
Front center console
The cigarette lighter is located between the
cup holders.
Rear center console
Without rear console
Open the cover. The cigarette lighter is on the
right side.
To close the cover, tap it again.
With rear console
Slide the cover rearward. The cigarette lighter
is located between the cup holders.
Controls
Push in the lighter.
The lighter can be removed as
soon as it pops back out.
Connecting electrical
devices
Information
CAUTION
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery
can work with high voltages and currents,
which means that the 12V on-board network
can be overloaded or damaged. There is risk of
property damage. Only connect battery charg‐
ers for the vehicle battery to the starting aid
terminals in the engine compartment.◀
CAUTION
If metal objects fall into the socket, they
can cause a short circuit. There is risk of prop‐
erty damage. Replace the cigarette lighter or
socket cover again after using the socket.◀
Seite 219
Interior equipment Controls
219
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Sockets
General information
The lighter socket can be used as a socket for
electrical equipment when operation and the
drive-ready state are switched on.
Information
The total load of all sockets must not exceed
140 watts at 12 volts.
Do not damage the socket by using non-com‐
patible connectors.
Front center console
1.
Push the cover forward until it engages be‐
hind the cup holders.
2. Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.
Rear center console
If not equipped with rear console:
Open the cover. Remove the cover or cigarette
lighter.
To close the cover, tap it again.
If equipped with rear console:
The socket is located between the cup holders
under the cover.
Front center armrest
Remove the cover.
Seite 220
Controls Interior equipment
220
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Rear center armrest
There is a socket in the storage compartment
in the center armrest, arrow.
In the trunk
Fold open the cover.
USB interface
The concept
External devices with USB port can be con‐
nected to the USB interface.
The following audio devices can be connected:
▷ Mobile phones and smartphones sup‐
ported by the USB interface.
The snap-in adapter features a separate
USB port that is automatically connected
when a compatible mobile phone is in‐
serted.
▷ Audio devices with USB port, e.g. MP3
player.
▷ USB storage devices.
Common file systems are supported.
FAT32 and exFAT are the recommended
formats.
Information about compatible USB devices can
be found at www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth.
The following applications are possible:
▷ Exporting and importing profiles, refer to
page 58.
▷ Listening to music files via USB audio.
▷ Watching video films via USB video.
▷ Loading of software updates, refer to
page 46.
Information
Observe the following when connecting:
▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐
nector into the USB interface.
▷ Use a flexible adapter cable.
▷ Protect the USB device against mechanical
damage.
▷ Do not use the USB interface for recharg‐
ing external devices.
▷ Due to the large number of audio devices
available on the market, it cannot be guar‐
anteed that every USB device is operable
on the vehicle.
▷ Do not expose audio devices to extreme
environmental conditions, such as very
high temperatures; refer to the audio de‐
vice operating instructions.
▷ Due to the different configurations of audio
and video files, e.g., bit rates greater than
256 kbit/s, or the many different compres‐
sion techniques, proper playback cannot
be guaranteed in all cases.
▷ The connected audio device is supplied
with a max. power of 1 A if supported by
the device. Therefore, do not additionally
connect the device to a socket inside the
vehicle; otherwise, playback may be com‐
promised.
Not compatible USB devices:
Seite 221
Interior equipment Controls
221
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
▷ USB hard drives.
▷ USB hubs.
▷ USB memory card readers with multiple in‐
serts.
▷ HFS-formatted USB devices.
▷ MTP devices.
▷ Devices such as fans or lights.
In the center armrest
The USB interface is located in the center arm‐
rest.
In the center console
The USB interface is located in the center con‐
sole.
Through-loading system
General information
The through-loading system allows the trans‐
port of long objects, such as skies.
Opening through-loading without
comfort seats
1. Fold down the center armrest.
2. Remove flap.
3. Pull handle down, arrow 1, and fold panel
forward, arrow 2.
Opening through-loading with comfort
seats
1.
If equipped with rear console: fold down
center armrest.
2. If equipped with rear console: push cover
upward until it engages.
Seite 222
Controls Interior equipment
222
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
3. Pull on the loop.
Folding table in the rear
General information
There is a folding table in the center armrest of
the rear console.
Information
WARNING
A folded-out folding table protrudes into
the vehicle's interior and, in case of accident,
braking or evasive maneuvers can cause inju‐
ries. Objects on the table can be thrown
around the car's interior while driving. There is
risk of injuries. Do not unfold or use folding ta‐
ble while driving.◀
Folding the folding table open
1.
Open the center armrest, refer to
page 227.
2. Grasp the folding table in the rear and pull
forward out from the center armrest.
3. Fold the folding table down.
The folding table can be rotated by 90° or 180°
to the left and can be enlarged.
Proceed in reverse order to fold in the folding
table.
Rear cooler
Information
WARNING
The cover of the opened cooler pro‐
trudes into the car's interior. Injuries can occur
in the event of an accident, braking or evasive
maneuver. The content of the cooler can be
thrown into the car's interior and injure occu‐
pants. There is risk of injuries. Close the cooler
after use when driving.◀
Opening the rear cooler
1.
Fold down the center armrest.
2. Opening the through-loading system, refer
to page 222.
3. Press the opener and fold the cover for‐
ward.
Seite 223
Interior equipment Controls
223
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Switching on
The cooler can be operated at two levels.
1. Turn on operations.
2.
Press button once for each cooling
level.
The highest cooling power is active when
two LEDs are lit.
If the cooler was switched on the last time op‐
erating readiness was switched off, it will like‐
wise be switched on the next time operating
readiness is switched on.
Switch off
Press button repeatedly until the LEDs go out.
Removing
1.
Pull on the rear handle.
2. Pull cooler backward and remove it.
3. Fold the cover back.
Installing
1.
Open the cover.
2. Pull on the rear handle and push the cooler
into the guide rails.
3. Fold the handle back again.
Malfunction
The cooler cannot be switched on or switches
off, e.g., when the cooling system overheats or
if the battery voltage is low. One of the LEDs
flashes.
Remedy the problem
1.
If necessary, allow the refrigerator cooling
system to cool down.
2. Start the engine.
3. Switch on cooler.
If the LED flashes even after a short time, have
the cooler checked by a dealer’s service center
or another qualified service center or repair
shop.
Ski and snowboard bag
The ski and snowboard bag is contained in a
protective jacket in the trunk.
Follow the installation and operation instruc‐
tions included in the protective jacket.
If equipped with emergency wheel: remove the
emergency wheel from the vehicle to mount
the ski and snowboard bag.
Seite 224
Controls Interior equipment
224
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Storage compartments
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Information
WARNING
Loose objects in the car's interior can be
thrown into the car's interior while driving, e.g.
in the event of an accident or during braking
and evasive maneuvers. There is risk of inju‐
ries. Secure loose objects in the car's inte‐
rior.◀
CAUTION
Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can
damage the dashboard. There is risk of prop‐
erty damage. Do not use anti-slip pads.◀
Storage compartments
The following storage compartments are avail‐
able in the vehicle interior:
▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger
side, refer to page 225.
▷ Glove compartment on the driver's side,
refer to page 226.
▷ Compartments in the doors, refer to
page 226.
▷ Storage compartment on the center con‐
sole, refer to page 226.
▷ Center armrest, refer to page 227.
▷ Storage compartment in the rear, refer to
page 227.
▷ Storage compartment in the rear center
console, refer to page 226.
▷ Pockets on the backrests of the front
seats.
Glove compartment
Front passenger side
Information
WARNING
Folded open, the glove compartment
protrudes in the car's interior. Objects in the
glove compartment can be thrown into the
car's interior while driving, e.g. in the event of
an accident or during braking and evasive ma‐
neuvers. There is risk of injuries. Always close
the glove compartment immediately after us‐
ing it.◀
Opening
Pull the handle.
The light in the glove compartment switches
on.
Closing
Fold cover closed.
Seite 225
Storage compartments Controls
225
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Locking
The glove compartment can be locked with an
integrated key. This prevents access to the
glove compartment.
After the glove compartment is locked, the re‐
mote control can be handed over, such as at a
hotel, without the integrated key.
Driver's side
Information
WARNING
Folded open, the glove compartment
protrudes in the car's interior. Objects in the
glove compartment can be thrown into the
car's interior while driving, e.g. in the event of
an accident or during braking and evasive ma‐
neuvers. There is risk of injuries. Always close
the glove compartment immediately after us‐
ing it.◀
Opening
Pull the handle.
Closing
Fold cover closed.
Compartments in the doors
WARNING
Breakable object, e.g. glass bottle, can
break in the event of an accident. Broken glass
can be scattered in the car's interior. There is
risk of injuries. Do not stow any breakable ob‐
jects in the car's interior.◀
Storage compartment on the
center console
Opening
Push the cover forward until it engages behind
the cup holders. Push the cover forward again
until it engages behind the storage compart‐
ment.
Closing
Touch the cover on the handle bar. It slides up
to the cup holders toward the back. Another
touch closes the storage compartment com‐
pletely.
Storage compartment in the
rear center console
The rear center console contains a storage
compartment.
Seite 226
Controls Storage compartments
226
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Storage compartment in the
rear
Opening
Push the cover up until it engages. There is a
storage compartment underneath.
Closing
Press the cover upward to close it. The cover
slides down.
Center armrest
Front
Overview
A storage compartment is located in the center
armrest between the seats.
Opening
Press button.
Closing
Press cover down until it engages.
Rear
Overview
A storage compartment is located in the center
armrest between the seats.
Opening
Depending on the equipment, one of the fol‐
lowing variants is installed:
Press button, arrow 1, and fold the cover up,
arrow 2.
Press button, arrow 1, and fold the cover up,
arrow 2.
Seite 227
Storage compartments Controls
227
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Press button.
Closing
Press cover down until it engages.
Cupholders
Information
WARNING
Unsuitable containers in the cup holder
and hot beverages can damage the cup holder
and increase the risk of injuries in the event of
an accident. There is risk of injuries or risk of
property damage. Use light-weight, unbreaka‐
ble, and sealable containers. Do not transport
hot beverages. Do not force objects into the
cup holder.◀
Front
Opening
1.
Push the cover forward until it engages be‐
hind the cup holders.
2. Two cupholders are located in the center
console.
Rear
Information
CAUTION
With an open cup holder, the center arm‐
rest cannot be folded back up. There is risk of
property damage. Press back the covers be‐
fore the center armrest is folded up.◀
Opening
If not equipped with rear console:
Press button to open.
Slide cup holders rearward to close.
If equipped with rear console:
Seite 228
Controls Storage compartments
228
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Slide cover rearward to open.
To close: slide the cover backward. The cover
slides forward.
Clothes hooks
WARNING
Clothing articles on the clothes hooks
can obstruct the view while driving. There is
risk of an accident. When suspending clothing
articles from the hooks, ensure that they will
not obstruct the driver's view.◀
WARNING
Improper use of the clothes hooks can
lead to a danger of objects flying about during
braking and evasive maneuvers. There is risk
of injuries and risk of property damage. Only
hang lightweight objects, e.g. clothing articles,
from the clothes hooks.◀
The clothes hooks are located in the grab han‐
dles in the rear and on the door pillar in the
rear.
Storage compartments in the
trunk
Multi-function hook
Information
WARNING
Improper use of the multifunction hooks
can lead to a danger of objects flying about
during braking and evasive maneuvers. There
is risk of injuries and risk of property damage.
Only hang lightweight objects, e.g. shopping
bags, from the multifunction hooks. Only
transport heavy luggage in the trunk if it has
been appropriately secured.◀
Overview
A multi-function hook is located on the left
side in the trunk. Press on the multi-function
hook and turn until it engages.
Storage compartment on the right
side
A storage compartment is available on the
right side of the cargo area.
Seite 229
Storage compartments Controls
229
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Left side storage compartment
Pull the handle.
Lashing eyes in the cargo area
To secure the cargo, refer to page 238, there
are lashing eyes in the cargo area.
Storage compartment below cargo
floor panel
There is a storage compartment under the
cargo floor panel.
Fold up the cargo floor panel.
Seite 230
Controls Storage compartments
230
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Seite 231
Storage compartments Controls
231
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Driving tips
This chapter provides you with information
useful in dealing with specific driving and
operating modes.
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Things to remember when driving
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Breaking-in period
General information
Moving parts need time to adjust to one an‐
other (break-in time).
The following instructions will help accomplish
a long vehicle life and good efficiency.
During break-in, do not use the Launch Con‐
trol, refer to page 109.
Engine, transmission, and axle drive
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Do not exceed the maximum engine and road
speed:
▷ For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and
100 mph/160 km/h.
Avoid full load or kickdown under all circum‐
stances.
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be
increased.
Tires
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐
ing circumstances when tires are brand-new;
they achieve their full traction potential after a
break-in time.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Brake system
Brakes require an initial break-in period of ap‐
prox. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimal per‐
formance between brake discs and brake
pads. Drive moderately during this break-in pe‐
riod.
Following part replacement
The same break-in procedures should be ob‐
served if any of the components above-men‐
tioned have to be renewed in the course of the
vehicle's operating life.
General driving notes
Closing the trunk lid
WARNING
An open trunk lid protrudes from the ve‐
hicle and can endanger occupants and other
traffic participants or damage the vehicle in the
event of an accident, braking or evasive ma‐
neuvers. In addition, exhaust fumes may enter
the vehicle interior. There is risk of injuries or
risk of property damage. Do not drive with the
trunk lid open.◀
If driving with the tailgate open cannot be
avoided:
▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof.
▷ Greatly increase the air flow from the vents.
▷ Drive moderately.
Seite 234
Driving tips Things to remember when driving
234
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Hot exhaust system
WARNING
During driving operation, high tempera‐
tures can occur underneath the body, e.g.
caused by the exhaust gas system. If combus‐
tible materials, such as leaves or grass, come
in contact with hot parts of the exhaust gas
system, these materials can ignite. There is
risk of injuries or risk of property damage.
Do not remove the heat shields installed and
never apply undercoating to them. Make sure
that no combustible materials can come in
contact with hot vehicle parts in driving opera‐
tion, idle or during parking. Do not touch the
hot exhaust system.◀
Mobile communication devices in the
vehicle
WARNING
Vehicle electronics and mobile phones
can influence one another. There is radiation
due to the send operations of mobile phones.
There is risk of injuries or risk of property dam‐
age. If possible, in the car's interior use only
mobile phones with direct connections to an
exterior antenna in order to exclude mutual
disturbance and deflect the radiation from the
car's interior.◀
Hydroplaning
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can
form between the tires and road surface.
This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐
ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete
loss of contact between the tires and the road
surface, ultimately undermining your ability to
steer and brake the vehicle.
Driving through water
CAUTION
When driving too quickly through too
deep water, water can enter into the engine
compartment, the electrical system or the
transmission. There is risk of property damage.
When driving through water, do not exceed the
maximum indicated water level and the maxi‐
mum speed for driving through water.◀
Drive through calm water only and only if it is
not deeper than 9.8 inches/25 cm and at this
height, no faster than walking speed, up to
3 mph/5 km/h.
Braking safely
Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as a stand‐
ard feature.
Applying the brakes fully is the most effective
way of braking in situations needed.
Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid
any obstacles with a minimum of steering ef‐
fort.
Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from
the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its
active mode.
In certain braking situations, the perforated
brake discs can cause functional problems.
However, this has no effect on the perform‐
ance and operational reliability of the brake.
Objects in the movement area around
pedals and floor area
WARNING
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit
the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal.
There is risk of an accident. Stow objects in
the vehicle such that they are secured and
cannot enter into the driver's floor area. Use
floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and
can be safely attached to the floor. Do not use
loose floor mats and do not layer several floor
mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clear‐
ance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats
are securely fastened again after they were re‐
moved, e.g. for cleaning.◀
Seite 235
Things to remember when driving Driving tips
235
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Driving in wet conditions
When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy rain,
press brake pedal ever so gently every few
miles.
Ensure that this action does not endanger
other traffic.
The heat generated in this process helps dry
the brake discs and pads.
In this way braking efficiency will be available
when you need it.
Hills
WARNING
Light but consistent brake pressure can
lead to high temperatures, brakes wearing out
and possibly even brake failure. There is risk of
an accident. Avoid placing excessive stress on
the brake system.◀
WARNING
In idle or with the engine switched off,
safety-relevant functions are restricted or not
available anymore, e.g. braking effect of the
engine or braking force and steering support.
There is risk of an accident. Do not drive in idle
or with the engine switched off.◀
Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the
gear that requires least braking efforts. Other‐
wise the brakes may overheat and reduce
brake efficiency.
You can increase the engine's braking effect
by shifting down, going all the way to first gear,
if needed.
Brake disc corrosion
Corrosion on the brake discs and contamina‐
tion on the brake pads are furthered by the fol‐
lowing circumstances:
▷ Low mileage.
▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all.
▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.
Corrosion will built up when the maximum
pressure applied to the brake pads during
braking is not reached - thus discs don't get
cleaned.
Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will cause
a pulsating effect on the brakes in their re‐
sponse - generally that cannot be corrected.
Condensation under the parked
vehicle
When using the automatic climate control,
condensation water develops collecting under‐
neath the vehicle.
These traces of water under the vehicle are
normal.
Seite 236
Driving tips Things to remember when driving
236
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Loading
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Information
WARNING
High gross weight can overheat the tires,
damage them internally, and cause a sudden
drop in tire inflation pressure. There is risk of
an accident. Pay attention to the permitted
load capacity of the tires and never exceed the
permitted gross weight.◀
CAUTION
Fluids in the cargo area can cause dam‐
age. There is risk of property damage. Make
sure that no fluids leak in the cargo area.◀
WARNING
Loose objects in the car's interior can be
thrown into the car's interior while driving, e.g.
in the event of an accident or during braking
and evasive maneuvers. There is risk of inju‐
ries. Secure loose objects in the car's inte‐
rior.◀
Determining the load limit
1.
Locate the following statement on your ve‐
hicle’s placard:
▷ The combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed XXX kg
or YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the
vehicle and unstable driving situations
may result.
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kilograms or
YYY pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load ca‐
pacity.
For example, if the YYY amount equals
1,000 lbs and there will be four 150 lbs
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity
is 400 lbs: 1,000 lbs minus 600 lbs =
400 lbs.
5. Determine the combined weight of lug‐
gage and cargo being loaded on the vehi‐
cle. That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
Seite 237
Loading Driving tips
237
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Load
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of
the occupants and the cargo.
The greater the weight of the occupants, the
less cargo that can be transported.
Stowing cargo
▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the
cargo.
▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi‐
ble, directly behind and at the bottom of
the rear passenger seat backrests.
▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not
occupied, secure each of the outer safety
belts in the opposite buckle.
Securing cargo
Lashing eyes in the cargo area
To secure the cargo there are four lashing
eyes in the cargo area.
Securing cargo
WARNING
Improperly stowed objects can shift and
be thrown into the car's interior, e.g. in the
event of an accident or during braking and eva‐
sive maneuvers. Vehicle occupants can be hit
and injured. There is risk of injuries. Stow and
secure objects and cargo properly.◀
▷ Smaller and lighter items: secure with re‐
taining straps or with a cargo net or draw
straps.
▷ Larger and heavy objects: secure with
cargo straps.
Cargo straps, cargo netting, retaining
straps or draw straps on the lashing eyes in
the trunk.
Roof-mounted luggage rack
Information
Installation only possible in roof drip molding
with flaps. Further information is available from
a dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Roof racks are available as special accessories.
Securing
Follow the installation instructions of the roof
rack.
Roof drip rail with flaps
The anchorage points are located in the roof
drip rail above the doors.
Seite 238
Driving tips Loading
238
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Fold the cover outward.
Mounting
Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained
for tilting and opening the glass sunroof.
Magnetic roof-mounted luggage rack
Because of the aluminum roof, magnetic roof-
mounted luggage racks cannot be used.
Loading
Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center
of gravity when loaded, they have a major ef‐
fect on vehicle handling and steering re‐
sponse.
Therefore, note the following when loading
and driving:
▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle
loads and the approved gross vehicle
weight.
▷ Be sure that adequate clearance is main‐
tained for tilting and opening the glass
sunroof.
▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly.
▷ The roof load should not extend past the
loading area.
▷ Always place the heaviest pieces on the
bottom.
▷ Secure the roof luggage firmly, e.g., tie
with ratchet straps.
▷ Do not let objects project into the opening
path of the trunk lid.
▷ Drive cautiously and avoid sudden acceler‐
ation and braking maneuvers. Take corners
gently.
Seite 239
Loading Driving tips
239
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Saving fuel
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
General information
Your vehicle contains advanced technology for
the reduction of fuel consumption and emis‐
sions.
Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐
ferent factors.
Carrying out certain measures, such as a mod‐
erate driving style and regular maintenance,
can influence fuel consumption and the envi‐
ronmental impact.
Remove unnecessary cargo
Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
Remove attached parts
following use
Remove auxiliary mirrors, roof or rear luggage
racks which are no longer required following
use.
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐
dynamics and increase the fuel consumption.
Close the windows and glass
sunroof
Driving with the glass sunroof and windows
open results in increased air resistance and
raises fuel consumption.
Tires
General information
Tires can affect fuel consumption in various
ways, e.g., tire size may influence fuel con‐
sumption.
Check the tire inflation pressure
regularly
Check and, if needed, correct the tire inflation
pressure at least twice a month and before
starting on a long trip.
Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐
sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and
tire wear.
Drive away without delay
Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while
the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving
right away, but at moderate engine speeds.
This is the quickest way of warming the cold
engine up to operating temperature.
Look well ahead when
driving
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehi‐
cle driving ahead of you.
Driving smoothly and proactively reduces fuel
consumption.
Seite 240
Driving tips Saving fuel
240
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Avoid high engine speeds
As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowers
fuel consumption and reduces wear.
If necessary, observe the gear shift indicator,
refer to page 120, of the vehicle.
Use coasting conditions
When approaching a red light, take your foot
off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to
a halt.
For going downhill take your foot off the accel‐
erator and let the vehicle roll.
The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.
Switch off the engine during
longer stops
Switch off the engine during longer stops, e.g.,
at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic
congestion.
Auto Start/Stop function
The Auto Start/Stop function of your vehicle
automatically switches off the engine during a
stop.
If the engine is switched off and then restarted
rather than leaving the engine running con‐
stantly, fuel consumption and emissions are
reduced. Savings can begin within a few sec‐
onds of switching off the engine.
In addition, fuel consumption is also deter‐
mined by other factors, such as driving style,
road conditions, maintenance or environmental
factors.
Switch off any functions that
are not currently needed
Functions such as seat heating and the rear
window defroster require a lot of energy and
reduce the range, especially in city and stop-
and-go traffic.
Switch off these functions if they are not
needed.
The ECO PRO driving program supports the
energy conserving use of comfort features.
These functions are automatically deactivated
partially or completely.
Have maintenance carried
out
Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve
optimal vehicle efficiency and service life.
BMW recommends that maintenance work be
performed by a BMW dealer’s service center.
For information on the BMW Maintenance
System, refer to page 279.
ECO PRO
The concept
ECO PRO supports a driving style that saves
on fuel consumption. For this purpose, the en‐
gine control and comfort features, e. g. the cli‐
mate control output, are adjusted.
Under certain conditions the engine is auto‐
matically decoupled from the transmission in
the D selector lever position. The vehicle con‐
tinues traveling with the engine idling to re‐
duce fuel consumption. Selector lever position
D remains engaged.
In addition, context-sensitive instructions are
displayed to assist with an optimized fuel con‐
sumption driving style.
The achieved extended range is displayed in
the instrument cluster as bonus range.
Overview
The system includes the following
EfficientDynamics functions and displays:
▷ ECO PRO bonus range, refer to page 243.
Seite 241
Saving fuel Driving tips
241
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
▷ ECO PRO tips driving instruction, refer to
page 243.
▷ ECO PRO climate control, refer to
page 242.
▷ ECO PRO route-ahead assistant driving in‐
struction, refer to page 244.
▷ ECO PRO coasting driving status, refer to
page 245.
▷ ECO PRO driving style analysis, refer to
page 246.
Activating ECO PRO
Press button. ECO PRO is displayed
in the instrument cluster.
Configuring ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL
Opening via the Driving Dynamics
Control
1.
Activate ECO PRO.
2. "Configure ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL"
Opening via iDrive
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Driving Experience Control"
4. "Configure ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL"
ECO PRO notes
Activate the ECO PRO limit:
"ECO PRO speed warning"
An ECO PRO tip is displayed if the speed of
the set ECO PRO limit is exceeded.
Adjust the ECO PRO limit speed:
▷ "Tip at:"
Activating ECO PRO functions
Adjust, which ECO PRO functions should be
used.
▷ "Coasting"
▷ "ECO PRO seat climate control"
▷ "ECO PRO climate control"
▷ "ECO PRO sight"
▷ "Route-ahead assistant"
Coasting
Fuel-efficiency can be optimized by disengag‐
ing the engine and Coasting with the engine
idling.
ECO PRO seat heating
The output of seat heating and possibly seat
ventilation is reduced on activation of ECO
PRO.
ECO PRO climate control
"ECO PRO climate control"
Climate control is set to be fuel-efficient.
By making a slight change to the set tempera‐
ture, or slowly adjusting the rate of heating or
cooling of the car's interior, fuel consumption
can be economized.
The mirror heating is made available when out‐
side temperatures are very cold.
Route-ahead assistant
The route-ahead assistant detects and indi‐
cates route sections ahead of the vehicle.
Resetting the settings
Reset ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL to the standard
settings:
Select and confirm "Reset to ECO PRO
STANDARD".
Display in the instrument cluster
Display
When ECO PRO mode is activated, the display
switches to a special configuration.
Some of the displays may differ from the dis‐
play in the instrument cluster.
Seite 242
Driving tips Saving fuel
242
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Blue bar segments symbolize the gained bo‐
nus range in stages.
ECO PRO bonus range
An adjusted driving style helps
you extend your driving range.
This may be displayed as the
bonus range in the instrument
cluster.
The bonus range is shown in the range display.
The bonus range is automatically reset every
time the vehicle is refueled.
Efficiency display
Display in the instrument cluster
Display in the instrument cluster with ex‐
panded scope
A mark in the efficiency display informs about
the current driving style.
Mark in the area of arrow 1: display of the en‐
ergy recovered by coasting or when braking.
Mark in the area of arrow 2: display when ac‐
celerating.
ECO PRO tip, driving tip
As soon as one of the conditions for efficient
driving is no longer fulfilled, respective driving
instructions are displayed as a symbol in the
instrument cluster.
The arrow indicates that the driving
style can be adjusted to be more fuel
efficient by backing off the accelerator
for instance.
The ECO PRO tip is not displayed anymore as
soon as the conditions for efficient driving are
fulfilled again.
ECO PRO tip, symbols
Symbol Measure
For an efficient driving style:
Give less gas, decelerate in advance
or reduce speed to selected ECO
PRO speed.
Steptronic transmission: shift from
M/S to D.
Indications on the Control Display
Displaying EfficientDynamics info
The current efficiency of the ECO PRO sys‐
tems can be shown on the Control Display.
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "EfficientDynamics"
The following systems are displayed:
▷ Auto Start/Stop function.
▷ Energy recovery.
▷ Coasting.
Seite 243
Saving fuel Driving tips
243
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Displaying fuel consumption history
The average consumption on the route
coasted as well as the duration for which the
auto start/stop function switched off the en‐
gine can be displayed.
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "EfficientDynamics"
Vertical bars show consumption for the se‐
lected route.
Selecting route length
1. Press button.
2. Select desired route length or scaling.
Resetting fuel consumption history
1. Press button.
2. "Reset consumption history"
Route-ahead assistant
The concept
The system helps to conserve fuel and pro‐
motes a proactively driving style. It can detect
certain upcoming sections of the journey
based on the navigation data and alert the
driver to them in good time.
The detected route sections, such as built-up
areas or changes of road require the driver to
reduce speed.
General information
This alert is issued even if the upcoming route
section cannot yet be detected while driving.
The alert is displayed until the route section is
reached.
If an alert is received, the vehicle's speed and
its fuel consumption can be reduced by back‐
ing off the accelerator and coasting until the
route section is reached.
Depending on the situation, the system also
uses the engine brake automatically with a
pausing of the coast, refer to page 245, func‐
tion.
Functional requirements
This function is available in ECO PRO mode.
The system depends on the timeliness and
quality of the navigation data.
The navigation data can be updated.
Display
Display in the instrument cluster
The note about a route section ahead
is made as recommendation to let the
vehicle coast to a halt.
An additional symbol indicates the detected
route section.
Symbol Upcoming route section
Intersection or turning maneuver,
exit from an expressway.
Curve.
Traffic circle.
Display in the Head-up Display
The route ahead alert can also be dis‐
played in the Head-Up Display.
Seite 244
Driving tips Saving fuel
244
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Indications on the Control Display
In the indicator of the driving style analysis
shown on the Control Display, a note is dis‐
played if a corresponding route section is up‐
coming.
Call up the display of the driving style analysis:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "Driving style analysis"
Using the route-ahead assistant
An upcoming route section is displayed:
1.
Back off the accelerator.
2. Allow the vehicle to coast until the route
section indicated is reached.
3. If necessary, adjust speed by braking.
System limits
The system is not available in the following sit‐
uations:
▷ Speed less than 30 mph, approx. 50 km/h.
▷ Temporary and variable speed limit, e.g.,
for road works.
▷ Quality of navigation data inadequate.
▷ Cruise control active.
Coasting
The concept
The system helps to conserve fuel.
To do this, under certain conditions the engine
is automatically decoupled from the transmis‐
sion when selector lever position D is set. The
vehicle continues traveling with the engine
idling to reduce fuel consumption. Selector
lever position D remains engaged.
This driving condition is referred to as coast‐
ing.
As soon as you step on the brake or accelera‐
tor pedal, the engine is automatically coupled
again.
Information
Coasting is a component of the ECO PRO, re‐
fer to page 241, driving mode.
Coasting is automatically activated when ECO
PRO mode is called via the Driving Dynamics
Control.
The function is available in a certain speed
range.
A proactively driving style helps the driver to
use the function as often as possible and sup‐
ports the fuel-conserving effect of coasting.
Safety mode
The function is not available under one of the
following conditions.
▷ DSC OFF or TRACTION activated.
▷ Driving in the dynamic limit range and on
steep uphill or downhill grades.
▷ Battery charge status temporarily too low
or vehicle electrical system drawing exces‐
sive current.
Functional requirements
In ECO PRO mode, this function is available in
a speed range from approximately 30 mph, ap‐
prox. 50 km/h to 100 mph, approx. 160 km/h, if
the following conditions are met:
▷ Accelerator pedal and brake pedal are not
operated.
▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi‐
tion D.
Seite 245
Saving fuel Driving tips
245
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
▷ Engine and transmission are at operating
temperature.
The driving status Coast can be influenced
with the shift paddles.
Activate coasting via the shift paddles:
1. Using the shift paddles + shift to the high‐
est gear.
2. Shift paddles + press again to enter coast‐
ing mode.
Deactivate coasting:
Press shift paddles.
Display
Display in the instrument cluster
The mark in the efficiency dis‐
play below the tachometer is
backlit in blue and is located at
the zero point. The tachometer
approximately indicates idle
speed.
The coasting point indicator is illuminated at
the zero point during coasting.
Display in the instrument cluster with
expanded scope
The mark in the efficiency dis‐
play is backlit in blue and is lo‐
cated at the zero point.
The coasting point indicator is il‐
luminated at the zero point dur‐
ing coasting.
Indications on the Control Display
The Coasting driving condition is displayed in
EfficientDynamics Info while this driving mode
is active.
Color code blue, arrow 1, and symbol, arrow 2:
driving condition Coasting.
Displaying EfficientDynamics info
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "EfficientDynamics"
Deactivating the system manually
The function can be deactivated individually on
the ECO PRO menu.
The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐
rently used.
ECO PRO driving style analysis
The concept
In this situation the system helps develop an
especially efficient driving style and to con‐
serve fuel.
For this purpose, the driving style is analyzed.
The assessment is done in various categories
and is displayed on the Control Display.
Using this indication, the individual driving
style can be oriented toward conserving fuel.
The current trip is assessed.
The range of the vehicle can be extended by
an efficient driving style.
This gain in range is displayed as a bonus
range in the instrument cluster and on the
Control Display.
Seite 246
Driving tips Saving fuel
246
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Functional requirement
This function is available in ECO PRO mode.
Calling up ECO PRO driving style
analysis
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "Driving style analysis"
Display on the Control Display
The display of the ECO PRO driving style anal‐
ysis consists of a symbolized route and a
lookup table.
The road symbolizes the efficiency of the driv‐
ing style. The more efficient the driving style,
the smoother the depicted route becomes, ar‐
row 1.
The table of values contains stars. The more
efficient the driving style, the more stars are in‐
cluded in the table and the faster the bonus
range increases, arrow 2.
If, on the other hand, the driving style is ineffi‐
cient, a wavy road and a reduced number of
stars is displayed.
To assist with an efficient driving style, ECO
PRO tips are displayed during driving.
Seite 247
Saving fuel Driving tips
247
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Mobility
In order to always ensure your mobility, you will
find important information on operating fluids,
wheels and tires, maintenance and Roadside
Assistance in the following.
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Refueling
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Information
CAUTION
With a range of less than 30 miles/50 km
it is possible that the engine will no longer have
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are no longer
ensured. There is risk of property damage. Re‐
fuel promptly.◀
Observe the fuel recommendation, refer to
page 252, prior to refueling.
Fuel lid
Opening
1.
Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler
flap.
2. Turn the tank lid counterclockwise.
3. Place the tank lid in the bracket attached to
the fuel filler flap.
Closing
1.
Fit the lid and turn it clockwise until you
clearly hear a click.
2. Close the fuel filler flap.
WARNING
The retaining strap of the fuel cap be
jammed and crushed during closing. In this
case, the lid cannot be correctly closed and
fuel vapors or fuel can escape. There is risk of
injuries or risk of property damage. Pay atten‐
tion that the retaining strap is not jammed or
crushed when closing the lid.◀
Manually unlocking fuel filler flap
E. g. in the event of an electrical malfunction.
Seite 250
Mobility Refueling
250
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
The release is located in the trunk.
1. Remove the cover on the right side trim.
2. Pull the green knob with the fuel pump
symbol. This releases the fuel filler flap.
Observe the following when
refueling
CAUTION
Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfill‐
ing of the fuel tank can damage the fuel sys‐
tem. On contact with painted surfaces, dam‐
age may occur to these surfaces. The
environment is polluted. There is risk of prop‐
erty damage. Avoid overfilling.◀
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Observe safety regulations posted at the gas
station.
Seite 251
Refueling Mobility
251
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Fuel
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Fuel recommendation
General information
Depending on the region, many gas stations
sell fuel that has been customized to winter or
summer conditions. Fuel that is available in
winter helps make a cold start easier, e.g.
Information
CAUTION
Even fuels that conform to the specifica‐
tions can be of low quality. This may cause en‐
gine problems, for instance poor engine start-
up behavior, poor handling and/or poor
performance. There is risk of property damage.
In case of engine problems, switch gas sta‐
tions or use a brand name fuel with a higher
octane rating.◀
Gasoline
For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline
should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur con‐
tent.
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐
taining metal must not be used.
CAUTION
Even small amounts of wrong fuel or
wrong fuel additives can damage the fuel sys‐
tem and the engine. Furthermore, the catalytic
converter is permanently damaged. There is
risk of property damage. Do not refuel or add
the following in the case of gasoline engines:
▷ Leaded gasoline.
▷ Metallic additives, e.g. manganese or iron.
Do not press the Start/Stop button after refuel‐
ing the wrong fuel. Contact a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.◀
Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of
25 %, i. e. E10 or E25, may be used for refuel‐
ing.
Ethanol should satisfy the following quality
standards:
US: ASTM 4806–xx
CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx
xx: comply with the current standard in each
case.
CAUTION
Wrong fuels can damage the fuel system
and the engine. There is risk of property dam‐
age. Do not use a fuel with a higher ethanol
percentage than recommended or one with
other types of alcohol, e.g. M5 to M100.◀
Recommended fuel grade
BMW recommends AKI 91.
Minimum fuel grade
BMW recommends AKI 89.
CAUTION
Fuel that does not comply with the mini‐
mum quality can compromise engine function
or cause engine damage. There is risk of prop‐
Seite 252
Mobility Fuel
252
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
erty damage. Do not fill with fuel that does not
comply with the minimum quality.◀
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat‐
ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds
when starting at high outside temperatures.
This has no effect on the engine life.
CAUTION
The use of poor-quality fuels may result
in harmful engine deposits or damage. Addi‐
tionally, problems relating to drivability, start‐
ing and stalling, especially under certain envi‐
ronmental conditions such as high ambient
temperature and high altitude, may occur.
If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐
ommend switching to a high quality gasoline
brand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐
ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐
gine deposits, it is highly recommended to
purchase gasoline from Top Tier retailers.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may result in the need for unscheduled main‐
tenance.◀
Seite 253
Fuel Mobility
253
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Wheels and tires
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Tire inflation pressure
Safety information
The tire characteristics and tire inflation pres‐
sure influence the following:
▷ The service life of the tires.
▷ Road safety.
▷ Driving comfort.
Checking the tire inflation pressure
WARNING
A tire with low or missing tire inflation
pressure impacts handling, such as steering
and braking response. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Regularly check the tire inflation pres‐
sure, and correct it as needed, e.g. twice a
month and before a long trip.◀
Also check the tire inflation pressure of the
emergency wheel in the trunk regularly, and
correct it as needed.
Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire in‐
flation pressure.
Tires heat up while driving, and the tire infla‐
tion pressure increases along with the tire's
temperature. The tire inflation pressure speci‐
fications relate to cold tires or tires with the
ambient temperature.
Only check the tire inflation pressure when the
tires are cold. This means after driving no more
than 1.25 miles/2 km or when the vehicle has
been parked for at least 2 hours.
The displays of inflation devices may under-
read by up to 0.1 bar, 2 psi.
For Flat Tire Monitor: after correcting the tire
inflation pressure, reinitialize the Flat Tire
Monitor.
For Tire Pressure Monitor: after correcting the
tire inflation pressure, reset the Tire Pressure
Monitor.
Tire inflation pressure specifications
The tire inflation pressure table, refer to
page 255, contains all tire inflation pressure
specifications for the specified tire sizes at the
ambient temperature. The tire inflation pres‐
sure values apply to tire sizes approved by the
manufacturer of the vehicle for the vehicle
type.
To identify the correct tire inflation pressure,
please note the following:
▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle.
▷ Maximum permitted driving speed.
Tire inflation pressures up to
100 mph/160 km/h
For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for
optimum driving comfort, note the pressure
values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer
to page 255, and adjust as necessary.
Seite 254
Mobility Wheels and tires
254
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
These pressure values can also be found on
the tire inflation pressure label on the driver's
door pillar.
Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/160 km/h.
Tire inflation pressure values up to
100 mph/160 km/h
740Li, 750i xDrive, 750Li xDrive
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
245/50 R 18 100 V
M+S A/S RSC
245/50 R 18 100 H
M+S RSC
2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35
245/45 R 19 102 V
M+S XL A/S RSC
245/45 R 19 102 V
M+S XL RSC
2.4 / 35 2.6 / 38
Front: 245/45 R 19
98 Y RSC
Rear: 275/40 R 19
101 Y RSC
2.5 / 36
-
-
2.5 / 36
Front: 245/40 R 20
99 Y XL RSC
Rear: 275/35 R 20
102 Y XL RSC
2.7 / 39
-
-
2.7 / 39
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Front: 245/35 R 21
96 Y XL RSC
Rear: 275/30 R 21
98 Y XL RSC
3.0 / 44
-
-
3.0 / 44
Emergency wheel:
T 135/80 R 18 104
M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
Tire inflation pressures at max.
speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h
WARNING
In order to drive at maximum speeds in
excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe,
and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for
speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the
relevant table on the following pages. Other‐
wise tire damage and accidents could occur.◀
Tire inflation pressure values over
100 mph/160 km/h
740Li, 750i xDrive, 750Li xDrive
Without high-speed tuning feature
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
245/50 R 18 100 V
M+S A/S RSC
245/50 R 18 100 H
M+S RSC
2.5 / 36 2.7 / 39
245/45 R 19 102 V
M+S XL A/S RSC
245/45 R 19 102 V
M+S XL RSC
2.7 / 39 2.9 /42
Seite 255
Wheels and tires Mobility
255
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Front: 245/45 R 19
98 Y RSC
Rear: 275/40 R 19
101 Y RSC
2.5 / 36
-
-
2.5 / 36
Front: 245/40 R 20
99 Y XL RSC
Rear: 275/35 R 20
102 Y XL RSC
2.7 / 39
-
-
2.7 / 39
Front: 245/35 R 21
96 Y XL RSC
Rear: 275/30 R 21
98 Y XL RSC
3.0 / 44
-
-
3.0 / 44
Emergency wheel:
T 135/80 R 18 104
M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
With high-speed tuning feature
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
245/50 R 18 100
H M+S RSC
2.5 / 36 2.7 / 39
245/45 R 19 102
V M+S XL RSC
2.9 /42 3.1 / 45
Front:
245/45 R 19 98 Y
RSC
Rear: 275/40 R 19
101 Y RSC
2.7 / 39
-
-
2.7 / 39
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Front:
245/40 R 20 99 Y
XL RSC
Rear: 275/35 R 20
102 Y XL RSC
3.0 / 44
-
-
3.0 / 44
Front:
245/35 R 21 96
Y XL RSC
Rear: 275/30 R 21
98 Y XL RSC
3.3 / 48
-
-
3.3 / 48
Emergency wheel:
T 135/80 R 18
104 M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
Tire identification marks
Tire size
245/45 R 18 96 Y
245: nominal width in mm
45: aspect ratio in %
R: radial tire code
18: rim diameter in inches
96: load rating, not for ZR tires
Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires
Speed letter
Q = up to 100 mph, 160 km/h
R = up to 106 mph, 170 km/h
S = up to 112 mph, 180 km/h
T = up to 118 mph, 190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph, 210 km/h
V = up to 150 mph, 240 km/h
W = up to 167 mph, 270 km/h
Y = up to 186 mph, 300 km/h
Seite 256
Mobility Wheels and tires
256
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Tire Identification Number
DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 0115
xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand
xxx: tire size and tire design
0115: tire age
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of
the U.S. Department of Transportation.
Tire age
DOT … 0115: the tire was manufactured in the
1st week of 2015.
Recommendation
Regardless of wear and tear, replace tires at
least every 6 years.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width.
For example: Treadwear 200; Traction AA;
Temperature A
DOT Quality Grades
Treadwear
Traction AA A B C
Temperature A B C
All passenger car tires must conform to Fed‐
eral Safety Requirements in addition to these
grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐
ernment test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and one-half, 1 g,
times as well on the government course as a
tire graded 100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart signifi‐
cantly from the norm due to variations in driv‐
ing habits, service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
are AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government
test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the ma‐
terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire
life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds
to a level of performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band
A represent higher levels of performance on
the laboratory test wheel than the minimum re‐
quired by law.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is es‐
tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐
tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
in combination, can cause heat buildup and
possible tire failure.◀
RSC – Run-flat tires
Run-flat tires, refer to page 260, are labeled
with a circular symbol containing the letters
RSC marked on the sidewall.
Seite 257
Wheels and tires Mobility
257
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
M+S
Winter and all-season tires with better cold
weather performance than summer tires.
Tire tread
Summer tires
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
0.12 in/3 mm.
There is an increased danger of hydroplaning if
the tire tread depth is less than 0.12 in/3 mm.
Winter tires
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
0.16 in/4 mm.
Below a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm, tires are
less suitable for winter operation.
Minimum tread depth
Wear indicators are distributed around the
tire's circumference and have the legally re‐
quired minimum height of 0.063 in/1.6 mm.
They are marked on the side of the tire with
TWI, Tread Wear Indicator.
Tire damage
General information
Inspect your tires often for damage, foreign
objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.
Information
Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces,
as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles
can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and
suspension parts. This is more likely to occur
with low-profile tires, which provide less cush‐
ioning between the wheel and the road. Be
careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your
speed, especially if your vehicle is equipped
with low-profile tires.
Indications of tire damage or other vehicle mal‐
functions:
▷ Unusual vibrations while driving.
▷ Unusual handling such as a strong ten‐
dency to pull to the left or right.
Damage can, e. g., be caused by driving over
curbs, road damage, or similar things.
WARNING
Damaged tires can lose tire inflation
pressure, which can lead to loss of vehicle
control. There is risk of an accident. If tire dam‐
age is suspected while driving, immediately re‐
duce speed and stop. Have wheels and tires
checked. For this purpose, drive carefully to
the nearest dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop. Have
vehicle towed or transported as needed.◀
WARNING
Damaged tires can lose tire inflation
pressure, which can lead to loss of vehicle
control. There is risk of an accident. Do not re‐
pair damaged tires, but have them replaced.◀
Changing wheels and tires
Mounting
Have mounting and wheel balancing carried
out by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Seite 258
Mobility Wheels and tires
258
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Wheel and tire combination
You can ask the dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop
about the right wheel/tire combination and
wheel rim versions for the vehicle.
Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair
the function of a variety of systems such as
ABS or DSC.
To maintain good handling and vehicle re‐
sponse, use only tires with a single tread con‐
figuration from a single manufacturer.
Following tire damage, have the original wheel
and tire combination remounted on the vehicle
as soon as possible.
WARNING
Wheels and tires which are not suitable
for your vehicle can damage parts of the vehi‐
cle, e. g. due to contact with the body due to
tolerances despite the same official size rating.
There is risk of an accident.◀
WARNING
Mounted steel wheels can cause techni‐
cal problems, e.g. independent loosening of
the lug bolts, damage to the brake discs. There
is risk of an accident. Do not mount steel
wheels.◀
Recommended tire brands
For each tire size, the manufacturer of your ve‐
hicle recommends certain tire brands. These
can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall.
New tires
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐
ing circumstances when tires are brand-new;
they achieve their full traction potential after a
break-in time.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Retreaded tires
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐
ommend the use of retreaded tires.
WARNING
Retreated tires can have different tire
casing structures. With advanced age the serv‐
ice life can be limited. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Do not use retreated tires.◀
Winter tires
Winter tires are recommended for operating on
winter roads.
Although so-called all-season M+S tires pro‐
vide better winter traction than summer tires,
they do not provide the same level of perform‐
ance as winter tires.
Maximum speed of winter tires
If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher
than the permissible speed for the winter tires,
then a respective symbol is displayed in your
field of vision. The plate is available from a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
With mounted winter tires, observe and adhere
to the permissible maximum speed.
Run-flat tires
If you are already using run-flat tires, for your
own safety you should replace them only with
the same kind. No spare tire is available in the
case of a flat tire. A dealer’s service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop
will be glad to answer additional questions at
any time.
Seite 259
Wheels and tires Mobility
259
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Rotating wheels between axles
Different wear patterns can occur on the front
and rear axles depending on individual driving
conditions. The tires can be rotated between
the axles to achieve even wear. A dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop will be glad to answer addi‐
tional questions at any time. After rotating,
check the tire pressure and correct if needed.
Rotating the tires is not permissible on vehi‐
cles with different tire sizes or rim sizes on the
front and rear axles.
Storage
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible.
Always protect tires against all contact with oil,
grease and fuels.
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐
sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.
Run-flat tires
Label
RSC label on the tire sidewall.
The wheels consist of tires that are self-sup‐
porting, to a limited degree, and possibly spe‐
cial rims.
The support of the sidewall allows the tire to
remain drivable to a restricted degree in the
event of a tire inflation pressure loss.
Follow the instructions for continued driving
with a flat tire.
Changing run-flat tires
For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. No
spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire. A
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop will be glad to an‐
swer additional questions at any time.
Repairing a flat tire
Safety measures
▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible
from passing traffic and on solid ground.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system.
▷ Secure the vehicle against rolling away by
setting the parking brake.
▷ Turn the steering wheel until the front
wheels are in the straight-ahead position
and engage the steering wheel lock.
▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the
vehicle and ensure that they remain out‐
side the immediate area in a safe place,
such as behind a guardrail.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an
appropriate distance.
Mobility System
The concept
With the Mobility System, minor tire damage
can be sealed quickly to enable continued
travel. To accomplish this, sealant is pumped
into the tires, which seals the damage from the
inside.
The compressor can be used to check the tire
inflation pressure.
Information
▷ Follow the instructions on using the Mobi‐
lity System found on the compressor and
sealant container.
Seite 260
Mobility Wheels and tires
260
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
▷ Use of the Mobility System may be ineffec‐
tive if the tire puncture measures approx.
1/8 in/4 mm or more.
▷ Contact a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair
shop if the tire cannot be made drivable.
▷ If possible, do not remove foreign bodies
that have penetrated the tire.
▷ Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant
container and apply it to the steering
wheel.
▷ The use of a sealant can damage the TPM
wheel electronics. In this case, have the
electronics checked at the next opportu‐
nity and have them replaced if needed.
Storage
The mobility system is in the left storage com‐
partment of the cargo area.
Sealant container
▷ Sealant container, arrow 1.
▷ Filling hose, arrow 2.
Observe use-by date on the sealant container.
Compressor
1 Bottle unlocking
2 Holder for bottle
3 Inflation pressure dial
4 Reduce inflation pressure
5 On/off switch
6 Compressor
7 Connector/cable for socket
8 Connection hose
Filling the tire with sealant
1.
Shake the sealant container.
Seite 261
Wheels and tires Mobility
261
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
2. Pull filling hose completely out of the cover
of the sealant container. Do not kink the
hose.
3. Slide the sealing container into the holder
on the compressor housing, ensuring that
it engages audibly.
4. Screw the filling hose of the sealant con‐
tainer onto the tire valve of the nonworking
wheel.
5. With the compressor switched off, insert
the plug into the power socket inside the
vehicle.
6. With operating readiness switched on or
the engine running, switch on the com‐
pressor.
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila‐
tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can
enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases con‐
tain carbon monoxide, an odorless and color‐
less but highly toxic gas. In enclosed areas, ex‐
haust gases can also accumulate outside of
the vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep the
exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient ventila‐
tion.◀
CAUTION
The compressor can overheat during ex‐
tended operation. There is risk of property
damage. Do not run the compressor for more
than 10 min.◀
Let the compressor run for max. 10 minutes to
fill the tire with sealant and achieve a tire infla‐
tion pressure of approx. 2.5 bar.
Seite 262
Mobility Wheels and tires
262
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
While the tire is being filled with sealant, the
tire inflation pressure may sporadically reach
approx. 5 bar. Do not switch off the compres‐
sor at this point.
If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar is not
reached:
1. Switch off the compressor.
2. Unscrew the filling hose from the wheel.
3. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to dis‐
tribute the sealant in the tire.
4. Inflate the tire again using the compressor.
If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar cannot be
reached, contact your dealer’s service cen‐
ter or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Stowing the Mobility System
1.
Unscrew the filling hose of the sealant con‐
tainer from the wheel.
2. After pressing the red unlock button on the
compressor, remove the sealing container.
3. Wrap the empty sealant container in suita‐
ble material to avoid dirtying the trunk.
4. Stow the Mobility System back in the vehi‐
cle.
Distributing the sealant
Immediately drive approx. 5 miles/10 km to en‐
sure that the sealant is evenly distributed in the
tire.
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
If possible, do not drive at speeds less than
12 mph/20 km/h.
To correct the tire inflation pressure
1. Stop at a suitable location.
2. Screw the connection hose of the com‐
pressor directly onto the tire valve stem.
3. Insert the connector into the power socket
inside the vehicle.
4. Correct the tire inflation pressure to at
least 2.0 bar.
▷ Increase pressure: with operating read‐
iness switched on or the engine run‐
ning, switch on the compressor.
▷ To reduce the pressure: press the but‐
ton on the compressor.
Continuing the trip
Do not exceed the maximum permissible
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor.
Replace the nonworking tire and the sealant
container of the Mobility System as soon as
possible.
Seite 263
Wheels and tires Mobility
263
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Snow chains
Fine-link snow chains
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
use of fine-link snow chains. Certain types of
fine-link snow chains have been tested by the
manufacturer of the vehicle and recommended
as road-safe and suitable.
Information regarding suitable snow chains is
available from a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Use
Use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped
with the tires of the following size:
▷ 245/50 R 18.
▷ 245/45 R 19.
Follow the snow chain manufacturer's instruc‐
tions.
Make sure that the snow chains are always
sufficiently tight. Retighten as needed accord‐
ing to the chain manufacturer's instructions.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after
mounting snow chains, as doing so may result
in incorrect readings.
Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor after
mounting snow chains, as doing so may result
in incorrect readings.
When driving with snow chains, briefly activate
Dynamic Traction Control if needed.
Maximum speed with snow chains
Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h
when using snow chains.
Rear wheel steering during operation
with snow chains
General information
In order to guarantee free running of the
wheels when operating with snow chains, the
rear wheel steering of the integral active steer‐
ing must be switched off when snow chains
are mounted. For this, it is possible to confirm
via iDrive that snow chains are mounted.
Information
WARNING
When rear wheel steering is switched on
and snow chains are mounted, there can be
contact between snow chains and the chassis.
There is risk of accidents or risk of property
damage. With mounted snow chains, switch
off the rear wheel steering.◀
Switching off rear wheel steering
With the setting that snow chains are
mounted, the rear wheel steering is switched
off.
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Tire chains"
4. "Tire chains installed"
Starting with the permissible maximum speed
with snow chains of 30 mph/50 km/h the rear
wheel steering will be switched on automati‐
cally.
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
The concept
The system monitors tire inflation pressure in
the four mounted tires. The system warns you
if there is a loss of pressure in one or more
tires. For this purpose, sensors in the tire
valves measure the tire inflation pressure and
tire temperature.
Information
With use of the system observe further infor‐
mation found under Tire inflation pressure, re‐
fer to page 254.
Seite 264
Mobility Wheels and tires
264
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Functional requirements
The system must have been reset with the
correct tire inflation pressure; otherwise, relia‐
ble signaling of tire inflation pressure loss is
not assured.
Reset the system after each adjustment of the
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
wheel change.
Always use wheels with TPM electronics to
ensure that the system will operate properly.
Status display
The current status of the Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM can be displayed, e.g., whether or not
the TPM is active.
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
The status is displayed.
Status control display
Tire and system status are indicated by the
color of the wheels and a text message on the
Control Display.
All wheels green
System is active and will issue a warning rela‐
tive to the tire inflation pressures stored during
the last reset.
One to four wheels, yellow
A flat tire or major drop in tire inflation pressure
in the indicated tires.
Wheels, gray
The system cannot detect a flat tire. Reasons
for this may be:
▷ The system is being reset.
▷ Malfunction.
Status information
The status control display additionally shows
the current tire inflation pressures and, de‐
pending on the model, tire temperatures. It
shows the actual values read; they may vary
depending on driving style or weather condi‐
tions.
Carry out reset
Reset the system after each adjustment of the
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
wheel change.
Via iDrive and in the vehicle:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. Tire Pressure Monitor reset
4. Start the engine - do not drive off.
5. Reset tire inflation pressure: "Perform
reset".
6. Drive away.
The wheels are displayed in gray and the sta‐
tus "Resetting Tire Pressure Monitor…" is dis‐
played.
After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/h for a
short period, the set tire inflation pressures are
accepted as reference values. The reset is
completed automatically while driving.
After a successfully completed Reset, the
wheels on the Control Display are shown in
green and "Tire Pressure Monitor active. For
recommended pressures, see tire pressure
label." is displayed.
You may interrupt this trip at any time. When
you continue the reset resumes automatically.
Messages
Required tire inflation pressure check
message
A Check Control message is displayed.
Seite 265
Wheels and tires Mobility
265
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
▷ The system has detected a wheel change,
but no reset was done.
▷ No reset was performed for the system.
The system therefore issues a warning
based on the tire inflation pressures before
the last reset.
▷ Inflation was not carried out according to
specifications.
▷ The tire inflation pressure has fallen below
the level of the last reset.
In these cases:
1. Check the tire pressure and correct as
needed.
2. Reset the system.
Message in case of low tire pressure
The yellow warning lamp lights up.
A Check Control message is displayed.
▷ There is a tire inflation pressure loss.
▷ No reset was performed for the system.
The system therefore issues a warning
based on the tire inflation pressures before
the last reset.
In these cases:
1.
Reduce your speed and drive moderately.
Do not exceed a speed of
80 mph/130 km/h.
2. At the next opportunity, e.g. gas station,
check and if necessary correct the tire in‐
flation pressure in all four tires.
3. Reset the system.
Message in case of sharp tire inflation
pressure loss
The yellow warning lamp lights up.
A symbol with the affected tires will be dis‐
played in the Check Control message.
▷ There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire in‐
flation pressure.
▷ No reset was performed for the system.
The system therefore issues a warning
based on the tire inflation pressures before
the last reset.
In these cases:
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
normal tires or run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 260, are la‐
beled with a circular symbol containing the
letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.
WARNING
A damaged regular tire with low or miss‐
ing tire inflation pressure impacts handling,
such as steering and braking response. Run-
flat tires can maintain limited stability. There is
risk of an accident. Do not continue driving if
the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires.
Observe the information on run-flat tires and
continued driving with these tires.◀
A low tire inflation pressure might turn on DSC
Dynamic Stability Control.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Normal tires
1.
Identify the damaged tire.
Do this by checking the air pressure in all
four tires.
The tire pressure gauge of the Mobility
System, refer to page 260, can be used for
this purpose.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
is shown to be correct, it is possible that
the Tire Pressure Monitor did not perform
a reset. Then perform the reset.
Seite 266
Mobility Wheels and tires
266
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
If identification of flat tire damage is not
possible, please contact a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center
or repair shop.
2. Fixing a flat tire, where applicable with the
Mobility System.
3. Replacing a damaged tire, where applica‐
ble with the emergency wheel.
Use of sealant, e.g., the Mobility System, may
damage the TPM wheel electronics. In this
case, have the electronics checked at the next
opportunity and have them replaced if needed.
Run-flat tires
Maximum speed
You may continue driving with a damaged tire
at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Continued driving with a flat tire
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
1.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at
the next opportunity.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
is shown to be correct, it is possible that
the Tire Pressure Monitor did not perform
a reset. In that case, carry out a reset.
Possible driving distance with complete loss of
tire inflation pressure:
The possible driving distance after a loss of tire
inflation pressure depends on cargo load, driv‐
ing style and road conditions.
A vehicle with an average load has a possible
driving range of approx. 50 miles/80 km.
A vehicle with a damaged tire reacts differ‐
ently, e.g., it has reduced lane stability during
braking, a longer braking distance and different
self-steering properties. Adjust your driving
style accordingly. Avoid abrupt steering ma‐
neuvers or driving over obstacles, e.g., curbs,
potholes, etc.
Because the possible driving distance de‐
pends on how the vehicle is used during the
trip, the actual distance may be shorter or lon‐
ger depending on the driving speed, road con‐
ditions, external temperature, cargo load, etc.
WARNING
Your vehicle handles differently when a
run-flat tire is damaged and has low or missing
tire inflation pressure, e.g., your lane stability is
reduced when braking, braking distances are
longer and the self-steering properties will
change. There is risk of an accident.
Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.◀
System limits
The system does not function properly if a re‐
set has not been carried out, e.g., a flat tire is
reported though tire inflation pressures are
correct.
The tire inflation pressure depends on the
tire's temperature. Driving or exposure to the
sun will increase the tire's temperature, thus
increasing the tire inflation pressure. The tire
inflation pressure is reduced when the tire
temperature falls again. These circumstances
may cause a warning when temperatures fall
very sharply.
The system cannot indicate sudden serious
tire damage caused by external circumstances.
Malfunction
The yellow warning lamp flashes and
then lights up continuously. A Check
Control message is displayed. No flat
tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can be de‐
tected.
Examples and recommendations in the follow‐
ing situations:
▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is
mounted, e.g. emergency wheel: Have it
Seite 267
Wheels and tires Mobility
267
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
checked by a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair
shop as needed.
▷ Malfunction: Have system checked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset.
Reset the system again.
▷ Interference through systems or devices
with the same radio frequency: After leav‐
ing the area of the interference, the system
automatically becomes active again.
Declaration according to NHTSA/
FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring
System
Each tire, including the spare (if provided)
should be checked monthly when cold and in‐
flated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres‐
sure telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when
the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pres‐
sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel ef‐
ficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also
been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indi‐
cator to indicate when the system is not oper‐
ating properly. The TPMS malfunction indica‐
tor is combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a malfunc‐
tion, the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously illumi‐
nated. This sequence will continue upon sub‐
sequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal‐
function exists. When the malfunction indicator
is illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replace‐
ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning prop‐
erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction tell‐
tale after replacing one or more tires or wheels
on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement
or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
FTM Flat Tire Monitor
The concept
The system detects tire inflation pressure loss
on the basis of rotation speed differences be‐
tween the individual wheels while driving.
In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, the
diameter and therefore the rotational speed of
the corresponding wheel changes. This will be
detected and reported as a flat tire.
The system does not measure the actual infla‐
tion pressure in the tires.
Functional requirements
The system must have been initialized when
the tire inflation pressure was correct; other‐
wise, reliable flagging of a flat tire is not as‐
sured. Initialize the system after each correc‐
tion of the tire inflation pressure and after
every tire or wheel change.
Seite 268
Mobility Wheels and tires
268
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Status display
The current status of the flat tire monitor can
be displayed, e.g., whether the RPA is active.
About iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
The status is displayed.
Initialization
When initializing the once set inflation tire
pressures serve as reference values in order to
detect a flat tire. Initialization is started by con‐
firming the tire inflation pressures.
Do not initialize the system when driving with
snow chains.
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. Flat Tire Monitor reset
4. Start the engine - do not drive off.
5. Start the initialization: "Perform reset"
6. Drive away.
The initialization is completed while driving,
which can be interrupted at any time.
The initialization automatically continues when
driving resumes.
Indication of a flat tire
The yellow warning lamp lights up. A
Check Control message is displayed.
There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire
inflation pressure.
1.
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
normal tires or run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 260, are la‐
beled with a circular symbol containing the
letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.
WARNING
A damaged regular tire with low or miss‐
ing tire inflation pressure impacts handling,
such as steering and braking response. Run-
flat tires can maintain limited stability. There is
risk of an accident. Do not continue driving if
the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires.
Observe the information on run-flat tires and
continued driving with these tires.◀
When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐
bility Control is switched on if needed.
System limits
A natural, even tire inflation pressure loss in all
four tires will not be recognized. Therefore,
check the tire inflation pressure regularly.
Sudden serious tire damage caused by exter‐
nal circumstances cannot be recognized in ad‐
vance.
The system could be delayed or malfunction in
the following situations:
▷ When the system has not been initialized.
▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road
surface.
▷ Sporty driving style: spinning traction
wheels, high lateral acceleration (drifting).
▷ When driving with snow chains.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Normal tires
1.
Identify the damaged tire.
Do this by checking the air pressure in all
four tires.
The tire pressure gauge of the Mobility
System, refer to page 260, can be used for
this purpose.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not
Seite 269
Wheels and tires Mobility
269
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
have been initialized. In this case, initialize
the system.
If identification of flat tire damage is not
possible, please contact a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center
or repair shop.
2. Fix the flat tire using the Mobility System,
refer to page 260.
Run-flat tires
Maximum speed
You may continue driving with a damaged tire
at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Continued driving with a flat tire
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
1.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at
the next opportunity.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not
have been initialized. In this case, initialize
the system.
Possible driving distance with complete loss of
tire inflation pressure:
The possible driving distance after a loss of tire
inflation pressure depends on cargo load, driv‐
ing style and road conditions.
A vehicle with an average load has a possible
driving range of approx. 50 miles/80 km.
A vehicle with a damaged tire reacts differ‐
ently, e.g., it has reduced lane stability during
braking, a longer braking distance and different
self-steering properties. Adjust your driving
style accordingly. Avoid abrupt steering ma‐
neuvers or driving over obstacles, e.g., curbs,
potholes, etc.
Because the possible driving distance de‐
pends on how the vehicle is used during the
trip, the actual distance may be shorter or lon‐
ger depending on the driving speed, road con‐
ditions, external temperature, cargo load, etc.
WARNING
Your vehicle handles differently when a
run-flat tire is damaged and has low or missing
tire inflation pressure, e.g., your lane stability is
reduced when braking, braking distances are
longer and the self-steering properties will
change. There is risk of an accident.
Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.◀
Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐
cate the final failure of a tire.
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of
the tire could come loose and cause an acci‐
dent.
Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Seite 270
Mobility Wheels and tires
270
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Engine compartment
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Important features in the engine comp.
1 Washer fluid reservoir
2 Jump-starting, positive battery terminal
3 Oil filler neck
4 Coolant reservoir, engine
5 Gasoline engine only: coolant reservoir, air
conditioning
6 Jump-starting, negative battery terminal
7 Vehicle identification number
Seite 271
Engine compartment Mobility
271
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Hood
Information
WARNING
Improperly executed work in the engine
compartment can damage components and
lead to a safety risk. There is risk of accidents
or risk of property damage.◀
WARNING
The engine compartment accommo‐
dates moving components. Certain compo‐
nents can move in the engine compartment
with the vehicle switched off, e.g. the cooler
fan. There is risk of injuries. Do not reach into
the area of moving parts. Keep articles of
clothing and hair away from moving parts.◀
CAUTION
Folded-away wipers can be jammed
when the hood is opened. There is risk of
property damage. Make sure that the wipers
with the wiper blades mounted are folded
down onto the windshield before opening the
hood.◀
WARNING
There are protruding parts, e.g. lock
hook, on the inside of the hood. There is risk of
injuries. If the hood is open, pay attention to
protruding parts and keep these areas clear.◀
WARNING
An incorrectly locked hood can open
while driving and restrict visibility. There is risk
of an accident. Stop immediately and correctly
close the hood.◀
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed on opening
and closing the hood. There is risk of injuries.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
hood is clear during opening and closing.◀
Opening the hood
1. Pull lever, arrow 1.
Hood is unlocked.
2. After the lever is released, pull the lever
again, arrow 2.
Hood can be opened.
3. Be careful of protruding parts on the hood.
Closing the hood
Let the hood drop from a height of approx. 16
in/40 cm and push down on it to lock it fully.
The hood must audibly engage on both sides.
Seite 272
Mobility Engine compartment
272
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Engine oil
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
General information
The engine oil consumption is dependent on
the driving style and driving conditions.
The engine oil consumption can increase in
the following situations, for example:
▷ Sporty driving style.
▷ Break-in of the engine.
▷ Idling of the engine.
▷ With use of engine oil types that are not
approved.
Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level
after refueling.
The vehicle is equipped with electronic oil
measurement.
The electronic oil measurement has two meas‐
uring principles:
▷ Status display
▷ Detailed measurement
Electronic oil measurement
Status display
The concept
The engine oil level is monitored electronically
while driving and shown on the Control Dis‐
play.
If the engine oil level reaches the minimum
level, a check control message is displayed.
Requirements
A current measured value is available after ap‐
prox. 30 minutes of driving. During a shorter
trip, the status of the last, sufficiently long trip
is displayed.
With frequent short-distance trips, regularly
perform a detailed measurement.
Displaying the engine oil level
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
4. "Measure engine oil level"
The engine oil level is displayed.
Engine oil level display messages
Different messages appear on the Control Dis‐
play depending on the engine oil level. Pay at‐
tention to these messages.
If the engine oil level is too low within the next
125 miles/200 km, add engine oil, refer to
page 274.
CAUTION
A too low engine oil level causes engine
damage. There is risk of property damage. Im‐
mediately add engine oil.◀
Seite 273
Engine oil Mobility
273
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Take care not to add too much engine oil.
CAUTION
Too much engine oil can damage the en‐
gine or the catalytic converter. There is risk of
property damage. Do not add too much engine
oil. Have too much engine oil siphoned off by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.◀
Detailed measurement
The concept
In the detailed measurement the engine oil
level is checked and displayed via a scale.
Gasoline engine:
If the engine oil level reaches the minimum
level, a check control message is displayed.
Diesel engine:
During the measurement, the idle speed is in‐
creased somewhat.
General information
A detailed measurement is only possible with
certain engines.
Requirements
▷ Vehicle is on level road.
▷ Selector lever in selector lever position N
or P and accelerator pedal not depressed.
▷ Engine is running and is at operating tem‐
perature.
Performing a detailed measurement
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Measure engine oil level"
4. "Start measurement"
The engine oil level is checked and displayed
via a scale.
Time: approx. 1 minute.
Adding engine oil
Information
CAUTION
A too low engine oil level causes engine
damage. There is risk of property damage.
Add engine oil within the next
125 miles/200 km.◀
CAUTION
Too much engine oil can damage the en‐
gine or the catalytic converter. There is risk of
property damage. Do not add too much engine
oil. Have too much engine oil siphoned off by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.◀
WARNING
Operating materials, e.g. oils, greases,
coolants, fuels, can contain harmful ingredi‐
ents. There is risk of injuries or danger to life.
Observe the instructions on the containers.
Avoid the contact of articles of clothing, skin or
eyes with operating materials. Do not refill op‐
erating materials into different bottles. Store
operating materials out of reach of children.◀
General information
Establish idle state and safely park the vehicle
before engine oil is added.
Overview
The oil filler neck is located in the engine com‐
partment, refer to page 271.
Opening the oil filler neck
Only add engine oil when the message is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster. The quantity
to be added is indicated in the message dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
1.
Opening the hood, refer to page 272
Seite 274
Mobility Engine oil
274
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
2. Turn the oil filler neck counter-clockwise,
arrow.
3. Add motor oil.
Engine oil types to add
Information
CAUTION
Oil additives can damage the engine.
There is risk of property damage. Do not use
oil additives.◀
CAUTION
Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunc‐
tions in the engine or damage it. There is risk
of property damage. When selecting an engine
oil, make sure that the engine oil has the cor‐
rect viscosity grade.◀
The engine oil quality is critical for the life of
the engine.
Viscosity grades
When selecting an engine oil, ensure that the
engine oil belongs to one of the viscosity
grades SAE 0W-40, SAE 0W-30, SAE 5W-40,
SAE 5W-30, 0W-20 or 5W-20.
The viscosity grades 0W-20 and 5W-20 are
only suitable for particular engines.
Suitable engine oil types
Add engine oils that meet the following oil rat‐
ing standards:
Gasoline engine
BMW Longlife-01.
BMW Longlife-01 FE.
BMW Longlife-14 FE+.
The oil rating BMW Longlife-14 FE+ is only
suitable for particular gasoline motors.
More information about suitable engine oil rat‐
ings and viscosities of engine oils can be re‐
quested from a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Alternative engine oil types
If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is
not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an en‐
gine oil with the following oil rating can be
added:
Gasoline engine
API SL or superior oil rating.
Engine oil change
CAUTION
Engine oil that is not changed in timely
fashion can cause increased engine wear and
thus engine damage. There is risk of property
damage. Do not exceed the service data indi‐
cated in the vehicle.◀
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that
you let the dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop change
the motor oil.
Seite 275
Engine oil Mobility
275
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Seite 276
Mobility Engine oil
276
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Coolant
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Information
WARNING
With the engine hot and the cooling sys‐
tem open, coolant can escape and lead to
burns. There is risk of injuries. Only open the
cooling system with the engine cooled down.◀
WARNING
Additives are harmful and incorrect addi‐
tives can damage the engine. There is risk of
injuries and risk of property damage. Avoid the
contact of articles of clothing, skin or eyes with
additives. Do not swallow any additives. Use
suitable additives only.◀
Coolant consists of water and additives.
Not all commercially available additives are
suitable for the vehicle. Information about suit‐
able additives is available from a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Coolant level
General information
Vehicles with gasoline engine feature two
cooling circuits. Always check the coolant lev‐
els of both coolant reservoirs and refill as
needed.
The coolant level is indicted using minimum
and maximum markings. Depending on the
coolant reservoir, the minimum and maximum
markings are located at different locations.
Overview
Opening the hood, refer to page 272
Depending on the engine installation, the cool‐
ant reservoir is located on the right side or the
left side of the engine compartment, refer to
page 271.
Checking the coolant level in the filler
neck
1.
Let the engine cool.
2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
counterclockwise to allow any excess
pressure to dissipate, then open it.
3. Open the coolant reservoir lid.
4. The coolant level is correct if it lies be‐
tween the minimum and maximum marks
in the filler neck.
Adding
1.
Let the engine cool.
2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
counterclockwise to allow any excess
pressure to dissipate, then open it.
Seite 277
Coolant Mobility
277
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
3. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up
to the specified level; do not overfill.
4. Turn the lid until there is an audible click.
The arrows on the coolant reservoir and
the lid must point towards one another.
5. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi‐
nated as soon as possible.
Disposal
Comply with the relevant environmen‐
tal protection regulations when dispos‐
ing of coolant and coolant additives.
Seite 278
Mobility Coolant
278
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Maintenance
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
BMW maintenance system
The maintenance system indicates required
maintenance measures, and thereby provides
support in maintaining road safety and the op‐
erational reliability of the vehicle.
In some cases scopes and intervals may vary
according to the country-specific version. Re‐
placement work, spare parts, fuels and lubri‐
cants and wear materials are calculated sepa‐
rately. Further information is available from a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Condition Based Service
CBS
Sensors and special algorithms take into ac‐
count the driving conditions of your vehicle.
Based on this, Condition Based Service recog‐
nizes the maintenance requirements.
The system makes it possible to adapt the
amount of maintenance corresponding to your
user profile.
Detailed information on service requirements,
refer to page 119, can be displayed on the
Control Display.
Service data in the remote control
Information on the required maintenance is
continuously stored in the remote control. The
dealer’s service center can read this data out
and suggest an optimized maintenance scope
for your vehicle.
Therefore, hand the service advisor the remote
control with which the vehicle was driven most
recently.
Storage periods
Storage periods during which the vehicle bat‐
tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐
count.
If this occurs, have a dealer's service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop
update the time-dependent maintenance pro‐
cedures, such as checking brake fluid and, if
necessary, changing the engine oil and the mi‐
crofilter/activated-charcoal filter.
Service and Warranty
Information Booklet for US
models and Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
Please consult your Service and Warranty In‐
formation Booklet for US models and Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐
els for additional information on service re‐
quirements.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that maintenance and repair be performed by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop. Records of regu‐
lar maintenance and repair work should be re‐
tained.
Seite 279
Maintenance Mobility
279
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Socket for OBD Onboard
Diagnosis
Information
CAUTION
Improper use of the socket for Onboard
Diagnosis can lead to vehicle malfunctions.
There is risk of property damage. The manu‐
facturer of your vehicle strongly recommends
access to the socket for Onboard Diagnosis be
limited to a dealer's service center, another
qualified service center or repair shop or other
authorized persons.◀
Position
There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for
checking the primary components in the vehi‐
cle's emissions.
Emissions
▷ The warning lamp lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating. Have
the vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
▷ The warning lamp flashes under certain
circumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive mis‐
firing in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the
system checked immediately; otherwise,
serious engine misfiring within a brief pe‐
riod can seriously damage emission con‐
trol components, in particular the catalytic
converter.
Seite 280
Mobility Maintenance
280
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Replacing components
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Onboard vehicle tool kit
The onboard vehicle tool kit is located in the
left storage compartment of the cargo area.
Wiper blade replacement
Information
CAUTION
If the wiper arm falls onto the windshield
without the wiper blades installed, the wind‐
shield can be damaged. There is risk of prop‐
erty damage. Secure the wiper arm when re‐
placing the wiper blades and do not fold down
the wipers without the wiper blades installed.◀
CAUTION
Folded-away wipers can be jammed
when the hood is opened. There is risk of
property damage. Make sure that the wipers
with the wiper blades mounted are folded
down onto the windshield before opening the
hood.◀
Replacing the front wiper blades
1. To change the wiper blades, fold up, refer
to page 105, the wiper arms.
2. Lift the wiper all the way off of the wind‐
shield.
3. Press button, arrow 1, and pull out the
wiper blade, arrow 2.
4. Insert the new wiper blade and press it on
until it you hear it snap into the holder.
5. Fold down the wipers.
Seite 281
Replacing components Mobility
281
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Lights and bulbs
General information
Lights and bulbs make an essential contribu‐
tion to vehicle safety.
All headlights and lights are made using LED
or laser technology.
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that
you let a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop perform
the work in case of a malfunction.
Information
Lights and bulbs
DANGER
There can be high voltage in the lighting
system. There is danger to life. The manufac‐
turer of your vehicle recommends that the
work on the lighting system including bulb re‐
placement be performed by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.◀
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
Some items of equipment use light-emitting
diodes installed behind a cover as a light
source.
These light-emitting diodes, which are related
to conventional lasers, are officially designated
as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.
WARNING
Too intensive brightness can irritate or
damage the retina of the eye. There is risk of
injuries. Do not look directly into the headlights
or other light sources for an extended period of
time. Do not remove the LED covers.◀
Headlight glass
Condensation can form on the inside of the ex‐
ternal lights in cool or humid weather. When
driving with the lights switched on, the con‐
densation evaporates after a short time. The
headlight glass does not need to be changed.
If despite driving with the lights switched on,
increasing humidity forms, e. g. water droplets
in the lamp, the manufacturer of your vehicle
recommends having it checked by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Changing wheels
Information
When using run-flat tires or sealants, a tire
does not need to be changed immediately in
the event of pressure loss due to a flat tire.
The tools for changing wheels are available as
accessories from your dealer’s service center
or another qualified service center or repair
shop.
Jacking points for the vehicle jack
The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐
cated at the positions shown.
Emergency wheel
Safety measures
▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible
from passing traffic and on solid ground.
Switch on the hazard warning system.
▷ Set the parking brake and engage lever in
position P P.
Seite 282
Mobility Replacing components
282
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the
vehicle and ensure that they remain out‐
side the immediate area in a safe place,
such as behind a guardrail.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle or
portable hazard warning lamp at an appro‐
priate distance.
▷ Perform wheel change only on a flat, solid
and slip-resistant surface. On soft or slip‐
pery ground, e.g., snow, ice, tiles, etc., the
vehicle or vehicle jack can slip away to the
side.
▷ Do not place wood blocks or similar items
under the vehicle jack; otherwise, it cannot
reach its carrying capacity because of the
restricted height.
▷ If the vehicle is raised, do not lie under the
vehicle and do not start the engine; other‐
wise, a fatal hazard exists.
Information
WARNING
The vehicle jack is optimized for lifting
the vehicle and for the jacking points on the
vehicle only. There is risk of injuries. Do not lift
any other vehicle or cargo using the vehicle
jack.◀
Removing the emergency wheel
The emergency wheel and the tools are lo‐
cated in the trunk under the cargo floor panel.
1.
Remove the cargo floor panel. To do this,
pull the floor upward directly behind the
rear backrests.
2. Loosen the lashing straps.
3. Remove tool holder.
4. Remove emergency wheel.
Prepare wheel change
1.
Follow the Safety instructions, refer to
page 283.
2. With the wheel chock from the onboard ve‐
hicle tool kit, also secure the vehicle
against rolling away at the front wheel of
the opposite side. For this, place the wheel
chock behind the front wheel diagonally
across.
3. Switching off the air suspension, refer to
page 200.
4. Loosen the wheel lug bolts a half turn.
Jacking up the vehicle
1.
Place the vehicle jack at the jacking point
closest to the wheel such that the vehicle
jack foot is vertically beneath the vehicle
Seite 283
Replacing components Mobility
283
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
jacking point with the entire surface on the
ground.
2. Insert the vehicle jack head in the rectan‐
gular recess of the jacking point for crank‐
ing it up.
3. Crank it up until the wheel in question lifts
off of the ground.
Wheel mounting
Mount one emergency wheel only.
1.
Unscrew the wheel lug bolts and remove
the wheel.
2. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel on
and screw in at least two bolts.
If original BMW light alloy wheels are not
mounted, any accompanying lug bolts also
have to be used.
3. Screw in the remaining the lug bolts and
tighten all bolts well in a crosswise pattern.
4. Lower the vehicle and remove the vehicle
jack.
After the wheel change
1.
Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The tight‐
ening torque is 101 lb ft/140 Nm.
2. Stow the nonworking wheel in the trunk.
The nonworking wheel cannot be stored
under the cargo floor panel because of its
size.
3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next op‐
portunity and correct as needed.
4. Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor.
5. Check to make sure the lug bolts are tight
with a calibrated torque wrench.
6. Replace the damaged tires as soon as pos‐
sible.
Driving with emergency wheel
WARNING
The emergency wheel has particular di‐
mensions. When driving with an emergency
wheel, changed driving properties may occur
at higher speeds, e.g. reduced lane stability
when braking, longer braking distance and
changed self-steering properties in the limit
area. There is risk of an accident. Drive moder‐
ately and do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.◀
Vehicle battery
Maintenance
The battery is maintenance-free.
The added amount of acid is sufficient for the
service life of the battery.
More information about the battery can be re‐
quested from a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Battery replacement
CAUTION
Vehicle batteries that are not compatible
can damage vehicle systems and impair vehi‐
cle functions.There is risk of property damage.
Information on the compatible vehicle batteries
is available at your dealer's service center.◀
After a battery replacement, the manufacturer
of your vehicle recommends that the vehicle
battery be registered on the vehicle by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop to ensure that all
comfort features are fully available and that any
Seite 284
Mobility Replacing components
284
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Check Control messages of these comfort fea‐
tures are no longer displayed.
Charging the battery
General information
Make sure that the battery is always suffi‐
ciently charged to guarantee that the battery
remains usable for its full service life.
The battery may need to be charged in the fol‐
lowing cases:
▷ When making frequent short-distance
drives.
▷ If the vehicle is not used for prolonged pe‐
riods, longer than a month.
Information
CAUTION
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery
can work with high voltages and currents,
which means that the 12V on-board network
can be overloaded or damaged. There is risk of
property damage. Only connect battery charg‐
ers for the vehicle battery to the starting aid
terminals in the engine compartment.◀
Starting aid terminals
In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the
starting aid terminals, refer to page 288, in the
engine compartment with the engine off.
Power failure
After a temporary power loss, some equipment
needs to be newly initialized or individual set‐
tings updated, e. g.:
▷ Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory:
store the positions again.
▷ Time: update.
▷ Date: update.
▷ Glass sunroof: initialize the system, refer to
page 75.
Disposing of old batteries
Have old batteries disposed of by a
dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop
or take them to a collection point.
Maintain the battery in an upright position for
transport and storage. Secure the battery so
that it does not tip over during transport.
Fuses
Information
WARNING
Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload
electrical lines and components. There is risk
of fire. Never attempt to repair a blown fuse
and do not replace a nonworking fuse with a
substitute of another color or amperage rat‐
ing.◀
In the trunk
Remove the cover on the right side trim, arrow.
Information on the fuse types and locations is
found on a separate sheet.
Seite 285
Replacing components Mobility
285
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Hazard warning flashers
The button is located in the center console.
Intelligent Emergency
Request
The concept
In case of an emergency, an Emergency Re‐
quest can be made through this system.
General information
Only press the SOS button in an emergency.
For technical reasons, the Emergency Request
cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable con‐
ditions.
Overview
SOS button in the roofliner.
Requirements
▷ The SIM card integrated in the vehicle has
been activated.
▷ Operating readiness is switched on.
▷ The Assist system is functional.
Initiating an Emergency Request
1.
Touch the cover.
2. Press the SOS button and hold until the
LED on the microphone lights up green.
▷ The LED lights up green: an Emergency
Request was initiated.
If a cancel prompt appears on the display,
the Emergency Request can be aborted.
If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle
until the voice connection has been estab‐
lished.
▷ The LED flashes green when a connection
to the BMW Response Center has been
established.
When the emergency request is received
at the BMW Response Center, the BMW
Seite 286
Mobility Breakdown assistance
286
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Response Center contacts you and takes
further steps to help you.
Even if you are unable to respond, the
BMW Response Center can take further
steps to help you under certain circum‐
stances.
For this, data are transmitted to the BMW
Response Center which serve to deter‐
mine the necessary rescue measures. E. g.
the current position of the vehicle, if it can
be established.
▷ If the LED is flashing green, but the BMW
Response Center can no longer be heard
via the speaker, you can nevertheless still
be heard at the BMW Response Center.
Initiating an Emergency Request
automatically
Under certain conditions, an Emergency Re‐
quest is automatically initiated immediately af‐
ter a severe accident. Automatic Collision Noti‐
fication is not affected by pressing the SOS
button.
Warning triangle
The warning triangle is located on the inside of
the trunk lid.
Press on the release, arrow 1, and swivel the
cover down, arrow 2.
First-aid kit
Information
Some of the articles have a limited service life.
Check the expiration dates of the contents
regularly and replace any expired items
promptly.
Storage
The first-aid kit is located in the left storage
compartment of the cargo area.
Jump-starting
General information
If the battery is discharged, the engine can be
started using the battery of another vehicle
and two jumper cables. Only use jumper ca‐
bles with fully insulated clamp handles.
Information
DANGER
Contact with live components can lead to
an electric shock. There is risk of injuries or
danger to life. Do not touch any components
that are under voltage.◀
To prevent personal injury or damage to both
vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce‐
dure.
Seite 287
Breakdown assistance Mobility
287
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Preparation
CAUTION
In the case of body contact between the
two vehicles, a short circuit can occur during
jump-starting. There is risk of property dam‐
age. Make sure that no body contact occurs.◀
1. Check whether the battery of the other ve‐
hicle has a voltage of 12 volts. This infor‐
mation can be found on the battery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐
cle.
3. Switch off any electronic systems/power
consumers in both vehicles.
Starting aid terminals
WARNING
If the jumper cables are connected in the
incorrect order, sparks formation can occur.
There is risk of injuries. Pay attention to the
correct order during connection.◀
The so-called starting aid terminal in the en‐
gine compartment acts as the battery's posi‐
tive terminal.
Open the cover of the starting aid terminal.
A special nut serves as the negative terminal of
the battery.
Connecting the cables
Before you begin, switch off all unnecessary
electronic systems/power consumers, such as
the radio, on the assisting and receiving vehi‐
cles.
1.
Open the cover of the starting aid terminal.
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive
jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding starting
aid terminal of the vehicle providing assis‐
tance.
3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end
of the cable to the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding starting
aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative
jumper cable to the negative terminal of
the battery, or to the corresponding engine
or body ground of assisting vehicle.
5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the
negative terminal of the battery, or to the
corresponding engine or body ground of
the vehicle to be started.
Starting the engine
Never use spray fluids to start the engine.
1.
Start the engine of the assisting vehicle
and let it run for several minutes at an in‐
creased idle speed.
2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is to be
started in the usual way.
Seite 288
Mobility Breakdown assistance
288
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
If the first starting attempt is not success‐
ful, wait a few minutes before making an‐
other attempt in order to allow the dis‐
charged battery to recharge.
3. Let both engines run for several minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the re‐
verse order.
Check the battery and recharge if needed.
Tow-starting and towing
Information
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated,
e.g. approach control warning with light brak‐
ing function. There is risk of an accident.
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to
tow-starting/towing.◀
Transporting the vehicle
Information
CAUTION
The vehicle can be damaged when tow‐
ing the vehicle with a single lifted axle. There is
risk of property damage. The vehicle should
only be transported on a loading platform.◀
CAUTION
When lifting the vehicle by the tow fitting
or body and chassis parts; damage can occur
on vehicle parts. There is risk of property dam‐
age. Lift vehicle using suitable means.◀
CAUTION
With transport on a loading platform, do
not fasten vehicle by the chassis.◀
Tow truck
The vehicle should only be transported on a
loading platform.
Towing other vehicles
Information
WARNING
If the approved gross vehicle weight of
the towing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle to
be towed, the tow fitting can tear off or it will
not be possible to control the vehicle's re‐
sponse. There is risk of an accident! Make sure
that the gross vehicle weight of the towing ve‐
hicle is heavier than the vehicle to be towed.◀
CAUTION
If the tow bar or tow rope is attached in‐
correctly, damage to other vehicle parts can
occur. There is risk of property damage. Cor‐
rectly attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow
fitting.◀
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system, de‐
pending on local regulations.
▷ If the electrical system has failed, clearly
identify the vehicle being towed by placing
a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win‐
dow.
Tow bar
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles.
Seite 289
Breakdown assistance Mobility
289
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting
the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe
the following:
▷ Maneuvering capability is limited going
around corners.
▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it
is secured with an offset.
Tow rope
When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure
that the tow rope is taut.
To avoid jerking and the associated stresses
on the vehicle components when towing, al‐
ways use nylon ropes or nylon straps.
Tow fitting
General information
The screw-in tow fitting should always be car‐
ried in the vehicle.
The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front
or rear of the BMW.
The tow fitting is found in the onboard vehicle
tool kit, refer to page 281.
Information
CAUTION
If the tow fitting is not used as intended,
there can be damage to the vehicle or to the
tow fitting. There is risk of property damage.
Observe the notes on using the tow fitting.◀
Use of the tow fitting:
▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with the
vehicle and screw it all the way in.
▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved
roads only.
▷ Use tow fitting located in the front only for
positioning the vehicle.
▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g.,
do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting.
Screw thread for tow fitting
Push out the cover by pressing on the top
edge.
Tow-starting
Steptronic transmission
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
Tow-starting the engine is not possible due to
the transmission.
Have the cause of the starting problems fixed.
Seite 290
Mobility Breakdown assistance
290
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Care
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Car washes
General information
Regularly remove foreign objects such as
leaves in the area below the windshield when
the hood is raised.
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in
winter. Intense soiling and road salt can dam‐
age the vehicle.
Steam blaster and high-pressure
washer
Information
CAUTION
When cleaning with high-pressure wash‐
ers, components can be damaged due to the
pressure or temperatures being too high.
There is risk of property damage. Maintain suf‐
ficient distance and do not spray too long con‐
tinuously. Follow the user's manual for the
high-pressure washer.◀
Distances and temperature
▷ Maximum temperature: 140 ℉/60 ℃.
▷ Minimum distance from sensors, cameras,
seals: 12 in/30 cm.
▷ Minimum distance from glass sunroof:
31.5 inches/80 cm.
Automatic car washes
Information
Note the following:
▷ Give preference to cloth car washes or
those that use soft brushes in order to
avoid paint damage.
▷ Make sure that the wheels and tires are not
damaged by the transport mechanisms.
▷ Fold in the exterior mirrors; otherwise, they
may be damaged, depending on the width
of the vehicle.
▷ Deactivate the rain sensor, refer to
page 104, to avoid unintentional wiper acti‐
vation.
▷ In some cases, an unintentional alarm can
be triggered by the interior motion sensor
of the alarm system. Follow the instruc‐
tions on avoiding an unintentional alarm,
refer to page 70.
CAUTION
Too high guide rails in car washes can
damage body parts. There is risk of property
damage. Avoid car washes with guide rails
higher than 4 in/10 cm.◀
Before driving into a car wash
In order to ensure that the vehicle can roll in a
car wash, take the following steps:
1.
Drive into the car wash.
2. Engage selector lever position N.
3. Deactivating Automatic Hold, refer to
page 102.
4. Release the parking brake.
5. Switch off drive readiness.
Seite 291
Care Mobility
291
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
In this way, operating readiness remains
switched on, and a Check-Control mes‐
sage is displayed.
The vehicle cannot be locked from the outside
when in selector lever position N. A signal
sounds when an attempt is made to lock the
vehicle.
For activation of drive readiness:
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
When the Start/Stop button is pressed without
stepping on the brake, a Check Control mes‐
sage is displayed.
Selector lever position
Selector lever position P is automatically en‐
gaged after approx. 25 minutes.
Headlights
▷ Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or
acidic cleansers.
▷ Soak areas that have been dirtied e. g.,
from insects, with shampoo and wash off
with water.
▷ Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an
ice scraper.
After washing the vehicle
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes
briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action
can be reduced and corrosion of the brake
discs can occur.
Completely remove all residues on the win‐
dows, to minimize loss of visibility due to
smearing and to reduce wiper noises and
wiper blade wear.
Vehicle care
Car care products
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
using car care and cleaning products from
BMW.
WARNING
Cleansers can contain substances that
are dangerous and harmful to your health.
There is risk of injuries. When cleaning the in‐
terior, open the doors or windows. Only use
products intended for cleaning vehicles. Fol‐
low the instructions on the container.◀
Vehicle paint
Regular care contributes to driving safety and
value retention. Environmental influences in
areas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐
taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can af‐
fect the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the fre‐
quency and extent of your car care to these
influences.
Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel, oil,
grease or bird droppings, must be removed im‐
mediately to prevent the finish from being al‐
tered or discolored.
Matte finish
Only use cleaning and care products suitable
for vehicles with matte finish. These are availa‐
ble from a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Leather care
Remove dust from the leather often, using a
cloth or vacuum cleaner.
Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime
chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased
wear and premature degradation of the leather
surface.
To guard against discoloration, such as from
clothing, provide leather care roughly every
two months.
Seite 292
Mobility Care
292
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐
cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially
more visible.
Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and
grease will gradually break down the protective
layer of the leather surface.
Suitable care products are available from a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Upholstery material care
Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner.
If upholstery is very dirty, e.g., with beverage
stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber cloth
with a suitable interior cleaner.
Clean the upholstery down to the seams using
large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the
material vigorously.
CAUTION
Open Velcro® fasteners on articles of
clothing can damage the seat covers. There is
risk of property damage. Ensure that any Vel‐
cro® fasteners are closed.◀
Caring for special components
Light-alloy wheels
When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral
wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9.
Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam
jets above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufac‐
turer's instructions.
Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents
can destroy the protective layer of adjacent
components, such as the brake disk.
Chrome surfaces
Carefully clean components such as the radia‐
tor grille or door handles with an ample supply
of water, possibly with shampoo added, partic‐
ularly when they have been exposed to road
salt.
Rubber components
Environmental influences can cause surface
soiling of rubber parts and a loss of gloss. For
cleaning, use only water and suitable care
products, the manufacturer of your vehicle rec‐
ommends original BMW care products.
Treat especially worn rubber parts with rubber
care agents at regular intervals. When cleaning
rubber seals, do not use any silicon-containing
car care products in order to avoid damage or
noises.
Fine wood parts
Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐
nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a
soft cloth.
Plastic components
These include:
▷ Imitation leather surfaces.
▷ Roofliner.
▷ Lamp lenses.
▷ Instrument cluster cover.
▷ Matt black spray-coated components.
▷ Painted parts in the interior.
Clean with a microfiber cloth.
Dampen cloth lightly with water.
Do not soak the roofliner.
CAUTION
Cleansers that contain alcohol or sol‐
vents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty
grease removers, fuel, or such, can damage
plastic parts. There is risk of property damage.
Clean with a microfiber cloth. Dampen cloth
lightly with water.◀
Safety belts
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
thus have a negative impact on safety.
Seite 293
Care Mobility
293
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
WARNING
Chemical cleansers can destroy the
safety belt webbing. Missing protective effect
of the safety belts. There is risk of injuries or
danger to life. Use only a mild soapy solution
for cleaning the safety belts.◀
Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety
belts clipped into their buckles.
Do not allow the switchs to retract the safety
belts until they are dry.
Carpets and floor mats
WARNING
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit
the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal.
There is risk of an accident. Stow objects in
the vehicle such that they are secured and
cannot enter into the driver's floor area. Use
floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and
can be safely attached to the floor. Do not use
loose floor mats and do not layer several floor
mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clear‐
ance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats
are securely fastened again after they were re‐
moved, e.g. for cleaning.◀
Floor mats can be removed from the car's inte‐
rior for cleaning.
If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a
microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner.
To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and
forth in the direction of travel only.
Sensor/camera lenses
To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a
cloth moistened with a small amount of glass
detergent.
Displays/screens/protective glass of
the Head-up Display
CAUTION
Chemical cleansers, moisture or fluids of
any kind can damage the surface of displays
and screens. There is risk of property damage.
Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.◀
CAUTION
The surface of displays can be damaged
with improper cleaning. There is risk of prop‐
erty damage. Avoid pressure that is too high
and do not use any scratching materials.◀
Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.
Clean the protective glass of the Head-up Dis‐
play, refer to page 126, using a microfiber cloth
and commercially available dish-washing soap.
Long-term
When the vehicle is shut down for longer than
three months, special measures must be
taken. Further information is available from a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Seite 294
Mobility Care
294
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Seite 295
Care Mobility
295
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Reference
This chapter contains the technical data and an
index that will quickly take you to the information
you need.
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Technical data
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Information
The technical data and specifications in this
Owner's Manual are used as guidance values.
The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this,
for example, due to the selected special equip‐
ment, country version or country-specific
measurement method. Detailed values can be
found in the approval documents, on labels on
the vehicle or can be obtained from a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
The information in the vehicle documents al‐
ways has priority.
Dimensions
The dimensions can vary depending on the
model version, equipment or country-specific
measurement method.
The specified heights do not take into account
attached parts, for example, a roof antenna,
roof racks or spoiler. The heights can deviate,
for example, due to the selected special equip‐
ment, tires, load and chassis version.
Seite 298
Reference Technical data
298
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
BMW 7 Series Sedan
Width with mirrors inches/mm
Width without mirrors inches/mm
Height inches/mm
Height L-models inches/mm
Length inches/mm
Length L-models inches/mm
Wheelbase inches/mm
Wheelbase L-models inches/mm
Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m
Smallest turning radius diam. L-models ft/m
85.4/2,169
74.9/1,902
57.8/1,467
58.2/1,479
201.2/5,108
206.6/5,248
120.9/3,070
126.4/3,210
41.1/12.5
42-42.4/12.8-12.9
Weights
Seite 299
Technical data Reference
299
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Canada only: 750i xDrive
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg
Load lbs/kg
Approved front axle load lbs/kg
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg
Cargo area capacity cu ft
Canada: trunk capacity
740Li
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg
Load lbs/kg
Approved front axle load lbs/kg
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg
Cargo area capacity cu ft
Canada: trunk capacity
750Li xDrive
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg
Load lbs/kg
Approved front axle load lbs/kg
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg
Cargo area capacity cu ft
Canada: trunk capacity
5,705/2,588
960/435
2,840/1,288
3,060/1,388
220/100
18.2
18.2/515cu ft/l
5,450/2,472
960/435
2,585/1,173
3,030/1,374
220/100
18.2
18.2/515cu ft/l
5,870/2,663
960/435
2,900/1,315
3,140/1,424
220/100
18.2
18.2/515cu ft/l
Appendix
Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the ve‐
hicle are listed here.
Seite 301
Appendix Reference
301
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Everything from A to Z
Index
A
ABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐
tem 163
ACC, Active Cruise Control
with Stop & Go 168
Acceleration Assistant, see
Launch Control 106
Accessories and parts 7
Accident prevention, see Ac‐
tive Protection 160
Activated-charcoal filter 206
Activating gesture control 30
Active Blind Spot Detec‐
tion 153
Active comfort chassis 201
Active Cruise Control with
Stop & Go, ACC 168
Active damping adjust‐
ment 201
Active Protection 160
Active roll stabilization 202
Active seat ventilation 92
Active Steering, integral 166
Adaptive brake assistant 163
Adaptive brake lights, see
Brake force display 160
ADAPTIVE drive mode, see
Driving Dynamics Con‐
trol 110
Adaptive Light Control 131
ADAPTIVE, see Driving Dy‐
namics Control 110
Additives, oil 275
Adjustments, seats/head re‐
straints 76
After washing vehicle 292
Airbags 136
Airbags, indicator/warning
light 137
Air circulation, see Recircu‐
lated-air mode 205
Air, dehumidifying, see Cool‐
ing function 204
Air distribution, manual 205
Air flow, automatic climate
control 205
Air outlets, see ventila‐
tion 206
Air pressure, tires 254
Air suspension 200
Alarm system 69
Alarm, unintentional 70
All around the center con‐
sole 16
All around the roofliner 18
All around the steering
wheel 14
All-season tires, see Winter
tires 259
All-wheel-drive, see
xDrive 165
Alternating-code hand-held
transmitter 216
Alternative oil types 275
Ambient air package 211
Ambient light 133, 134
Animal detection, see Night
Vision 147
Antifreeze, washer fluid 106
Antilock Brake System,
ABS 163
Anti-slip control, see
DSC 163
Approved axle load 299
Arrival time 124
Ashtray 217
Ashtray, front 217
Ashtray, rear 218
Assistance when driving
off 163
Attentiveness assistant 161
AUC Automatic Recirculating
Air Control 205
Audio 6
AUTO H button 100
AUTO H button, see Auto‐
matic Hold 100
AUTO intensity 204
Automatic car wash 291
Automatic climate con‐
trol 203
Automatic Cruise Control
with Stop & Go 168
Automatic Curb Monitor 85
Automatic deactivation,
Front-seat passenger air‐
bags 138
Automatic headlight con‐
trol 130
Automatic Hold 100
Automatic locking 68
Automatic Recirculating Air
Control AUC 205
Automatic Soft Closing,
doors 63
Automatic transmission, see
Steptronic transmis‐
sion 106
Automatic unlocking 68
AUTO program, automatic cli‐
mate control 204
AUTO program, intensity 204
Auto Start/Stop function 98
Average fuel consump‐
tion 124
Average speed 124
Axle loads, weights 299
Seite 302
Reference Everything from A to Z
302
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
B
Backrest curvature, see Lum‐
bar support 77
Backrest, seats 76
Backrest, width 77
Band-aids, see First-aid
kit 287
Bar for tow-starting/
towing 289
Basic position, rear seats 80
Battery replacement, vehicle
battery 284
Battery replacement, vehicle
remote control 55
Battery, vehicle 284
Being towed, see tow-start‐
ing/towing 289
Belts, safety belts 80
Beverage holder, cu‐
pholder 228
Blinds, sun protection 72
Bluetooth connection 42
BMW Assist 6
BMW display key 55
BMW Driver’s Guide App 6
BMW gesture control 30
BMW Homepage 6
BMW Internet page 6
BMW maintenance sys‐
tem 279
BMW Touch Command 36
Bonus range, ECO PRO 243
Bottle holder, see Cu‐
pholder 228
Brake assistant 163
Brake assistant, adaptive 163
Brake discs, break-in 234
Brake force display 160
Brake lights, adaptive 160
Brake lights, brake force dis‐
play 160
Brake pads, break-in 234
Braking, hints 235
Breakdown assistance 286
Break-in 234
Brightness of Control Dis‐
play 39
Bulb replacement 282
Bulb replacement, front 282
Bulb replacement, front
lamps 282
Bulb replacement, rear 282
Bulb replacement, tail
lamps 282
Bulbs and lights 282
Button, Start/Stop 97
Bypassing, see Jump-start‐
ing 287
C
California Proposition 65
Warning 8
Calling up mirror adjust‐
ment 68
Calling up seat adjust‐
ment 68
Calling up steering wheel ad‐
justment 68
Camera-based damping ad‐
justment 201
Camera lenses, care 294
Camera, rearview camera,
without Surround View 184
Camera, see Surround
View 187
Can holder, see Cu‐
pholder 228
Captain’s chair 89
Car battery 284
Car care products 292
Care, displays 294
Care, vehicle 292
Cargo 237
Cargo area, storage compart‐
ments 229
Cargo, securing 238
Cargo straps, securing
cargo 238
Car key, see Remote con‐
trol 54
Carpet, care 294
Cartridge replacement, see
Ambient air package 211
Car wash 291
Catalytic converter, see Hot
exhaust system 235
CBS Condition Based Serv‐
ice 279
Center armrest 227
Center console 16
Central locking system 63
Central screen, see Control
Display 21
Changes, technical, see Own
Safety 7
Changing parts 281
Changing wheels 282
Changing wheels/tires 258
Chassis number, see vehicle
identification number 10
Check Control 114
Checking the engine oil level
electronically 273
Checking the oil level elec‐
tronically 273
Children, seating position 93
Children, transporting
safely 93
Child restraint fixing sys‐
tem 93
Child restraint fixing system
LATCH 95
Child restraint fixing systems,
mounting 94
Child safety locks 96
Child seat, mounting 94
Child seats 93
Chrome parts, care 293
Cigarette lighter 218
Cleaning displays 294
Climate control 203
Climate control on roof‐
liner 209
Clock 118
Closing the trunk lid with no-
touch activation 66
Seite 303
Everything from A to Z Reference
303
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Closing via door lock 62
Closing without remote con‐
trol 62
Clothes hooks 229
Coasting 245
Coasting with engine decou‐
pled, coasting 245
Coasting with idling en‐
gine 245
Collision warning with braking
function 140
Collision warning with City
braking function 140
Combination switch, see Turn
signals 103
Combination switch, see
Wiper system 103
Comfort Access 65
COMFORT drive mode, see
Driving Dynamics Con‐
trol 110
COMFORT PLUS drive
mode, see Driving Dynamics
Control 110
COMFORT PLUS, see Driv‐
ing Dynamics Control 110
COMFORT, see Driving Dy‐
namics Control 110
Communication 6
Compact wheel, see Emer‐
gency wheel 282
Compartments in the
doors 226
Compatible devices 42
Compatible mobile
phones 42
Compressor 260
Computer, see on-board
computer 122
Condensation on win‐
dows 206
Condensation under the vehi‐
cle 236
Condition Based Service
CBS 279
Confirmation signal 68
ConnectedDrive 6
ConnectedDrive Services 6
Connecting device 41
Connecting electrical devi‐
ces 219
Connecting mobile phone 41
Connecting smartphone 41
Connecting telephone 41
Connections 41
Continued driving with a flat
tire 267, 270
Control Display 21
Control Display, settings 38
Controller 22
Control systems, driving sta‐
bility 163
Convenient opening with the
remote control 61
Coolant 277
Coolant level 277
Coolant temperature 118
Cooler 223
Cooling function 204
Cooling, maximum 204
Cooling system 277
Corrosion on brake discs 236
Cosmetic mirror 217
Courtesy lamps with the vehi‐
cle locked 61
Cross traffic warning 197
Cruise control 175
Cruise control, active with
Stop & Go 168
Cruising range 123
Cupholder 228
Current fuel consump‐
tion 123
D
Damage, tires 258
Damping control, dy‐
namic 201
Data, technical 298
Daytime running lights 131
Defrosting, see Windows, de‐
frosting 206
Dehumidifying, air 204
Deleting personal data 40
Deletion of personal data 40
Departure time, parked-car
heating 211
Departure time, parked-car
ventilation 211
Destination distance 124
Device list 41
Digital clock 118
Dimensions 298
Dimmable exterior mirrors 86
Dimmable interior rearview
mirror 86
Direction indicator, see Turn
signals 103
Display in windshield 126
Display lighting, see Instru‐
ment lighting 133
Displays 113
Displays, cleaning 294
Disposal, coolant 278
Disposal, vehicle battery 285
Distance control, see
PDC 180
Distance to destination 124
Divided screen view, split
screen 27
Door handle lighting, see wel‐
come lights 130
Door lock 62
Door lock, see Remote con‐
trol 54
Doors, Automatic Soft Clos‐
ing 63
Downhill control 165
Drive mode 110
Drive-off assistant 163
Drive-off assistant, see
DSC 163
Drive readiness, see starting
the engine 97
Driving Dynamics Con‐
trol 110
Seite 304
Reference Everything from A to Z
304
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Driving instructions, break-
in 234
Driving notes, general 234
Driving stability control sys‐
tems 163
Driving style analysis 246
Driving tips 234
DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol 163
DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐
trol 164
Dynamic Damping Con‐
trol 201
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 163
Dynamic Traction Control
DTC 164
E
ECO PRO 241
ECO PRO, bonus range 243
ECO PRO display 241
ECO PRO drive mode, see
Driving Dynamics Con‐
trol 110
ECO PRO driving mode 241
ECO PRO driving style analy‐
sis 246
ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL drive
mode, see Driving Dynamics
Control 110
ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL, see
Driving Dynamics Con‐
trol 110
ECO PRO mode 241
ECO PRO, route-ahead assis‐
tant 244
ECO PRO, see Driving Dy‐
namics Control 110
ECO PRO Tip - driving in‐
struction 243
Electronic oil measure‐
ment 273
Electronic Stability Program
ESP, see DSC 163
Emergency detection, remote
control 55
Emergency release, fuel filler
flap 250
Emergency Request 286
Emergency start function, en‐
gine start 55
Emergency unlocking, trans‐
mission lock 106
Emergency unlocking, trunk
lid 65
Emergency wheel 282
Energy control 123
Energy recovery 123
Engine, automatic Start/Stop
function 98
Engine, automatic switch-on/
off 98
Engine compartment 271
Engine compartment, work‐
ing in 272
Engine coolant 277
Engine idling when driving,
coasting 245
Engine oil 273
Engine oil, adding 274
Engine oil additives 275
Engine oil change 275
Engine oil filler neck 274
Engine oil temperature 118
Engine oil types, suitable 275
Engine start during malfunc‐
tion 55
Engine start, jump-start‐
ing 287
Engine start, see drive readi‐
ness 97
Engine stopping, see drive
readiness 97
Engine temperature 118
Entering a car wash 291
Entertainment 6
Equipment, interior 215
Error displays, see Check
Control 114
ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐
gram, see DSC 163
Exchanging wheels/tires 258
Executive Drive Pro 201
Exhaustion warner 161
Exhaust system 235
Exterior lighting during un‐
locking 60
Exterior mirror, automatic
dimming feature 86
Exterior mirrors 85
External start 287
External temperature dis‐
play 118
External temperature warn‐
ing 118
Eyes for securing cargo 238
F
Failure message, see Check
Control 114
False alarm, see Unintentional
alarm 70
Fan, see Air flow 205
Filler neck for engine oil 274
Fine wood, care 293
First-aid kit 287
Fitting for towing, see tow-
starting/towing 289
Flat tire, changing
wheels 282
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 268
Flat tire, repairing 260
Flat tire, Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM 264
Flat tire, warning
lamp 266, 269
Flooding 235
Floor carpet, care 294
Floor mats, care 294
Folding table in the rear 223
Fold-out position, wiper 105
Foot brake 235
Fragrance cartridge, see Am‐
bient air package 211
Seite 305
Everything from A to Z Reference
305
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Fragrance, see Ambient air
package 211
Fragrancing, see Ambient air
package 211
Front airbags 136
Front center armrest 227
Front cupholder 228
Front fog lights 132
Front passenger seat, adjust‐
ing 78
Front-seat passenger airbags,
automatic deactivation 138
Front-seat passenger airbags,
indicator lamp 138
Front seats 76
FTM Flat Tire Monitor 268
Fuel 252
Fuel consumption, see Aver‐
age fuel consumption 124
Fuel filler flap 250
Fuel gauge 118
Fuel lid 250
Fuel quality 252
Fuel recommendation 252
Fuel, tank capacity 300
Fuse 285
G
Garage door opener, see Uni‐
versal Integrated Remote
Control 215
Gasoline 252
Gear change, Steptronic
transmission 106
Gear shift indicator 120
General driving notes 234
General settings 38
Gentleman function 78
Gesture 30
Gesture control 30
Gesture operation 30
Glare shield 217
Glass sunroof, powered 73
Glove compartment 225
Gross vehicle weight, ap‐
proved 299
H
Handbrake, see Parking
brake 100
Hand-held transmitter, alter‐
nating code 216
Hand movement 30
Hazard warning flashers 286
HDC Hill Descent Con‐
trol 165
Head airbags 136
Headlight control, auto‐
matic 130
Headlight courtesy delay fea‐
ture 130
Headlight courtesy delay fea‐
ture via remote control 61
Headlight flasher 103
Headlight glass 282
Headlights, care 292
Head restraint pillows 84
Head restraints 76
Head restraints, front 82
Head restraints, rear 83
Head-up Display 126
Head-up Display, care 294
Heating, see Parked-car heat‐
ing 209
Heavy cargo, stowing 238
High-beam Assistant 132
High beams 103
High beams/low beams, see
High-beam Assistant 132
Hill Descent Control
HDC 165
Hills 236
Hill start assistant, see Drive-
off assistant 163
Holder for beverages 228
Homepage 6
Hood 272
Horn 14
Hotel function, trunk lid 65
Hot exhaust system 235
HUD Head-up Display 126
Hydroplaning 235
I
iBrake — Post Crash 161
Ice warning, see External
temperature warning 118
Icy roads, see External tem‐
perature warning 118
Identification marks, tires 256
Identification number, see ve‐
hicle identification num‐
ber 10
Idle state, operating and drive
readiness 19
iDrive 21
Ignition key, see Remote con‐
trol 54
Indication of a flat
tire 266, 269
Indicator and alarm lamps,
see Check Control 114
Indicator lamp, see Check
Control 114
Individual air distribution 205
Individual settings, see pro‐
files 58
Inflation pressure, tires 254
Inflation pressure warning
FTM, tires 268
Information 6
Initialize, Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM 265
Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor
FTM 269
Instrument cluster 113
Instrument lighting 133
Integral Active Steering 166
Integrated key 54
Integrated Owner's Manual in
the vehicle 49
Intelligent Emergency Re‐
quest 286
Intelligent Safety 139
Seite 306
Reference Everything from A to Z
306
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Intensity, AUTO pro‐
gram 204
Interior equipment 215
Interior lights 133
Interior lights during unlock‐
ing 60
Interior lights with the vehicle
locked 61
Interior motion sensor 70
Interior rearview mirror, auto‐
matic dimming feature 86
Internet page 6
Interval display, service re‐
quirements 119
Ionization, see Ambient air
package 211
J
Jacking points for the vehicle
jack 282
Joystick, Steptronic transmis‐
sion 106
Jump-starting 287
K
Key/remote control 54
Keyless Go, see Comfort Ac‐
cess 65
Kickdown, Steptronic trans‐
mission 106
Knee airbag 137
L
Label on recommended
tires 259
Lamp in the exterior mirror,
see Active Blind Spot De‐
tection 153
Lamp in the exterior mirror,
see crossing traffic warn‐
ing 197
Lamp replacement 282
Lamp replacement, front 282
Lamp replacement, rear 282
Lane departure warning 150
Lane margin, warning 150
Language, on the Control
Display 38
Lashing eyes, securing
cargo 238
LATCH child restraint sys‐
tem 95
Launch Control 106
Leather, care 292
LEDs, replace light-emitting
diodes 282
Light alloy wheels, care 293
Light control 131
Lighting 129
Lights 129
Lights and bulbs 282
Light switch 129
List of all messages 40
Load 238
Loading 237
Lock, door 62
Locking, automatic 68
Locking, settings 67
Locking via door lock 62
Locking with remote con‐
trol 60
Lock, power window 71
Locks, doors, and win‐
dows 96
Low beams 129
Low beams, automatic, see
High-beam Assistant 132
Lower back support 77
Luggage rack, see Roof-
mounted luggage rack 238
Lumbar support 77
M
Maintenance 279
Maintenance require‐
ments 279
Maintenance, service require‐
ments 119
Maintenance system,
BMW 279
Make-up mirror 217
Malfunction displays, see
Check Control 114
Manual air distribution 205
Manual air flow 205
Manual brake, see Parking
brake 100
Manual mode, Steptronic
transmission 106
Manual operation, door
lock 62
Manual operation, exterior
mirrors 85
Manual operation, fuel filler
flap 250
Marking, run-flat tires 260
Massage seat, front 88
Massage seat, rear 88
Master key, see Remote con‐
trol 54
Maximum cooling 204
Maximum speed, display 120
Maximum speed, winter
tires 259
Measurement, units of 39
Medical kit 287
Memory for seat, mirrors,
steering wheel 87
Menu in instrument clus‐
ter 121
Menus 22
Menus, operating, iDrive 21
Messages 40
Messages, see Check Con‐
trol 114
Microfilter 206
Minimum tread, tires 258
Mirror 85
Mirror memory 87
Mobile communication devi‐
ces in the vehicle 235
Mobility System 260
Modifications, technical, see
Own Safety 7
Seite 307
Everything from A to Z Reference
307
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Moisture in headlight 282
Monitor, see Control Dis‐
play 21
Mounting of child restraint
systems 94
Moving sun visor 217
Multifunction steering wheel,
buttons 14
Multimedia 6
N
Navigation 6
Near-field communication 42
Neck restraints, front, see
Head restraints 82
Neck restraints, rear, see
Head restraints 83
Neutral cleaner, see wheel
cleaner 293
New wheels and tires 258
NFC, see near-field commu‐
nication 42
Night Vision 147
Night Vision device, see Night
Vision 147
Nylon rope for tow-starting/
towing 289
O
OBD Onboard Diagnosis 280
OBD, see OBD Onboard Di‐
agnosis 280
Object detection, see Night
Vision 147
Octane rating, see Recom‐
mended fuel grade 252
Odometer 123
Oil 273
Oil, adding 274
Oil additives 275
Oil change 275
Oil change interval, service
requirements 119
Oil filler neck 274
Oil types, alternative 275
Oil types, suitable 275
Old batteries, disposal 285
Onboard computer, Control
Display 125
On-board computer, instru‐
ment cluster 122
Onboard monitor, see Control
Display 21
Onboard vehicle tool kit 281
Opening and closing 54
Opening the trunk lid with no-
touch activation 66
Opening via door lock 62
Opening without remote con‐
trol 62
Opening with remote control,
closing with remote control,
unlocking with remote con‐
trol 60
Operating concept, iDrive 21
Operating readiness 19
Operating via iDrive 22
Operating with the control‐
ler 22
Operation via touchscreen 25
Optional equipment, standard
equipment 7
Outside air, see AUC 205
Overheating of engine, see
Coolant temperature 118
Own Safety 7
P
Paint, vehicle 292
Pairing device 41
Pairing mobile phone 41
Pairing smartphone 41
Pairing telephone 41
Panorama View, see Sur‐
round View 187
Panoramic glass sunroof 73
Parallel parking assistant 193
Park Distance Control
PDC 180
Parked vehicle, condensa‐
tion 236
Parking aid, see PDC 180
Parking assistant 193
Parking brake 100
Parking lights 129
Parking with Automatic
Hold 100
Parts and accessories 7
Passenger side mirror, tilting
downward 85
PDC Park Distance Con‐
trol 180
Pedestrian detection, see
Night Vision 147
Pedestrian warning with City
braking function 144
Personal profile, see pro‐
files 58
Pillows 84
Pinch protection system,
glass sunroof 75
Pinch protection system, win‐
dows 71
Plastic, care 293
Post Crash — iBrake 161
Power failure 285
Power sunroof, glass 73
Power windows 70
Prescribed engine oil
types 275
Pressure, tire air pres‐
sure 254
Pressure warning FTM,
tires 268
Profiles 58
Profiles, see profiles 58
Programmable memory but‐
tons, iDrive 28
Protective function, glass
sunroof 75
Protective function, win‐
dows 71
Push-and-turn switch, see
Controller 22
Seite 308
Reference Everything from A to Z
308
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Q
Queuing Assistant, see
Steering and lane guidance
assistant including Traffic
Jam Assist 177
R
Radiator fluid 277
Radio 6
Radio-operated key, see Re‐
mote control 54
Rain sensor 104
Rear automatic climate con‐
trol 207
Rear axle steering 166
Rear center armrest 227
Rear collision prevention 159
Rear collision warning 159
Rear cooler 223
Rear drink holder 228
Rear seats 78
Rear seats, basic position 80
Rear vanity mirror 86
Rearview camera, see Sur‐
round View 187
Rearview camera, without
Surround View 184
Rearview mirror 85
Rear window defroster 206
Recirculated-air mode 205
Recommended fuel
grade 252
Recommended tire
brands 259
Refueling 250
Remaining range 123
Remote control/key 54
Remote control, malfunc‐
tion 62
Remote control, univer‐
sal 215
Remote control with dis‐
play 55
Replace front fog lamps 282
Replace front lamps 282
Replace headlamps 282
Replace key lights 282
Replace LED front fog
lamps 282
Replace LED headlights 282
Replace light-emitting diodes,
LEDs 282
Replacement fuse 285
Replace tail lamps 282
Replacing parts 281
Replacing wheels/tires 258
Reporting safety malfunc‐
tions 10
RES CNCL button, see Active
Cruise Control, ACC 168
RES CNCL button, see Cruise
control 175
Reserve warning, see
Range 123
Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 265
Retaining straps, securing
cargo 238
Retreaded tires 259
Roadside parking lights 130
Roller sunblinds 72
RON recommended fuel
grade 252
Roofliner 18
Roof load capacity 299
Roof-mounted luggage
rack 238
Rope for tow-starting/
towing 289
Route-ahead assistant 244
RSC Run Flat System Com‐
ponent, see Run-flat
tires 260
Rubber components,
care 293
Run-flat tires 260
S
Safe braking 235
Safety belt reminder for driv‐
er's seat and front passen‐
ger seat 81
Safety belts 80
Safety belts, care 293
Safety package, see Active
Protection 160
Safety switch, windows 71
Safety systems, airbags 136
Safety systems, see Intelli‐
gent Safety 139
Saving fuel 240
Screen, see Control Dis‐
play 21
Screwdriver, see Onboard ve‐
hicle tool kit 281
Screw thread for tow fitting,
see tow-starting/towing,
thread for tow fitting, see
tow-starting/towing 289
Sealant 260
Seat belts, see Safety
belts 80
Seat cushion heating 91
Seat heating 91
Seating position for chil‐
dren 93
Seat, mirror, and steering
wheel memory 87
Seats 76
Seats, front 76
Seats, rear 78
Seat ventilation 92
Selection list in instrument
cluster 121
Selector lever, Steptronic
transmission 106
Self-leveling suspension 200
Sensors, care 294
Service and warranty 8
Service requirements, Condi‐
tion Based Service
CBS 279
Service requirements, dis‐
play 119
Services, ConnectedDrive 6
Seite 309
Everything from A to Z Reference
309
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
SET button, see Active
Cruise Control, ACC 168
SET button, see Cruise con‐
trol 175
Settings, locking/unlock‐
ing 67
Settings on the Control Dis‐
play 38
Settings, storing for seat, mir‐
rors, steering wheel 87
Shift paddles on the steering
wheel 106
Shoulder support front 77
Shoulder support rear 79
Side airbag 136
Side collision warning 156
Signaling, horn 14
Signals when unlocking 68
Sitting safely 76
Size 298
Ski and snowboard bag 224
Slide/tilt glass roof 73
Smoker's package 217
Snow chains 264
Socket, OBD Onboard Diag‐
nostics 280
Sockets, see Connecting
electrical devices 220
Software update 46
SOS button 286
Spare fuse 285
Spare tire, see Emergency
wheel 282
Speed, average 124
Speed limiter, display 120
Speed Limit Information 120
Speed warning 125
Split screen 27
Sport displays, torque dis‐
play, performance dis‐
play 125
SPORT drive mode, see Driv‐
ing Dynamics Control 110
SPORT INDIVIDUAL drive
mode, see Driving Dynamics
Control 110
SPORT INDIVIDUAL, see
Driving Dynamics Con‐
trol 110
Sport program, Steptronic
transmission 106
SPORT, see Driving Dynam‐
ics Control 110
Stability control systems 163
Start/stop, automatic func‐
tion 98
Start/Stop button 97
Start function during malfunc‐
tion 55
Starting, see drive readi‐
ness 97
Starting the engine, see drive
readiness 97
Status control display,
tires 265
Status information, iDrive 27
Status of Owner's Manual 7
Status, vehicle 126
Steering and lane guidance
assistant including Traffic
Jam Assist 177
Steering, Integral Active
Steering 166
Steering wheel, adjusting 87
Steering wheel heating 87
Steering wheel memory 87
Steptronic Sport transmis‐
sion, see Steptronic trans‐
mission 106
Steptronic transmission 106
Stopping the engine, see
drive readiness 97
Storage compartment on the
center console 226
Storage compartments 225
Storage compartments, loca‐
tions 225
Storage, tires 260
Storing the vehicle 294
Suitable engine oil types 275
Summer tires, tread 258
Sun visor 217
Supplementary text mes‐
sage 117
Surround View 187
Suspension settings 110
Switch for Dynamic Driving
Control 110
Switch, see Cockpit 14
Symbols 6
Symbols in the status field 27
SYNC program, automatic cli‐
mate control 206
T
Table 223
Tablet 36
Tachometer 118
Technical changes, see Own
Safety 7
Technical data 298
Telephone 6
Temperature, automatic cli‐
mate control 204
Temperature display for ex‐
ternal temperature 118
Temperature, engine oil 118
Tempomat, see Active Cruise
Control 168
Terminal, starting aid 288
Text message, supplemen‐
tary 117
Theft alarm system, see
Alarm system 69
Thermal camera, see Night
Vision 147
Through-loading system 222
Tilt alarm sensor 70
Time of arrival 124
Tire damage 258
Tire identification marks 256
Tire inflation pressure 254
Tire inflation pressure moni‐
tor, see FTM 268
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 264
Tires, changing 258
Seite 310
Reference Everything from A to Z
310
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Tire sealant 260
Tires, everything on wheels
and tires 254
Tires, run-flat tires 260
Tire tread 258
Tone 6
Tool 281
Top View, see Surround
View 187
Total vehicle weight 299
Touchpad 26
Touchscreen 25
Tow fitting see tow-starting/
towing 289
Towing 289
Towing, see tow-starting/
towing 289
Tow-starting 289
TPM Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor 264
Traction control 164
TRACTION, driving dynam‐
ics 164
Traffic Jam Assist, see Steer‐
ing and lane guidance assis‐
tant 177
Transmission lock, electronic
unlocking 106
Transmission, see Steptronic
transmission 106
Transporting children
safely 93
Tread, tires 258
Trip computer 125
Trip information, see onboard
computer on the Control
Display 125
Triple turn signal activa‐
tion 103
Trip odometer 123
Trip recorder, see Trip odom‐
eter 123
Trunk lid, closing with no-
touch activation 66
Trunk lid, emergency unlock‐
ing 65
Trunk lid, hotel function 65
Trunk lid, opening with no-
touch activation 66
Trunk lid via remote con‐
trol 61
Turn signal, bulb replace‐
ment 282
Turn signals, operation 103
U
Unintentional alarm 70
Units of measurement 39
Universal remote control 215
Unlock button, Steptronic
transmission 106
Unlocking, automatic 68
Unlocking, settings 67
Unlocking via door lock 62
Updates made after the edito‐
rial deadline 7
Updating software 46
Upholstery care 293
USB interface 221
V
Vanity mirror 217
Variable steering, Integral Ac‐
tive Steering 166
Vehicle battery 284
Vehicle battery, replac‐
ing 284
Vehicle, break-in 234
Vehicle care 292
Vehicle features and op‐
tions 7
Vehicle identification num‐
ber 10
Vehicle jack 282
Vehicle paint 292
Vehicle status 126
Vehicle storage 294
Vehicle wash 291
Ventilation 206
Venting, see ventilation 206
Vent, see ventilation 206
Video 6
VIN, see vehicle identification
number 10
Vitality programs 90
Vitalization programs, see Vi‐
tality programs 90
Voice activation system 33
W
Warning against cross traf‐
fic 197
Warning and indicator lamps,
see Check Control 114
Warning displays, see Check
Control 114
Warning lamp in the exterior
mirror, see Active Blind Spot
Detection 153
Warning lamp in the exterior
mirror, see crossing traffic
warning 197
Warning messages, see
Check Control 114
Warning triangle 287
Warranty 7
Washer fluid 106
Washer nozzles, wind‐
shield 105
Washer system 103
Washing, vehicle 291
Water on roads 235
Weights 299
Welcome lamps during un‐
locking 60
Welcome Light Carpet, see
welcome lights 130
Welcome lights 130
Welcome screen 58
Wheel cleaner 293
Wheels, changing 258
Wheels, everything on wheels
and tires 254
Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor
FTM 268
Seite 311
Everything from A to Z Reference
311
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
Wheels, Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM 264
WiFi 45
WiFi connection 45
Window defroster, rear 206
Windows, powered 70
Windshield washer fluid 106
Windshield washer noz‐
zles 105
Windshield washer sys‐
tem 103
Windshield washer system,
see washer/wiper sys‐
tem 103
Windshield wiper, see wiper
system 103
Winter storage, care 294
Winter tires, suitable
tires 259
Winter tires, tread 258
Wiper 103
Wiper blades, replacing 281
Wiper fluid 106
Wiper, fold-out position 105
Wiper system 103
WLAN connection 44
Wood, care 293
Word match concept, naviga‐
tion 24
Wrench, see Onboard vehicle
tool kit 281
X
xDrive 165
Seite 312
Reference Everything from A to Z
312
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
More about BMW
bmwusa.com
The Ultimate
Driving Machine®
0140 2 964 330 ue
*BL296433000V*
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
